JP7506420B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventional gaming machines have been proposed that use light for dramatic effects (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-342020 A

However, there is room for improvement in the lighting effects of such gaming machines.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform light effects in an optimal manner .

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, a gaming machine having the following configuration can be provided.
A light emitting device is provided for performing light effects,
The light emitting device includes:
A plurality of light emitters;
A light guiding member having an incident surface facing the plurality of light emitting bodies and an exit surface that emits light incident from the incident surface forward ;
a lens member that covers the light exit surface; and a frame member that is arranged to cover at least a portion of the lens member ,
the light guide member is provided with a plurality of slits extending from the incident surface side toward the exit surface side and dividing the incident surface,
the light guide member has a plurality of incident portions separated by the slits,
a width of the slit on the incident surface is smaller than a width of the incident portion on the incident surface;
The frame member is plated,
The lens member is arranged so as to have a lower surface than the frame member .
With this configuration, it is possible to separate the light on the exit surface while providing a unified light presentation without graininess. It is also possible to prevent unintended light, such as ambient light, from entering the lens member and emitting light, thereby reducing the quality of the light presentation.

(1) A gaming machine main body (for example, a cabinet G described below);
A front door (for example, a lower door mechanism DD described later) attached to the gaming machine body so as to be openable and closable;
A door monitoring unit (e.g., a 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 described later) that monitors the opening and closing of the front door;
A control unit (e.g., a sub-control circuit 200 described later) that controls the notification unit,
The control unit is
A monitoring result notifying means for notifying the result of monitoring by the door monitoring unit by the notifying unit (for example, a process for displaying SA221 in FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 67, etc., which will be described later);
A clock means for clocking the date and time (e.g., a sub-RTC 208 described later);
A backup means (e.g., a sub SRAM 203b described later, SA400 in FIG. 79) for backing up date and time information for specifying the date and time measured by the clock means when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off;
A power interruption period determination means (e.g., SA413 in FIG. 80 described later) for determining a power interruption period corresponding to a period from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned on based on a date and time measured by the clock means and a date and time determined from the backed-up date and time information;
A specific notification means (for example, SA413 to SA416 in FIG. 80 described later) for performing a specific notification by the notification unit when the power interruption period identified by the power interruption period identification means exceeds a threshold value,
The notification unit includes a display unit (e.g., a sub-display device 220 described later) that displays an image,
The specific notification means displays, as the specific notification, a prompting image for prompting the player to check inside the gaming machine on the display unit (for example, SA414 in FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 described later),
The notification unit includes a sound output unit (e.g., speakers 35a and 35b described below) that outputs a sound.
The specific notification means further outputs a warning sound from the sound output unit as the specific notification (for example, SA415 in FIG. 80 described later).

According to this configuration, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, a specific notification is issued if the power outage period up to that point exceeds a threshold. This suggests to the operator who turned on the power that the power outage period has exceeded the threshold, and therefore that there may be a period during which the door monitoring unit is not operating and the opening and closing of the front door cannot be monitored. This can increase the operator's vigilance and attention, and encourage them to check the inside of the gaming machine, etc. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being overlooked during the power outage period, and to minimize the damage caused by fraudulent acts.

As a specific notification, in addition to displaying the prompting image, a warning sound can be heard through the ears. This can further increase the operator's vigilance and attention, and more reliably encourage the operator to check the inside of the gaming machine. Furthermore, as a specific notification, a prompting image encouraging the operator to check the inside of the gaming machine is displayed. This can directly encourage the operator to check the inside of the gaming machine through his or her vision.

A gaming machine with the above configuration can prevent fraudulent activity from going unnoticed.

A diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the internal structure of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. A diagram for explaining the playability of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the modes of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A figure showing a pattern arrangement table of the first gaming machine related to this embodiment. A figure showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine related to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, the stop operation modes, and the display combinations, etc., of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. A figure for explaining the limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a pattern code storage area of a first gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a press sequence storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance/start check process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the start of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the end of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a 24-hour door monitoring unit according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a memory map of an EEPROM according to the embodiment; 4 is a memory map of a RAM according to the embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a privileged command according to the embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a general command according to the embodiment. 1A is a diagram for explaining the communication format according to this embodiment, where A shows an overview of the communication format, and B shows an example of the form of communication data when transmitting a random number from a 24-hour door monitoring unit to a host device. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sequence table according to the embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a process for setting a private key according to the embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the processing from startup to monitoring according to the embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of a warning screen displayed in the first warning display process according to the embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a warning screen displayed in the third warning display process according to the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process of the door monitoring unit according to the embodiment; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a port input process according to the embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring process according to the present embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring state detection process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring record determination process according to the embodiment. 5 is a timing chart showing timings for storing opening/closing history information in a first detection result storage area and a second detection result storage area according to the present embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a reception interrupt process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a receiving process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when a privileged command is received according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when a general command is received according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when a random number command is received according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when a login command is received according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a transmission process according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a privileged answer transmission process according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a general answer transmission process according to the embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a hall menu task according to the present embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a hall menu process according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a monitoring history screen according to the embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a warning display setting screen according to the embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a warning display screen according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring task according to the present embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring transmission process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring privilege command transmission process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring general command transmission process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring reception interrupt process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a door monitoring reception process according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a privileged answer receiving process according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a general answer receiving process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when receiving a random number according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a login reception process according to the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a clock readout reception process according to the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a process for issuing a warning based on a power interruption period, which is part of the power interruption process according to the present embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-off elapsed time process for issuing a warning based on a power interruption period, which is part of the power-on process according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a warning notification screen based on a power outage period according to the present embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a process during warning notification until the warning notification based on a power interruption period is terminated, during the power-on process according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of a portion of the configuration of the door mechanism D according to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a door mechanism D according to a second embodiment. 13 shows a front view, a top view, and a bottom view of the entire upper light-emitting performance device according to the second embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the components of the upper light-emitting performance device of the second embodiment, where (a) is an exploded oblique view seen from the right side, (b) is an exploded oblique view seen from the rear, and (c) is an exploded top view seen from above. A cross-sectional view of the upper light-emitting performance device related to the second embodiment. A cross-sectional view of each component of the upper light-emitting performance device related to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a rear unit according to a second embodiment. 11A and 11B are exploded perspective views showing components of an internal unit according to a second embodiment, in which (a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the right front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view seen from above. 1A is a top view showing the positional relationship between the light-emitting member and the light-guiding member in the installed state, FIG. 1B is a partially enlarged view thereof, FIG. 1C is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the light-guiding member cut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 1D is a transverse cross-sectional view of a portion of the light-guiding member cut in the horizontal direction. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a case member according to a second embodiment, as viewed from the right front. 1A is a rear view of the internal unit from which the light emitting member has been removed, viewed obliquely from above; FIG. 1B is a partially enlarged view thereof; and FIG. 11A and 11B are exploded perspective views showing components of a cover unit according to a second embodiment, in which FIG. 11A is a view seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a duct unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the duct unit according to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a duct unit according to a second embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining the attachment/detachment means of the water storage section in the second embodiment, where (a) is an exploded oblique view of the duct unit seen from the rear, and (b) is an oblique view of the water storage section seen from the right front. 1A is a perspective view of the screen unit, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the screen unit as viewed from the right front. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a screen unit according to a second embodiment.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that in this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine.

[1. Structure of a Pachislot Machine]
First, the structure of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the slot machine 1, and Figure 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the slot machine 1. For ease of explanation, the following explanation of the external structure may include a part of the internal structure, and the explanation of the internal structure may include a part of the external structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 has a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged at the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged at the lower front part of the cabinet G.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that the rear wall G3 and bottom wall G5 are not shown in Figures 1 and 2. The top wall G4 of the cabinet G has two openings G4a that penetrate in the vertical direction and are spaced a certain distance apart in the horizontal direction. Wooden plate members G4b are attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to secure the slot machine 1 to the game island (not shown) when it is installed in an amusement facility, and as long as such a method of securing the fastening is ensured, it can be made of metal or resin, or can be formed integrally with the top wall G4. As long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, some or all of the components can be made of wood or resin.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G102 that opens forward is formed on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space across the intermediate support plate G1, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. The upper space is the space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and contains the main display device 210, which will be described later, and the like. The lower space is the space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and contains the reel unit RU, the main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, as long as each device etc. can be appropriately accommodated within the cabinet G, the cabinet G may not have a partition between the upper and lower spaces. The cabinet G may simply be referred to as a "box" or "main body", or, since it functions as a frame that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it may also be referred to as a "main body frame", "support body", "support frame", "fixing frame", etc.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. In other words, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door provided on the front side of the slot machine 1.

The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are each attached to the cabinet G so as to be freely opened and closed, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Note that it is also possible to configure either the upper door mechanism UD or the lower door mechanism DD to be openable and closable by the above-mentioned opening and closing mechanism, while the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in the open state.

The upper door mechanism UD has a performance display window UD1 provided in the center, and an upper lamp 23 provided above the performance display window UD1. The performance display window UD1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows the performance image displayed on a screen device C that constitutes the main display device 210 (described below) provided on the rear side of the window to be viewed. Note that in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays the performance through the performance display window UD1 may be described as the main performance display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 located approximately in the center of its upper part, and a reel unit RU attached to the rear side of the main display window 4, on the inside of the cabinet G.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body, and multiple (e.g., 20) patterns are drawn on the reel band at a predetermined interval along the rotation direction of the reel. In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is, for example, configured as a transparent panel made of resin, and at least a part (e.g., three) of the patterns on the periphery of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R can be seen. Additionally, light sources (reel lamps, which are included in the lamps and LEDs described below) are provided inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at positions where the symbols can be seen at least through the main display window 4, and at least while each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is spinning, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant brightness, ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a sub-performance display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4, and a performance button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-performance display unit 22 displays performance images displayed on the sub-display device 220 described below. The sub-performance display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a performance display, but also as one of the performance buttons. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that accepts performance operations (performance operations) by the player.

The lower door mechanism DD has a roughly horizontal base formed below the main display window 4, and includes a MAX BET button 6a, a 1 BET button 6b, and a settlement button 9 on the left side, a performance button 10a located roughly in the center, and a medal slot 5 on the right side.

The MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b are operation units that accept game operations (betting operations, which can also be called "insertion operations" or "betting operations") by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. When the MAX BET button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (e.g., 3 medals) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than that difference, the maximum number of medals is bet. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than that difference or more, no medals are bet. Also, when the 1 BET button 6b is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (settlement operation) to return (settle) credited medals. If the settlement button 9 is operated when there are no credited medals, the player may be able to accept a game operation (C/P mode selection operation) to select either a credit mode (C mode) in which medals inserted or paid out are credited, or a pay mode (P mode) in which medals are not credited, within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). In other words, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The performance button 10a is an operation unit that accepts the player's operation (performance operation) for performance.

The medal insertion slot 5 accepts medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 from outside by a player. The accepted medals are detected by a selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not they are valid medals. If a single accepted medal is not valid, the accepted medal is returned from a medal payout outlet 11, which will be described later. If a single accepted medal is valid and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medal is returned from a medal payout outlet 11, which will be described later.

The lower door mechanism DD also has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned base. The information display device 14 is configured to include multiple lamps (LEDs) and a 7-segment LED, and displays information related to the game depending on the lighting state of the lamps.

The lower door mechanism DD has a start lever 7 located on the left side below the base, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism 15 located on the right side. The start lever 7 is attached so that it can be tilted freely within a predetermined angle range, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (start operation) by the player to start a game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (stop operation) by the player to stop the respective rotations.

The locking mechanism 15 is, for example, a key cylinder lock. When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the manager of the amusement store (for example, a store clerk of the amusement store, etc.; the same applies below) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the right to unlock the door, and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. The locking mechanism 15 may not only have the function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism, but also the function of a reset switch. For example, when the manager of the amusement store inserts the door key into the keyhole and turns it to the left, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described below. In this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD can also be opened in conjunction with this, or a separate locking mechanism corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be provided so that the opening and closing can be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a lower panel 13 located in the center of its lower part, a medal tray 12 located below the lower panel 13, a medal payout opening 11 located above the medal tray 12, and sound transmission holes 24a, 24b located on the left and right of the medal payout opening 11.

The lower back panel 13 is composed of a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source (lower back lamp included in the lamps and LEDs described later) for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachinko slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from a hopper device 32 described later and those returned from a selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a, 24b are on the rear side of each, and transmit sound such as sound effects and background music output from speakers 35a, 35b (the symbol of the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) attached to the inside of the cabinet G toward the front side of the pachinko slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided in response to the interior of the cabinet G being divided into an upper space and a lower space, but as long as the opening in the cabinet G can be opened and closed appropriately, they can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. They can also be configured as a double door mechanism in the front-to-rear direction (for example, an outer door and an inner door). The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors," or can be referred to as "opening and closing members," "door members," or "door members" because they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G.

[1-1-3. Variable display section]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described below are driven and controlled to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed variably. When the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated (when the player performs a stop operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described below are driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed stationary.

In other words, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 constitutes a variable display section (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols in multiple rows, or multiple variable display sections (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols. The variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)" or a "variable display section (means)". The symbols can also be referred to as "pictures" or "designs", and since they are information that can be visually identified by the player, they can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense.

The main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas of each column (the symbols are displayed in a 3 row x 3 column format within the frame of the main display window 4). The main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as the "symbol display area" or "window section", etc.

In addition, a winning line is defined in the main display window 4. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stopping operation. In this sense, the winning line can also be called a "winning line" or a "determination line". The winning line is also configured as a line connecting any of the areas in each column. In other words, when the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, a maximum of 27 winning lines can be defined. However, in practice, one or more of these lines can be defined as winning lines, and the remaining lines can be defined as inactive lines that are not winning lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the middle area of reel 3R is called the "center line," the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the upper area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "top line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "bottom line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "cross-up line," the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "cross-down line," and so on. These are lines that connect the areas of each row in a straight line, so one or more of these lines are often defined as the active line. However, as mentioned above, so-called irregular lines that connect the areas of each row with broken lines can also be defined as the active line.

In order for the active lines to be activated, the player must bet the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start the game) before starting the game. The number of active lines that are activated may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the above-mentioned three lines, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line", are defined as active lines, in the former case, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are activated regardless of the number of bets, from 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" are activated, and if the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets), the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are activated.

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, and thus displays symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, but the symbol display format in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels can be one, two, or four or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column can be one, two, or four or more, to display symbols in a format different from the above format. In this case, the number of effective lines that can be defined can also be increased or decreased as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit displays the patterns by rotating each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub display device 220 described below, or it may be configured using other display devices (e.g., organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.). It may also be configured using other physical devices (e.g., belts, etc.). The arrangement and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main display unit directly related to the game, controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. In addition, a variable display unit may be provided as a sub-display unit related to the performance not directly related to the game, controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later. The sub-display unit may be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220. In other words, not only the main display unit but also the sub-display unit may be provided as a variable display unit that displays the symbols in response to the player's start operation (or the establishment of other start conditions) and stops the symbols in response to the player's stop operation (or the establishment of other stop conditions). In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether the variable display unit is directly related to the game or not, an identification display with characters such as "reel" or "main reel" may be attached near the main display unit, so that the variable display unit can be identified as the main display unit. Such identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a medal insertion slot 5 that accepts medals inserted into the slot machine 1 by a player from outside. The medal insertion slot 5 and a selector 31 described below have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b, and such an insertion operation can be rephrased as a betting operation, for example. Therefore, the medal insertion slot 5 can be said to be a betting operation detection unit (means) that can detect the betting operation of the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal insertion slot can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the medal insertion slot is not necessarily a required configuration.

In this embodiment, the use of medals as gaming media is described as an example of gaming value that is used in games or awarded according to game results, but the gaming value used in this manner is not limited to this. For example, coins, gaming balls, gaming point data or tokens, etc. can also be used. Furthermore, gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "game value", etc.

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. Note that the operation units shown below are merely examples, and the machine may be configured to include operation units different from these, and operation units that are not necessarily required may not be included.

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b that accept the player's betting operation to use the medals deposited (credited) therein. In addition, such betting operation is detected by the bet switch 6S described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's betting operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's betting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are provided, but it is also possible to provide only the MAX bet button 6a without providing the 1 bet button 6b. In addition, it is also possible to provide a separate 2 bet button for betting two medals.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the start lever 7 that accepts a start operation by the player to start a game. This start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection unit (means) that can detect the start operation by the player. Note that the start lever only needs to be capable of detecting the start operation by the player, and its shape, position, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R that are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and accept the player's stop operation to stop the respective reels. In addition, such a start operation is detected by a stop switch 8S described below. Therefore, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's stop operation. Note that the stop buttons only need to be capable of detecting the player's stop operation, and their shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a settlement button 9 that accepts a settlement operation (return operation) by the player to return (settle) credited medals. In addition, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S described below. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) that can detect the settlement operation of the player. Note that the settlement button only needs to be capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Performance buttons]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes buttons 10a and 10b for effecting a game that accepts the player's effect operation. Such effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the buttons for effecting a game. Therefore, the buttons 10a and 10b for effecting a game and the detection switch constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. The effect button only needs to be capable of detecting the effect operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is possible to configure the machine without providing either of these buttons, or to configure the machine with only one of these buttons. It is also possible to configure the machine with three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the performance buttons are to change the performance mode when a specific performance (for example, an operation-linked performance described below) is executed, and to perform selection and confirmation operations in a user menu described below. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system so that performance buttons are provided according to the purpose. For example, the performance buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the above-mentioned touch panel can be used for the latter purpose. For the latter purpose, it is also possible to configure the system so that a jog dial, cross key, or the like capable of receiving selection and confirmation operations is provided as a separate performance button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout outlet]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal payout outlet 11 that discharges medals that are paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. When a winning prize is won and medals are paid out, the medal payout outlet 11 awards the medals paid out from a hopper device 32 (described below) to the player, and can therefore be said to be part of a bonus awarding means that awards a bonus to the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine (described below), the medal payout outlet is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout opening 11. In other words, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) capable of storing the granted game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, this is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is equipped with a lower back panel 13, which is composed of a decorative panel on which model information is drawn, and a lower back lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the rear side. The lower back panel 13 is basically intended to clearly show the player what model the slot machine 1 is, but it can also be configured as one of the performance execution means capable of executing a performance, for example, by the lighting state of the lower back lamp, or by configuring the lower back panel 13 itself as an image display device, etc.

[1-1-9. Information display section]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information related to the game by its lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) that can display information related to the game.

The information display device 14 is configured to include, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an indication monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. The start lamp lights up to indicate that play can be started by operating the start lever 7. The replay lamp lights up to indicate that medals have been automatically inserted as a result of the replay operation. The bet number lamp lights up to indicate the number of medals bet. The credit lamp indicates the number of medals credited depending on how it lights up. The payout number lamp indicates the number of medals paid out (payout number) depending on the game result depending on how it lights up.

The instruction monitor is also configured to include a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (state display section). The notification lamp displays information on the stop operation by lighting in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information on the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, in an AT state). Note that the "manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified" refers to, for example, a manner in which the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order (which may be described as the "hit order" in this embodiment) "1st (performing the first stop operation on reel 3L)", the number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", and the number "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)". Note that the notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, information about the stop operation may be displayed using either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

In this way, in this embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to a player, not only the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later, but also the instruction monitor as the main-side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later, not only notifies the information on the stop operation, but also notifies the information on the main side notification means in a manner different from that of the sub-side notification means. In other words, the main side notification means only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means only needs to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main performance display unit 21 only needs to directly notify the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

In addition, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in the advantageous section, which will be described later. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, which will be described later, the section lamp lights up at any timing before play in the advantageous section starts, and when the advantageous section ends and transitions to a non-advantageous section, the lamp goes out at any timing before play in the non-advantageous section starts. Note that the timing of lighting the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a performance section (normal advantageous section) in a non-advantageous section or advantageous section to an increase section (AT state) in an advantageous section, which will be described later, for the first time, the lamp may light up at any timing before play in the increase section starts. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the section is in an advantageous section, regardless of whether it is a performance section or an increase section, or may indicate at least the period from the start of the first increase section to the end of the advantageous section, including this.

The limit lamp also indicates, depending on the lighting state, whether or not a limit process described below has been executed. For example, it lights up when a limit process is executed, informing the player that a favorable state (e.g., AT state) has been forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. For example, it flashes when the execution of the limit process is imminent, informing the player that there is a high possibility that the favorable state will be forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, other information regarding the limit process can also be appropriately provided by setting triggers for lighting, flashing, or turning off.

[1-1-10. Performance display section]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 that display effect images. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) capable of performing effect display. They are also configured as one of the effect execution means capable of performing effects from a visual perspective for the player.

The main display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through a display window UD1. The main display device 210 is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and a screen device C that makes an image appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B. In this embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful performance display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to perform a performance from a visual perspective for the player, and it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL, or a display device such as a 7-segment LED, or it can be configured as a variable display device such as a sub reel or a dot display device. In addition, from such a perspective, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be appropriately changed. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is a game that is primarily entertaining based on the results of the winning combination, for example, it can be configured not to have a main performance display unit 21 (the same goes for the sub performance display unit 22).

The sub-performance display unit 22 includes a sub-display unit 220. The sub-display unit 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display unit. The sub-display unit 220 can be configured as another image display unit or display unit, as with the main display unit 210, and can also be configured as a variable display unit or a dot display unit. From this perspective, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. The main performance display unit 21 is configured as a large screen, so it mainly displays performances closely related to the current game, such as push order notifications, winning notifications, or continuous performances, while the sub-performance display unit 22 is configured as a small screen, so it is possible to display the display contents separately according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying performances that are not so closely related to the current game, such as game history. In this embodiment, the main performance display unit 21 and the sub-performance display unit 22 are configured to have two performance display units, but it is possible to configure the system without providing either of them, or to configure the system to have only one of them. It is also possible to configure the system to have three or more performance display units.

[1-1-11. Lamp]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with one or more lamps (light-emitting means) that can perform effects by their light-emitting modes (including not only lighting, blinking, or extinguishing, but also the brightness and light-emitting color when configured as a full-color LED), such as the upper lamp 23 given as an example. Furthermore, such light-emitting means is configured as one of the effect execution means that can perform effects from a visual perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc., of the light-emitting means can be appropriately changed.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, and operation unit lamps provided within each operation unit. The latter include a function to inform the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, so when this function is exercised, the light emission pattern does not change depending on the performance content, but can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission pattern.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects, background music, and the like. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute a sound output means capable of performing effects by outputting sound. They are also configured as one of the performance execution means capable of performing performances from an auditory perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like of the speakers can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production devices]
In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, it is also possible to provide a performance device other than the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above. For example, it is also possible to provide a performance device such as a movable performance device such as a so-called role object, a vibration performance device that performs a performance by vibration, or an air performance device that performs a performance by injecting air, and perform a performance. In other words, as long as it is a performance device that can perform a performance that can appeal to any of the five senses of the player (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (allowing the player to recognize that a performance is being performed), any of them can be used. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" indicates that a performance may be performed using any one or more of the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above, unless otherwise specified.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. Selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a passageway through which medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 flow down, and is provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and determines whether the detected medals are appropriate medals. If the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are appropriate medals and the medals are in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to guide the medals to the hopper device 32 side described below. In this case, the bet number or credit number is incremented by 1. On the other hand, if the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are not appropriate medals and the medals are not in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to return the medals through the cancel chute and from the medal payout outlet 11. If an abnormality occurs in the detection of medals by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

In other words, the selector 31 constitutes a gaming medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted gaming medium. The selector 31 also constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether the inserted gaming medium is proper or not. The selector 31 also constitutes a sorting means that stores the inserted gaming medium internally if it is proper, and discharges it to the outside if it is not proper. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the selector 31 is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 has, for example, a bucket section that stores medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and guided by the selector 31, a disk section that is provided at the bottom of the bucket section and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section and guides them one by one to the discharge section, a discharge section that discharges the medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge section.

The bucket is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Any medals exceeding this number are guided through a guide passage provided on the top side to the auxiliary medal storage 33 (described below). If the medals stored in the bucket become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, the error state will be cleared if medals are refilled and a reset operation is performed.

The disk unit has multiple medal-shaped cutouts formed radially from the center, and the central shaft is rotated in response to a drive signal to guide medals that fit into the cutouts one by one to the discharge unit. The medals stored in the bucket unit are stirred up as the disk unit rotates. If an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is to be paid out, the disk section starts to rotate, and then the disk section stops rotating when the count sensor counts that one medal has been paid out. In this way, the correct number of medals is paid out.

In other words, the hopper device 32 constitutes a gaming media payout section (means) capable of paying out gaming media. Also, as described above, it can be said to be part of a bonus granting means for granting bonuses to players. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, which will be described later, it is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary Medal Storage]
The auxiliary medal storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The auxiliary medal storage 33 has, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S that is provided near the storage section and detects the amount of medals stored in the storage section.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is released if the medals stored in the storage section are reduced to at least below the certain number and a reset operation is performed.

In other words, the auxiliary medal storage 33 constitutes a surplus gaming media storage section (means) capable of storing surplus gaming media. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc., of the auxiliary medal storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, this is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage of 100V supplied from a power cable (not shown) into DC voltage power required by each part, as in the case of household electrical appliances, and supplies the converted power to each part. In other words, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 52 and reset switch 53 described below are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described below), but these switches can also be configured to be provided on the power supply device 34.

[1-2-5. Substrate]
The slot machine 1 includes the following boards as boards necessary for various controls. Note that the boards listed below are merely examples, and the slot machine 1 may include boards different from these boards, and may not include boards that are not essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the rear side of the reel unit RU inside the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is housed in a main control board case (not shown) made of resin that is transparent (or nearly transparent) so that its state can be visually confirmed. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

The specifications of the main control board 71 are subject to various constraints, and although it is basically configured with various electronic components DIP mounted, some or all of the various electronic components may be SMT mounted (surface mounted). In this case, test points may be provided to check operation using a tester or oscilloscope. Small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm square may be used for some or all of the various electronic components. The board surface of the main control board 71 may also be configured with multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is a performance control board that controls performances, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or can be configured as an opaque (or nearly opaque) case made of another material. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and various devices connected to the main relay board 73, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a board separate from the main control board 71 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to provide all the functions of the main relay board 73 to the main control board 71 and not provide the main relay board 73 unless there is a particular problem. From this viewpoint, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub-relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and is an intermediate control board for relaying between the sub-control board 72 and various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to configure the sub-relay board 74 without providing the sub-relay board 74, by giving all the functions of the sub-control board 72, unless there is a particular problem. From this viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External common terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is attached to a specific position (e.g., the back side of the lower space) in the cabinet G, and outputs signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the slot machine 1. The external signals 1 to 4 can be set to have appropriate output start and end conditions, making it possible to notify the outside of the transition of the internal state of the slot machine 1 (e.g., bonus state or AT state) according to the game characteristics. The external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display device or hall computer, so that these devices can recognize not only the medal insertion/payout status and error occurrence status in the slot machine 1, but also the transition status of such internal states.

(Test machine interface board)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the test machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the Pachislot machine 1 (note that these relay boards are not installed in the Pachislot machine 1 as a released product for sale, so the main control board 71 for sale does not have various electronic components required for connecting to the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine.). For example, test signals for controlling main operations related to the game (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and test signals related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 are output via the second interface board 302 for the test machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of the pachislot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74.

The main control board 71 is equipped with a main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls the game. The main control circuit 100 is composed of, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), etc. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for sending various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, etc. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by the execution of the control programs. The clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as necessary. In this way, all game actions are controlled.

The sub-control board 72 is equipped with a sub-control circuit 200 as a performance control unit that controls performance. The sub-control circuit 200 is configured to include, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, etc. In addition, a ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 201, various data tables, and various performance data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub-display device 220, lamp data related to the lamp/LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.). The sub-RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for registering the performance content and various performance data determined by the execution of the control program, and a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71. The random numbers for the effects may be generated and extracted within the sub-CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 32767, etc.), or may be generated and extracted by providing a random number circuit similar to the main control circuit 100. Also, instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, a sub-ROM may be included within the sub-control circuit 200, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub-ROM. Also, various performance data may be stored in the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and various data tables may be stored in the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200. Also, the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to include a microprocessor dedicated to images such as a GPU (e.g., also called a "VDP"), which may be used to generate (edit) images to be displayed on the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, the key switch 52 for setting, the reset switch 53, the role ratio monitor device 54, the external central terminal board 55, the hopper device 32, the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and the power supply device 34 are electrically connected to the main control board 71. The door opening/closing monitor switch 56, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, and the information display device 14 are also electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73. If the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

Note that the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, information display device 14, first test machine interface board 301, and second test machine interface board 302 have already been explained, so explanations will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear with a predetermined reduction ratio, and the driving of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R rotates each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at a certain angle. Therefore, the main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and manages the symbol positions of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the count results. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for such management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index.

The setting key switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the slot machine 1 (for example, six levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the slot machine 1 (setting check). Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage the player has in playing the game, and normally, the lower the setting value (for example, closer to setting 1), the lower the degree of advantage the player has, and the higher the setting value (for example, closer to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage the player has. The setting key switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator at the gaming facility inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and turned off when the switch is returned to the initial position from the counterclockwise position. When the power of the slot machine 1 is off, the settings can be changed by turning the setting key switch 52 on and then turning the power on, and the settings can be confirmed by turning the setting key switch 52 on while the power of the slot machine 1 is still on.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by the manager of the gaming establishment. The reset operation is an operation for releasing various error states. The reset switch 53 is also capable of detecting a setting value determination operation by the manager of the gaming establishment in a state where the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting value increases by one each time it is operated (when it reaches setting 6, it returns to setting 1). In this way, the setting value determination operation can be performed. The setting value determined in this way is confirmed when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. In other words, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting a setting value confirmation operation by the manager of the gaming establishment. In this way, when changing the setting, a setting change operation is required in which the setting key switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select a setting value, the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected setting value, and then the setting key switch 52 is turned off. This is one example of a setting change operation, and the setting can also be changed by other operations. In addition, when changing or checking settings, the current setting value may be displayed, for example, on the credit lamp or payout number lamp described above.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is, for example, composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game that is tallied and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information are used when the manager of the gaming facility checks whether the pachislot machine 1 has been tampered with. The role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. In addition, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or for switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this is operated, the above-mentioned various ratio information may be displayed. In addition, assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitor device 54. Also, immediately after power is turned on or after a predetermined time has elapsed since power is turned on (for example, about 10 seconds; a buffer time that takes into account the time required for the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to start up), in order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the role ratio monitor device 54 is functioning normally, it is desirable to configure it so that it lights up (or blinks) for a predetermined period of time with a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs are lit).

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the top two digits display the type of the ratio information, and the bottom two digits display a value (%) indicating the ratio information. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information, etc.

The specific section ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of plays in a play section (for example, AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified (or it may simply be the number of plays in an advantageous section) among the play sections of the target number of plays (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative", 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games", the same below). In addition, the continuous feature ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB) (including the operation of the first type special feature (RB) when the feature continuous operation device (BB) related to the first type special feature is in operation) among the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. The feature ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB), the second type special feature (CB), and the normal feature (SB) to the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. Here, the operation of the first type special feature (RB) includes the operation of the first type special feature (RB) when the feature continuous operation device (BB) related to the first type special feature is in operation, and the operation of the second type special feature (CB) includes the operation of the second type special feature (CB) when the feature continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special feature is in operation.

In addition, the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player was notified can be regarded as the operation of the role or the operation of the role continuous operation device, and can be the subject of aggregation and calculation in the respective ratio information. In other words, the role ratio monitor device 54 is sufficient as long as it appropriately displays the necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. In addition, for example, in the case of displaying continuous role ratio information in a model that does not have a first-class special role (RB), or in the case of displaying specific section ratio information in a model that does not have an advantageous section function (AT function), in a model in which the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information) does not exist, when the corresponding item is displayed, it is desirable to display a non-corresponding information identification display such as lighting two vertical bars in the center, for example, "- -", in the last two digits of the 7-segment LED that displays the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, so that the person checking can recognize at a glance that the corresponding information does not exist.

The door open/close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may be configured to be provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD, or on the cabinet G side. A similar door open/close monitoring switch may also be provided on the upper door mechanism UD. The door open/close monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state. When the door open/close monitoring switch 56 turns on, a door open error occurs. In this case, the error state is released when the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub-display device 220. In addition, the sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and a group of speakers such as speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, performance buttons, lamps/LEDs, and speakers have already been explained, so explanations will be omitted here.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is installed, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, in the same way as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56. It is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has the function of monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by making it possible for such monitoring to be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is also possible to store the opening/closing history of the lower door mechanism DD for a certain period of time. This opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the door being opened after the arcade manager has left outside of business hours, or if there is a history of the door being opened for a long period of time during business hours, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has occurred.

[3. Functional flow of the Pachislot machine]
Next, a functional flow of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a diagram for explaining a functional flow of the slot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (a bet operation is performed) and operates the start lever 7 (a start operation is performed), a single random number value (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. The internal winning combination determines in advance the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the pay line. The types of combinations of symbols include those related to "winning" that give the player benefits such as the payout of medals, the activation of replay, and the activation of bonuses, and those related to other so-called "losing" combinations. The combination related to the payout of medals is called a "minor combination", the combination related to the activation of replay is called a "replay combination", and the combination related to the activation of a bonus (bonus state) is called a "bonus combination". The combination that can be internally won (i.e., the combination of symbols that is permitted to be established) is sometimes simply called a "combination". The internal winning combination may also be referred to as a "winning combination," a "predetermined result," or a "derivation allowable condition," etc. The internal lottery means may also be referred to as a "combination determining means," a "winning combination determining means," a "predetermining means," or a "derivation allowable condition determining means," etc.

When the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), the reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (a stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (main CPU 101 which performs the reel stop control process described later) controls the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the order in which the stop buttons are pressed) when the stop buttons are pressed. Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one like the start lever 7, and may be any operation means as long as the player can perform the start operation. Also, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button-shaped one like the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and may be any operation means as long as the player can perform the stop operation.

In the pachislot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reel rotates within this specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces." In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that allows the display of a winning symbol combination has been determined, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels within a specified time of usually 190 msec (four symbols) so that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line as much as possible. The reel stop control means also uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed on the winning line. The symbol displayed when the reels stop spinning is sometimes referred to as the "stop display" or the "display result". The display of symbols when the reels stop spinning is sometimes referred to as the "derivation of the stop display" or the "derivation of the display result".

The reel stop control means may also be configured to perform automatic stop control to automatically stop each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reels started spinning, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. In this case, since the reels will stop without the player's stopping operation, it is desirable to stop the spinning of the reels so that no winning symbol combinations are displayed along the pay line, even if any internal winning combination has been determined.

When all the reels have stopped spinning in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 101, which performs the winning operation determination process described below) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line is a winning combination (or other predetermined combination). That is, it determines whether a winning combination (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved. Then, when the winning determination means determines that the displayed combination of symbols is a winning combination (or other predetermined combination) (that is, a winning combination (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved), a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player, or various controls are performed in response to this. In the pachislot machine 1, as an example, the above series of steps is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means may simply determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line corresponds to any of a plurality of combinations of symbols determined in advance, or may determine whether the combination corresponds to a combination of symbols related to an internal lottery role determined by the internal lottery means. In other words, in the former case, it may determine whether the combination of symbols related to a winning role is separate from the internal lottery role. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately controls the reels to stop, the prevention of erroneous winning can be sufficiently guaranteed, and the control burden related to erroneous winning detection can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, by making it possible to determine whether the combination of symbols related to a winning role is a combination of symbols that was permitted to win, if an erroneous winning occurs due to a reel malfunction, the erroneous winning can be detected, and security can be improved.

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, during the sequence of game operations described above, various effects are produced by using the display devices (e.g., the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220, etc.), the light output from various lamps (e.g., the upper lamp 23, etc.), the sound output from speakers (e.g., speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are effect execution means that execute the effects. Note that the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can be effect content determination means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for performance is sampled in addition to the random number value for the internal lottery. When the random number value for performance is sampled, the performance content determination means determines by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions) the performance to be executed this time from among multiple types of performance contents associated with the internal winning combination.

Next, when the presentation content is determined by the presentation content determination means, the presentation execution means executes the corresponding presentation in conjunction with each trigger, such as when the reels start to spin, when each reel stops spinning, and when it is determined whether or not a prize has been won. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing presentation content associated with an internal winning role, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning role (which can also be expressed as the combination of symbols to aim for or the order in which buttons should be pressed, etc.), thereby increasing the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of Pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to perform a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable and stationary manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp which symbols are located at which positions on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores data for identifying the types of symbols at each symbol position on at least each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As long as such a purpose is achieved, the data configuration can adopt various configurations, and in this embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described later is used as an example.

The symbol arrangement table specifies symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19") indicating the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Data for specifying the type of symbol (e.g., a symbol code) is also associated with each symbol position data. The symbol arrangement table also specifies that the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is "0". Note that the number of symbols in each row, the number of symbol types, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-2. Design Combinations]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the slot machine 1 can provide various benefits, move from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or move from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such combinations of symbols. For this reason, the main ROM 102 is provided with data for identifying such combinations of symbols. As long as such a purpose is achieved, the data configuration can adopt various configurations, and in this embodiment, as an example, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described later is used.

The symbol combination table specifies data (e.g., "display role" or "win activation flag") indicating the type of combination of multiple predefined symbols among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the winning line. The symbols that make up each symbol combination can be specified, for example, using the symbol code described above. Each symbol combination is also associated with data indicating the type of bonus (e.g., "payout, etc."). The symbol combination table basically has a data structure that corresponds to the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. The number of types of symbol combinations, or the content of the bonus, can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal lottery]
As described above, the Pachislot machine 1 is designed so that which combination of symbols is permitted to be displayed (predetermined) affects the game result. That is, the Pachislot machine 1 is capable of determining the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of benefit that can be awarded)) prior to (in advance of) the player's stop operation. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such an internal winning combination. For this reason, data for identifying such an internal winning combination is specified in the main ROM 102. Note that, as long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10) described later is used as an example.

The internal lottery table specifies data indicating the types of multiple predefined internal winning roles (for example, "No." or "winning number") and lottery values that determine each internal winning role in each game state. The lottery values may vary depending on the set value. Each internal winning role is also associated with a type of (corresponding) pattern combination that is permitted to be displayed. In addition, the pachislot machine 1 allows multiple pattern combinations to be associated with one internal winning role, and when such an internal winning role is determined, the pattern combination that is displayed is determined by the stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process of this embodiment described later (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (e.g., 0 to 65535) by a random number circuit is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value specified corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, a determination is made as to whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result has overflowed). Then, if the result of this determination exceeds 65535 for a given internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is made to win (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after this determination has been made for all internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination for this game will be a "lose". Note that this is merely one example of the internal lottery process, and various methods can be used for the lottery process as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random number value may be sequentially subtracted and updated by a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then the internal winning combination may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is below 0 (whether the lottery result has underflowed).

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the larger the lottery value specified for an internal winning role, the higher the probability of it being determined (winning probability). The winning probability of each internal winning role can be expressed as "lottery value specified for each winning number / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed such that the game result is affected by which combination of symbols is finally displayed by the player's stop operation among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning role. That is, the slot machine 1 is capable of performing control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of the combination of symbols finally displayed not only by the type of the determined internal winning role, but also by the timing of the player's stop operation and the order of pressing (also called "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning role according to the player's stop operation mode. For this reason, the main ROM 102 is provided with data for specifying such a mode of stop control. Note that, as long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, a stop table and a pull-in priority table (not shown) are used as an example.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbols (for example, the "number of sliding pieces") is specified for each symbol position data of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, suppose that a specified stop table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Next, suppose that a stop operation is performed on the reel 3L during rotation. At this time, suppose that the stop start position (the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". And suppose that the number of sliding pieces specified for the symbol position data "0" in the specified stop table is "4". Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at a symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") that has moved by four symbols (the planned stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table specifies data (the number of sliding pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that this data configuration is merely one example. Also, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally called "table control".

The attraction priority table specifies data (e.g., "attraction priority order") indicating which symbol combination is to be preferentially displayed (attracted) when there are multiple symbol combinations permitted to be displayed. For example, assume that a specified attraction priority order table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Here, the specified internal winning combination permits the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the specified attraction priority order table specifies attraction priorities such that symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over symbol combination A. Next, assume that a stop operation is performed on reel 3L while it is spinning. At this time, assume that the stop start position is "0".

Then, the main control circuit 100 searches for the presence of the symbols constituting the symbol combination A and the symbols constituting the symbol combination B for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position. If both symbols are not present, the position to stop is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, to stop at a closer position, to stop at a farther position, etc.). If only the symbols constituting the symbol combination A are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If only the symbols constituting the symbol combination B are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol constituting the symbol combination B, since the symbol combination B is displayed preferentially over the symbol combination A. Note that the pull-in priority order may be stored for all symbol positions during the rotation of the target reel according to the selected pull-in priority order table, or may be stored for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position when a stop operation is performed on the target reel. Also, such a data configuration is merely one example. In addition, using such a pull-in priority table to perform stop control is generally referred to as "control control."

In this embodiment, the stop control can be configured to be executed by performing only "table control" or by performing only "control control". Alternatively, the stop control can be configured to first tentatively determine the stopping position by performing "table control", then search for a more appropriate stopping position by performing "control control", and then change the stopping position depending on the search results.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the combination of symbols that will ultimately be displayed on the pay line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors:

The first element is the determined internal winning role (lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is a "miss," then none of the combinations of symbols related to any replay role, combinations of symbols related to minor roles, or combinations of symbols related to bonus roles will ultimately be displayed on the pay line. Note that a "miss" can be considered to be one of the internal winning roles, or it can be considered to be a lottery result in which no internal winning role has been determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbols (pressed position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to four symbols, so even if one of the internal winning roles is won as a result of the internal lottery process, if the symbols that make up a combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed are positioned on an active line (or on each active line if there are multiple), the combination of symbols may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is known as a "miss."

The third element is the player's push order (the order in which the player operates the stop button). For example, in this embodiment, an internal winning role associated with a combination of multiple symbols may be determined, and in this case, the combination of symbols that is ultimately displayed on the winning line may vary depending on the player's push order. Such an internal winning role is called a "push order role", and if it is a replay role, it may be called a "push order replay", and if it is a minor role, it may be called a "push order minor role".

[4-5. Game Status]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to provide a desired gaming experience, it is possible to provide various gaming states as a state in which the game is played. An example of the gaming state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a bonus role is won and a symbol combination related to the bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). It is also possible to configure the machine not to provide such a bonus state. It is also possible to configure the machine to provide multiple bonus states by providing multiple types of bonus roles. When a bonus role is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus role is carried over as an internal winning role over multiple games until the symbol combination related to the bonus role is displayed on an active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes called a "carry-over role". Also, such a carry-over state is sometimes called a "(bonus) flag interval" or "(bonus) internally in progress", etc.

The bonus state is a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery mode of the minor role (including the probability of winning and its contents, or the mode of stop control, etc.; the same applies below) compared to a state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state) (since it is also a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery mode of the replay role, the bonus state can also be considered as one mode of the RT state described below). Therefore, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state is a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is a less advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include a first type special role (RB), a role continuous operation device (BB) related to a first type special role, a second type special role (CB) (but not a carryover role), a role continuous operation device (MB) related to a second type special role, and a normal role (SB) (but not a carryover role). For example, the bonus states corresponding to each bonus role are configured as follows. The RB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined arbitrary number of winnings (e.g., the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined arbitrary number of games (e.g., the upper limit is 12 times) have been played. The BB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined arbitrary number of payouts (e.g., the upper limit is 285 coins) has been paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when more than a predetermined number of medals have been paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153 medals) or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played.

The condition for the bonus state to be activated is not limited to the display of a combination of symbols related to the bonus role on the pay line. For example, during the operation of the consecutive activation device (BB) related to the first type special role, the first type special role (RB) can be automatically activated when the consecutive activation device (BB) related to the first type special role starts to operate, when the game starts when the first type special role is not in operation, or when the operation of the first type special role ends. In other words, it is possible to control the RB to always be in operation during the operation of the BB without specifying the combination of symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB during the operation of the BB is sometimes called "JAC" and the like, and the specification in which the RB automatically operates during the operation of the BB is sometimes called "auto JAC". Also, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to control the RB to be in operation when the combination of symbols related to the specified RB is displayed on the pay line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the corresponding combination of symbols in this way is sometimes called "manual JAC". The same applies to the relationship between the special feature continuous operation device (MB) for the second type special feature and the second type special feature (CB). In other words, it is possible to control the CB to be in operation at all times while the MB is in operation without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, and it is also possible to control the CB to be in operation when the specified combination of symbols related to the CB is displayed on the winning line while the MB is in operation.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is established, it is possible to transition to the RT state (activate the RT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an RT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple RT states are provided. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay role can be changed with respect to a state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is more advantageous than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is less advantageous than the non-RT state. In addition, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to between the multiple RT states. In this case, an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively favorable to the player may be referred to as a "high RT state" or a "high probability re-play state", and an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively unfavorable to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state" or a "low probability re-play state".

The RT state can be transitioned, for example, when any of the following transition conditions are met. In addition, if multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to transitions between the multiple RT states.

(1) When RB, BB or MB is won. (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed. (3) When RB state, BB state or MB state ends. (4) When a specific combination of symbols is displayed when RB, BB or MB is not won (not carried over) and the player is not in RB state, BB state or MB state. (5) When a predetermined number of plays have been made after the transition condition of (3) or (4) is met. [4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the AT state (activate the AT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an AT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple AT states are provided. The AT state is a game state that is configured as a more advantageous state than a state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned push order role is won.

When multiple AT states are provided, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by making the play period for each AT state (including the ease of extension if the period can be extended (or "topped up"; the same applies below)), the type of role for which information on a stop operation is notified, or the occurrence probability of notification of information on a stop operation different from each other. In addition, the transition conditions and end conditions for the AT state can be set appropriately according to the gameplay (excluding end due to execution of the limit process described below). In addition, the AT state may be treated as if it were the bonus state described above, in which case it may be called a "pseudo bonus state", etc.

In addition, the play period of the AT state may be managed by the number of games (play count) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game count management), or may be managed by the number of sets with a predetermined number of games as one set (set count management). It may also be managed by the number of payouts or net increase (difference in number of coins) during the AT state (payout number management, difference in number of coins management). It may also be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals in the AT state (for example, push order navigation when a push order minor role is won) (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. The play period granted when transitioning to the AT state and the play period granted when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. In addition, when multiple AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to transition to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (activate the ART state). That is, since the ART state means an AT state that is performed in a high RT state, the ART state differs from the AT state in that at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and control is performed to transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided), but the basic control is the same as the AT state (if the transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided) is the result of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player being notified, it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). In addition, when the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, it may be a state that first transitions to the AT state and then transitions to the high RT state to transition to the ART state, or a state that transitions to the high RT state and the AT state simultaneously (or approximately simultaneously) to transition to the ART state.

[4-5-5. Other game states]
In addition, the pachislot machine 1 can also provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) described later is a state in which the player plays a game, and can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state as a pseudo bonus state, so these can be considered as game states. From a similar perspective, for example, a game state can be provided that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to a bonus state. For example, when a bonus role is won (carried over), a game state in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus role is more likely to be displayed by stop control and a game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus role is less likely to be displayed relatively than this can be provided so that the degree of advantage of the player can be changed. In addition, for example, it is possible to configure the game so that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied by providing a game state in which a bonus role is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus role is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win).

In addition, the following methods can be adopted as a method for varying the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether or not to extend the play period of the AT state while in the AT state; the same applies below). For example, a "special role" can be determined as an internal winning role. The number of medals awarded for the special role varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order of pressing the buttons, or a combination of these) (for example, 8 medals are paid out if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), and 1 medal or no medal is paid out if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect)).

If the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, then no decision is made as to whether or not to change the degree of advantage of transitioning to an AT state in the current game to a more favorable one (this may also include a decision as to whether or not to transition directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of the AT state; hereafter referred to as "advantage decision"). On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, then that advantage decision is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-mentioned specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, then that advantage decision is made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, then that advantage decision is not made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays using a specific game method, it is possible to configure the system so that, as a result of the game, an advantageous decision is made in the current game, or the advantageous decision is not made (the advantageous decision is restricted). Note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue into the next game and beyond, there is a risk that the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions only apply to the current game and not continue into the next game and beyond. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Playing area]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent excessive gambling, it is possible to provide various game zones as game states with concepts different from the above-mentioned game states. An example of such a game zone will be described below. The game zone is roughly divided into a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period during which it is not possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and has the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the requirements can be appropriately changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to inform the player of advantageous stopping operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.

(2) If the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, the non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state.

(3) When the limit process described below is executed in the favorable zone (i.e., when a predetermined value updated as play progresses during the favorable zone (e.g., the value of the favorable zone game count counter or favorable zone payout counter described below) becomes a specified value (e.g., 1500 games or 2400 coins)), a non-favorable zone is set as the initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referenced, and if the predetermined value becomes a specific updated value even before it becomes a specified value, the non-favorable zone may be set using that as a condition. Also, if a predetermined end condition is met during the favorable zone and the zone is determined to end (e.g., if a lottery for the end of the favorable zone is held and the lottery is won), the non-favorable zone may be set using that as a condition.

(4) In non-advantageous zones, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether to transition to an advantageous zone) can only be performed by referencing the determined internal winning role, and cannot be performed by referencing various parameters other than the internal winning role, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) or the number of games played in the non-advantageous zone (or the advantageous zone before the transition). Note that which internal winning role has been determined can be determined by referencing data that directly indicates the internal winning role, such as the winning number, or by referencing data that indirectly indicates the internal winning role, such as a sub-flag (where multiple roles are treated as one data item to be determined) generated or converted from the data on the internal winning role.

(5) A non-advantageous zone is basically in state 1, and multiple states cannot be set within a non-advantageous zone. For example, it is not possible to set different states, such as a non-advantageous zone after the end of an advantageous zone being non-advantageous zone A, and a non-advantageous zone after a setting change being non-advantageous zone B.

(Advantageous area)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period during which the player can be notified of advantageous stop operation modes, and has the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the requirements can be appropriately changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stopping operation modes (e.g., push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.

(2) If the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, it will not be possible to set the advantageous zone as the initial state.

(3) If the limit processing described below is executed in a favorable zone, the favorable zone must be terminated.

(4) In the advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether or not to shift the game state (mode) during the advantageous zone, or whether or not to extend a specific game state (mode)) can be performed not only by referring to the determined internal winning role, but also by referring to various parameters other than the internal winning role, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games played during the advantageous zone. Other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, bonus information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, the timing of the stop operation of any of the reels, or the push order.

(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous zone. For example, states such as a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that is likely to transition to an AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase is positive when a stop operation is performed in response to a notification can be set. In addition, states such as a CZ premonition state that is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the CZ state in response to a decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state and in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to the CZ state may be performed, or an AT premonition state that is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state in response to a decision to transition to the AT state in the normal state or CZ state and in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to the AT state may be performed, can also be set according to gameplay.

(6) The fact that the vehicle is in a favorable zone can be notified by lighting up the zone lamp (status display unit), which can notify whether the vehicle is in a non-favorable zone or a favorable zone (if the zone lamp is off, it can notify that the vehicle is in a non-favorable zone). As described above, the timing at which the zone lamp starts to light can be set to any timing. Basically, the lamp may start to light up when the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone and continue to light up until the vehicle moves to a non-favorable zone, or the lamp may not start to light up if the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (the favorable zone has started) and the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in a normal state, but may start to light up when the vehicle first enters an AT state. If the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in an AT state, the lamp may start to light up from that point on.

[4-7. Limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the advantageous zone from continuing too long and becoming excessively gambling-oriented, it is possible to set an upper limit (restriction) on the period during which the advantageous zone continues. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter." In this embodiment, the end of the advantageous zone by such a limiter is described as the execution of a limit process or the activation of a limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of games (number of plays) in the advantageous zone reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous zone game number counter described later starts counting when the advantageous zone starts, and increments the count by one each time one play is played. Then, based on the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended (for example, even if the play period of the AT state remains) and a transition is made to a non-advantageous zone. Note that the number of games that activates the game number limiter can be set to any number of games as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "1500". In addition, when the requirements of such a game number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of games in the advantageous zone.

(Payout limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone reaches "2400". For example, the favorable zone payout number counter described later starts counting when the favorable zone starts, and adds the corresponding number of medals each time a medal is paid out (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). Then, based on the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaching a specified value (e.g., "2400" or more), the favorable zone is forcibly ended (e.g., even if the game period in the AT state remains), and the zone is shifted to a non-favorable zone. Note that the payout number at which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any payout number as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "2400". In addition, when the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone.

Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may be configured to count the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous zone as the lowest point (starting point) (i.e., the count is subtracted if there is no payout). In other words, the payout number limiter may be configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when a maximum of "2400" medals have been paid out since the medals increase during the advantageous zone (for example, when the AT state begins). Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may simply count the actual payout number (i.e., the number of medals paid out without subtracting the number of bets from the number of medals), rather than the net increase mentioned above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute the limit processing of the advantageous zone using only the game count limiter, may execute the limit processing of the advantageous zone using only the payout number limiter, or may execute the limit processing of the advantageous zone using both the game count limiter and the payout number limiter. Note that when both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous zone when the activation condition of either one of the limiters is satisfied after the advantageous zone has started.

The types of limiters are not limited to the game number limiter and payout number limiter described above. For example, a navigation count limiter may be provided that executes limit processing when the number of times push order minor roles are navigated during the AT state (i.e., the number of times information on stop operations advantageous to the player is notified for roles related to the payout of medals) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., "400" times). In other words, as long as gambling can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute limit processing using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External Signals]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to be capable of outputting a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display device can also perform the bonus state performance linked thereto. Also, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, turned off based on the end of the BB state, turned on based on the start of the MB state, and turned off based on the end of the MB state, the external data display device can not only perform the above-mentioned bonus state performance, but also count the number of bonuses by type.

Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when an AT state is started, and turned off when the AT state is ended, then an AT state performance linked to this can be performed on the external data display.Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, and external signal 2 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, then not only can the external data display perform the above-mentioned AT state performance, but the number of ATs can be counted by type.

For example, if the AT state is configured as an AT state managed by the number of sets, and external signal 1 is turned on when the first set of the AT state starts, and external signal 2 is turned on each time the second set and subsequent sets start, the number of first hits in the AT state and the number of times the AT state is extended can be counted on the external data display. The timing for turning on and off each external signal can be set as appropriate. In other words, as long as the situation is properly recognized by the external data display or hall computer, the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state until it turns off again, such as a predetermined time, during one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. Commands]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed to be capable of transmitting multiple types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that the slot machine 1 does not allow the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to communicate with each other, and is required to communicate only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to transmit information (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200 at appropriate times to notify the sub-control circuit 200 of changes in the state of the slot machine 1. An example of such a command will be described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify the setting values, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of bets, etc. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command includes parameters that specify the internal winning role, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command includes parameters that specify the contents of the lock effect, etc. Also, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command includes parameters that specify that the rotation of the reels has started, etc.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is sent. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters that specify the reel to be stopped and the position where the reel is stopped. Also, for example, when all reels are stopped and the displayed role (winning activation flag) is confirmed, a winning activation command is sent. The winning activation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of displayed role and the content of the bonus to be granted. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is started, a favorable zone start command is sent. The favorable zone start command is configured to include parameters that specify the start of the favorable zone and the mode (game state), etc. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is ended, a favorable zone end command is sent. The favorable zone end command is configured to include parameters that specify the end of the favorable zone and the cause of the end. Also, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is sent. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns, etc. Note that these are merely examples, and commands other than these can be sent as necessary, and unnecessary commands among these can be not sent.

[4-10. Direction]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to increase the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to provide the intended gameplay, it is possible to execute various effects using various effect devices. An example of such an effect will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 (main side) can control the following effects, for example. As described above, the slot machine 1 can notify the user of information on the stop operation by the instruction monitor, and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect may be performed in which the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time (the game operation of the player is disabled for a predetermined period of time). Such an effect is called a "lock effect (or simply "lock")" or a "freeze effect (or simply "freeze")". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a lock effect is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of lock effects are performed.

The gaming operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, if a start operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after all stop operations have been performed. For example, if a stop operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after a start operation has been performed. If multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the game progress is stopped (the period during which the player's gaming operation is invalidated) and the type of gaming operation to be invalidated may be set for each lock effect.

(Reel production)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be performed by the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (including not only the variable display mode but also a combination with the stopped display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such effects are called "reel effects" as well as "symbol effects", etc. Note that it is possible to configure the machine so that such reel effects are not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, when it is said that "a lock effect is performed (executed)", this also includes both cases where a reel effect is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In short, the reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's input during a period in which the player's input is disabled. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern that performs such an output operation without considering the rotation speed or the maximum number of sliding pieces. Furthermore, by setting multiple operation patterns, multiple types of reel effects can be provided. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects with multiple types of lock effects, an even wider variety of output patterns can be set. Note that only one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effects.

(Pseudo-game)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a pseudo game can be performed during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such an effect is called a "pseudo game." It is possible to configure the machine so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, when "a lock effect is performed (executed)," it also includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In short, pseudo-games accept the player's game operations in a pseudo manner during a period in which the player's game operations are invalid, and perform effects by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In other words, the above-mentioned reel effects are further performed by intervening the player's game operations. Note that, for example, the MAX BET button 6a, 1 BET button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and settlement button 9, etc. are basically provided for the purpose of game operations, and therefore it is not desirable to use them for any other purpose. However, pseudo-games allow these operations to be accepted, on the premise that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistaking that they are playing an actual game.

Here, we will explain the flow of the pseudo game with an example. For example, the pseudo game is carried out as follows.

(1) The player's actual start operation (when the execution conditions are met, the pseudo game begins)
(2) Each reel rotates in a simulated manner (during simulated play)
(3) Accepts a pseudo-stop operation, which temporarily stops each reel (during pseudo play)
(4) After a random delay process, the reels actually start spinning (the simulated game ends and the actual game begins).
In addition, the random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel before starting rotation (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period"), which may occur when, for example, specific symbols are displayed in a line in the above-mentioned (3) situation, and the reels start normal rotation in the above-mentioned (4) situation, making it easier for the player to use the specific symbols as a marker to perform a stopping operation (which may assist in the so-called "eye-pushing"). In addition, when the reels are temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned (3) and (4) situations, it is desirable to ensure that the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always less than a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) so that the reels are alternately changed between forward and reverse directions, so that they are not mistaken for being completely stopped.

One of the above-mentioned measures, for example, is to slightly vibrate (swing) each reel up and down when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situation (3) (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all reels are temporarily stopped) until the random delay process is started in the above-mentioned situation (4). Note that, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging may not be performed when the first reel is temporarily stopped and when the second reel is temporarily stopped.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo game lamp is provided to notify the player that a pseudo game is being played, and the pseudo game lamp is turned on from when the pseudo game starts in the above-mentioned (1) situation until the random delay process starts in the above-mentioned (4) situation. The pseudo game lamp is preferably installed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operation and in a position that is visible during the game. The pseudo game lamp is preferably an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and the entire display unit of the pseudo game lamp is preferably covered with a monochromatic border. The pseudo game lamp is preferably such that the display range, including the explanatory portion of the pseudo game lamp, has a certain surface area (for example, one side is more than 10 mm and the surface area is more than 642 square mm, etc.). In addition, it is preferable that the description of the pseudo game lamp is written so that it can be recognized that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp to notify that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREE PLAY", "pseudo game performance in progress", or "automatic reel performance in progress"), and it is preferable that such description occupies at least 1/3 of the surface area. Note that the pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game display to inform the player that a pseudo-game is being played may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) from the start of the pseudo-game in the above-mentioned (1) situation until the start of the random delay process in the above-mentioned (4) situation. The pseudo-game display is preferably displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operation and at a position that is visible during the game (in this embodiment, since both the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are above the operation unit, either one may be used). In addition, it is preferable that the display range of the pseudo-game display, including its explanatory portion, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm when the display screen is less than 7 inches, and the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen when the display screen is 7 inches or more). Additionally, it is desirable for the explanatory portion of the pseudo-play display to be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo-play display is intended to inform the player that a pseudo-play is in progress (for example, "FREE PLAY," "pseudo-play performance in progress," or "automatic reel performance in progress"), and it is desirable for the explanatory portion to be large enough for the player to read without being obscured or otherwise hidden.

Also, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the above-mentioned situation (1) to the start of the random delay processing in the above-mentioned situation (4)), it is desirable to configure so that information on the stop operation is not notified on the instruction monitor (if it is necessary to display information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from misunderstanding that an actual game is being played during the pseudo game. Note that, if any of the above measures are taken, during the pseudo game, information on the stop operation may be notified on the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220). Similarly, during the pseudo game, the sub-side presentation device may perform a presentation according to the game result of the pseudo game (linked to the pseudo game operation).

In addition, in an actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output through the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during a pseudo game, a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is not output. Therefore, during a pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be output to enable the test machine to recognize that a pseudo game is being played. In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 may output a signal for controlling the pseudo game progress to the main control board 71 so that the pseudo game progresses on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine is provided with such a pseudo game progress function, a switch capable of switching the function on and off may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to check the content of the simulated game during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the slot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side) can control the following effects, for example. As described above, the slot machine 1 can notify the player of information on the stop operation by the main display device 210, etc., and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a performance that is completed in the current game (i.e., ends in one game) can be performed. This type of performance is called a "normal performance" or a "single-shot performance". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a normal performance is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of normal performances can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a performance that continues over a number of games (i.e., continues for a number of games) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "continuous performance" or a "continuous performance". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a continuous performance is not performed, or to configure the machine so that a number of types of continuous performance can be performed.

(Operation-linked effects)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is established, an effect can be performed in which the effect content can be changed according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect" or a "button effect" or the like. Note that it is possible to configure the device so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or to configure the device so that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. In addition, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect, or as a continuous effect. In addition, the effect operation can include not only an operation on the effect button group, but also various game operations.

The various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, they can be used to suggest or notify the set value, internal lottery role, game status, game section, bonus content, and the period until the bonus is granted. They can also be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage of these. These uses are merely examples.

(Other performances)
In the pachislot machine 1, it is also possible to perform effects other than the various effects described above. For example, various notifications (e.g., addiction prevention notification, loss prevention notification, error state notification, demo state notification, etc.) to players or gaming establishments that are used for purposes other than those described above are also included in the effects in a broad sense. The addiction prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued when the advantageous zone ends. The loss prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued when the advantageous zone ends or when a settlement operation is performed. The error state notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued from the time an error occurs until it is resolved. The demo state notification can be, for example, a notification that the machine is vacant when a period of no play reaches a predetermined period or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, referring to Figures 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications related to the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine". Note that, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to the other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and, further, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as the other gaming machines in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to the first gaming machine described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be the invention according to this embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the "center line" mentioned above. In addition, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as gaming states. In addition, the non-bonus state includes a 2BB flag interval in which "F_2BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in a two-coin bet state; hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") is carried over, a 3BB flag interval in which "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in a three-coin bet state; hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over, and a non-flag interval in which no bonus role has been won (not carried over). In addition, the bonus state includes a 2BB state to which a transition occurs in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state to which a transition occurs in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB.

The first gaming machine allows players to play with two medals bet (two-bet state) and three medals bet (three-bet state). Note that "betting" includes the player inserting two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 5 for play, the player operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet two or three medals from credits, and the player automatically betting two or three medals when a replay role is won.

[5-1. Gaming Characteristics of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 5 to 8. Note that Figure 5 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in the first gaming machine, Figure 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine, and Figures 7 and 8 are diagrams showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the states in which the player plays are broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones, and the advantageous zones are further divided into presentation zones (advantageous zones, normal play) and increase zones (advantageous zones, pseudo bonus). The non-advantageous zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. The presentation zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player, similar to the non-advantageous zones, but differ from the non-advantageous zones in that mode transitions are performed, as described below.

In other words, the non-advantageous zone is the control state in the initial state that is controlled when play in the advantageous zone ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the machine is shipped from the factory, etc., and the performance zone is the control state in the normal state in which the player plays normally, making it possible to vary the expectation of a transition to an increased zone (award) by mode transitions, etc.

On the other hand, the increase section is a game state (AT state) in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is an advantageous game state for the player. In other words, the increase section is a control state that is an advantageous state in which the player can increase the number of medals. Note that both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by transitioning between these sections, a series of advantageous sections are formed.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous zone, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described later). The sub-flag is information for grouping internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are lottery-eligible roles and their winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries related to playability by the main control circuit 100 (various processes related to the advantageous zone) and assigning the same information to the group, making it possible to identify the group. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning role, making it possible to compress the amount of data and avoid straining the capacity of the main ROM 102. In the non-advantageous zone, a lottery is held using this non-advantageous zone sub-flag.

The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Rip Bell" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to "33"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Determined Cherry" (No. "6") and "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "middle cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_middle Cherry" (No. "7"). Note that the non-advantageous zone can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined, just like the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the correspondence between these is not limited to the above.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described below). Furthermore, in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed. In the advantageous zone, a lottery is held using these sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone.

The sub-flag "Bell" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "Weak Cherry" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "Watermelon" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "Definite Role" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Definite Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). When the advantageous zone is won, the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 1" when entering the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Right Up Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Right Up Rip"). The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 2" when entering the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Parallel Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Parallel Rip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as described below, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), a "Right-Rising Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 3BB flags, and a "Parallel Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 2BB flags and non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Tsu Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 3BB flags, and "Tsu Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 2BB flags and non-flags. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone differs in this way, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below (for example, the pseudo bonus transition lottery using the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) and the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f)) is changed.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is used as an example of a role in which the sub-flag changes when the player enters a favorable zone depending on whether the player is between 3BB flags or 2BB flags, but the manner in which the sub-flag changes when the player enters a favorable zone is not limited to this. For example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different between the 3BB flag and the 2BB flag. Therefore, when such a role is won, the number of medals paid out may not change (or may change), but the combination of the displayed symbols may be different, and a different sub-flag may be determined when the player enters a favorable zone. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be changed depending on the difference in the sub-flag when the player enters a favorable zone.

Also, for example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag interval (non-flag interval) it is, if the pressing position (stop operation timing) is appropriate, the "watermelon" symbol combination is displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a miss occurs and the "watermelon spill" symbol combination is displayed. Therefore, when such a role is won, different sub-flags for winning the advantageous zone may be determined depending on whether a win is achieved without a miss or whether a miss occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be changed depending on whether the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is different.

Also, for example, when the internal winning role is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), if the stopping operation is performed in a specific manner (this specific manner may be, for example, a manner in which the stopping operation is performed in a predefined hitting order (correct pressing order), a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stopping operation) is appropriate, or a manner in which a combination of these is performed) between the 3BB flags, a combination of symbols of "parallel replay" is displayed, and if the stopping operation is not performed in the specific manner, a combination of symbols of "right-up replay" is displayed, and different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone may be determined based on this. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on the different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone.

In other words, the first gaming machine allows the final stop display mode for a specific combination to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, and allows different secondary information to be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby applying all the modes that allow the degree of advantage to be changed.

Returning to the description of the playability of the first gaming machine, in the non-advantageous zone, a lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is held for each game. Specifically, the advantageous zone transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(b) is referenced, an internal winning combination is determined, and at a predetermined timing during the game after the non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination, the transition mode, etc. is determined according to the non-advantageous zone sub-flag. Note that, when making this determination, there are cases where only the type of mode when transitioning to the advantageous zone is determined (in FIG. 5, "Advantageous Zone Start"), and cases where not only the type of mode but also a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined (in FIG. 5, "Advantageous Zone Start + Pseudo Bonus Start"). However, it is also possible to configure the specification so that a transition to a pseudo bonus is not determined in the non-advantageous zone.

Now, referring to FIG. 6, the various modes in the first gaming machine will be described. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may also be referred to as the game state or control state) for varying the expectation of a transition (award) to an increase zone (pseudo bonus) in the presentation zone (normal play), and in the presentation zone (normal play), it is according to this mode that a decision is made as to whether or not a pseudo bonus transition will occur, whether an advantageous zone will be maintained, or whether the advantageous zone will end and a transition will be made to a non-advantageous zone.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode in which a player is likely to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone (performance zone), and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). Although not shown in the figure, in the start mode, the ceiling game number is set to "965 games." The ceiling game number is used to forcibly transition to a pseudo bonus when a certain period of time has elapsed without transitioning to a pseudo bonus. Therefore, the smaller the ceiling game number, the more advantageous it is for the player, and the higher the ceiling game number, the more disadvantageous it is for the player.

The normal A mode is the mode in which players are most likely to stay when playing, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, so the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7 (c) described below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8 (f) described below). In the normal A mode, the ceiling game number is set to "965 games". In addition, in FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after pseudo bonus" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the game transitions to the end A mode or end B mode described below, and 32 games are played in that mode without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and after transitioning to a non-advantageous zone once, if the normal A mode is selected when transitioning from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, the apparent ceiling game number is "965 games" + the play period "32 games" in the end A mode or end B mode + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, so this is expressed. The same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normal B mode is a mode in which players tend to stay relatively easily while playing, and although it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In the Heaven Preparation Mode, the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) below), but the ceiling number of games is set at 466 games, and if a transition is made to a pseudo bonus, it is guaranteed that the mode will transition to Heaven Mode after the end of the pseudo bonus (see Figure 8 (f) below), making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense.

In Chance mode, the expectation of moving to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "222 games," so in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of moving to Heaven mode is not high (see Figure 8 (f) below).

End A mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to remain if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, and the expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is the lowest (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expected probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In End A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and a transition occurs to a non-favorable zone.

End B mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to stay if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, but it is more favorable than end A mode, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In end B mode, like end A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone. End A mode and end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end modes".

The guaranteed mode is the mode in which you stay when Heaven C mode ends, and since the expectation of moving to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of moving to Heaven mode is not high (see FIG. 8(f) below). In other words, in order to prevent a drop in interest when Heaven C mode ends, the guaranteed mode is positioned as one that aims to maintain (guarantee) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time.

Heaven A mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to be consecutive (if the AT state is continued by a decision to extend (add) during the AT state, this may also include the extension (addition) of the AT state; the same applies below), and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) described below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a moderate level, making it a relatively advantageous mode. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, it is possible to set a difference in the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the lottery value can be set so that the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%, or the lottery value can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to Heaven B mode and Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is also possible to set different ceiling mode loop rates.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to appear consecutively, the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to appear consecutively, the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is a more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode and Heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, Heaven B mode, and Heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode".

Note that the above modes are merely examples, and the mode configuration is not limited to these. Modes other than the above modes can be set, and some of the above modes can be chosen not to be set.

Up to this point, the non-advantageous zone has been described as being in a state where the degree of advantage is relatively low compared to the advantageous zone, but the relationship between the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone is not limited to this. For example, the non-advantageous zone may have a higher transition rate to the increasing zone than the advantageous zone when at least one mode is set, or the average number of games required to transition to the increasing zone may be shorter, or the non-advantageous zone may be the zone that is most likely to become the increasing zone. By doing so, an incentive to play is created even in a state where it is confirmed that the zone is a non-advantageous zone after a setting change, etc., so that it is a motivation to start playing even from the time the store opens. Even if the zone lamp stops lighting when 32 games have passed after the pseudo bonus ends, it is not confirmed that the zone is in the most disadvantageous state, so that it is a motivation to continue playing even in such a case. Up to this point, the performance zone has been described as a game state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, but if it is in a state that is disadvantageous compared to the increasing zone (for example, by lowering the frequency of notification or changing the role that is the subject of notification), it can also be a game state in which information on a stop operation is notified.

Returning to the description of the playability of the first gaming machine, in the performance section (normal play), first, for each play, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed by referring to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) is referred to, an internal winning role is determined, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the internal winning role, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In FIG. 7(c), "non-winning" means that there is no transition to a pseudo bonus, "winning (current play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the current play, and "winning (next play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the next play.

In the first gaming machine, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, game operations (stop operations) are invalidated for a certain period of time at the start of the current game, and if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, at the start of the next game. During this invalid period, a reel effect in which "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 (a "red 7s aligned" effect) is performed, and then a pseudo bonus is started. In a game in which a "red 7s aligned" effect is performed, if it is necessary to notify information about the stop operation, the information about the stop operation is notified at least when the invalid period ends and game operations (stop operations) become valid (it may be before that, but not before the timing when the random delay process described above is started).

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) in the performance section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn. Note that this transition mode may be a mode including the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), mode transition lottery (when winning), and mode transition lottery (when reaching the ceiling) described below are not held.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play), then for each play (more specifically, in a play in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is drawn), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a win occurs) is held by referring to the sub-flag when entering the favorable zone. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) is referenced to determine the winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during the play (before the start of the next play) after the sub-flag when entering the favorable zone is determined according to the winning combination, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag when entering the favorable zone.

In the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), the probability of deciding to transition to a pseudo bonus is higher when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsū Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsū Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined to transition to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent the decision to transition to a pseudo bonus.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) in the performance section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. Note that this transition mode may be a mode including the mode during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held, the mode transition lottery (when ceiling) described below is not held.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f), the probability of deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher when "Tsū-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsū-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsū-Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsū-Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsū-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the player will be transitioned to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, but when "Tsū-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent the player from deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play), the ceiling game number is updated (this can be by addition or subtraction), and if the ceiling game number reaches the ceiling game number associated with the current mode (or determined in advance when transitioning to a favorable section, etc.), a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined. In this case, it is possible to always determine a "winning lottery (current play)," or it is also possible to always determine a "winning lottery (next play)." It is also possible to have either of these be determined by lottery.

When the ceiling number of games is reached during the presentation section (normal play) and it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referenced, and the mode to transition to is determined according to the current mode. This mode to transition to may be a mode including the mode during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

The processing related to the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) and the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing is the same, so they can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.The processing related to the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) and the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing is the same, so they can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.

Also, if "Winning lottery (played this time)" is not set as a type of pseudo bonus winning lottery, then at the time the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is determined, the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone has already been determined, and the ceiling game number can also be updated, so the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), and the pseudo bonus transition processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed together in a single process. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (when winning), the mode transition lottery (when winning), and the mode transition lottery (when the ceiling is reached) can also be performed together in a single process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine, as described above, when a decision is made to transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play) and the pseudo bonus starts ("pseudo bonus start" in FIG. 5), the game transitions to the increase section (pseudo bonus). Also, as described above, when the presentation section (normal play) is controlled to end A mode or end B mode and 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo bonus ("end of favorable section (via ends A and B)" in FIG. 5), the game transitions to a non-favorable section. Also, when the conditions for the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described below are met, the favorable section is forcibly ended ("end of favorable section (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, the game transitions to a non-favorable section.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is held when the pseudo bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e) is referenced, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the ceiling number of games after the pseudo bonus ends depending on the current mode. In FIG. 8(e), "non-winning" means that the ceiling number of games will not be shortened, and "winning (updated ceiling number of games = 0)" means that the ceiling number of games set will be set to "0" (shortened) after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. The ceiling shortening lottery can be held not only when the pseudo bonus starts, but also every time the pseudo bonus is played.

If the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will not be shortened, and if the player does not have a 1G consecutive stock (described below) when the pseudo bonus ends, the ceiling game number will be set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous zone ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so the ceiling game number is not set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus ends (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus end"), and the performance zone (normal play) begins. On the other hand, if the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will be shortened, the ceiling game number will be set to "0 games" when the pseudo bonus ends. This means that the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, the pseudo bonus will start when the ceiling game number is reached, so the mode transition lottery (at ceiling) described above will be performed.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn is determined to be "guaranteed role" or "medium chain"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn. Note that the transition mode may also be determined when a sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn other than the above. In this case, in principle, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the transition mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the mode to transition to is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won. In this case, as with the above, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the mode to transition to, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive draw is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive draw table shown in FIG. 7(d) is referenced, and whether or not a 1G consecutive draw will occur is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn or the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. In FIG. 7(d), "non-win" means that a 1G consecutive draw will not occur, and "win (1G consecutive + 1)" means that one right to generate a 1G consecutive draw (1G consecutive stock) is granted (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that multiple 1G consecutive stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (accumulated) by the 1G consecutive stock counter. Therefore, multiple 1G consecutive stocks may be granted during one pseudo bonus. The 1G consecutive draw table can also be configured so that multiple 1G consecutive stocks can be granted in one 1G consecutive draw.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or more (i.e., if you have 1G consecutive stock), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus starts according to the right of 1G consecutive stock, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not held. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more (i.e., if you do not have 1G consecutive stock), and if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus ends (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus end"), and the game moves to the presentation period (normal game).

In addition, if a player wins the ceiling shortening lottery and also has 1G consecutive stocks, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks, or the 1G consecutive stocks may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening. In the latter case, information that allows the existence of a ceiling shortening to be carried over may be stored separately.

In the first gaming machine, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo bonus) is given as an example in which it continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 coins can be obtained, but the configuration of the pseudo bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo bonus may be configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)" and a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)" that continues for "22 games" and allows a maximum of 110 coins to be obtained may be installed. In this case, when it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus (to grant the right) in the pseudo bonus transition lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G consecutive lottery, the type (e.g., whether to select "pseudo BB" or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (e.g., 50% each). In addition, the "pseudo RB" may have a different value from the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, a lower value than the "pseudo BB"). For example, the number of continuing games may be the same as the "pseudo BB", but the maximum number of coins that can be won may be different by lowering the Bernavi rate (probability of announcing information on a stop operation). When the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect may be performed in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in line in the main display window 4, or a reel effect may be displayed in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuing games (play period) can be changed.

In addition, if the conditions for executing the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described below are met during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous zone due to limit processing" in FIG. 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous zone.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is based on the premise that the game is basically played with three coins bet. Therefore, when playing with two coins bet, for example, various lotteries using (a)-(d) in FIG. 7 and (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 are not conducted, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. In addition, when playing with two coins bet during a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is not an increase period because the machine is configured so that medals do not increase when two coins are bet. In other words, the first gaming machine is basically configured so that the player is at a disadvantage when playing with two coins bet.

Here, when playing in the two-coin bet state, no lottery (for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) or processing (for example, updating of the ceiling number of games, etc.) is performed for the advantageous zone (AT), but it is desirable to update the advantageous zone game number counter for the game number limiter described above and the advantageous zone payout number counter for the payout number limiter described above. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone and the upper limit of the number of coins won. If these counters were not updated in the two-coin bet state, there may be cases where the upper limit of the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone or the number of coins won set by the intervention of play in the two-coin bet state, and as a result, gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. Therefore, it is desirable to configure the limiter counter so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of coins bet.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically premised on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in a bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. are not conducted, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. In addition, when the bonus state is entered during a pseudo bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-bonus state with 3 medals bet), so the pseudo bonus may not be an increase period. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that playing in a bonus state may put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, the first gaming machine is configured to recommend playing in the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags may be described as the "recommended gaming state", and other states may be described as the "non-recommended gaming state"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus role that can only be won in the 2-coin bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between 2BB flags only wins in the 2-coin bet state, and does not win in the 3-coin bet state. Also, 3BB is a bonus role that can only be won in the 3-coin bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between 3BB flags only wins in the 3-coin bet state, and does not win in the 2-coin bet state. Also, 3BB does not win between 2BB flags, and 2BB does not win between 3BB flags.

The first gaming machine uses these configurations to, for example, win 2BB in a 2-coin bet state in a non-flag space (without winning 2BB), resulting in a 2BB flag space, and then play in a 3-coin bet state, making it possible to play in the recommended game state described above without worrying about winning a bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, a ceiling shortening lottery is held during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e), when the current mode is either the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, or the heaven C mode, there is a probability of 1/8 (32/256) of winning the ceiling shortening lottery, whereas in other modes, there is no winning the ceiling shortening lottery. In other words, in a mode where the ceiling game count is "32 games," the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games," and in a mode where the ceiling game count is greater than that, the ceiling game count is never shortened.

Even in the case of a mode in which the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," it may be determined that the ceiling number of games will be shortened with a lower probability (e.g., 1/64) than in the case of a mode in which the ceiling number of games is "32 games."

Furthermore, the manner in which the ceiling number of games is shortened is not limited to the above. For example, the same effect can be achieved by shortening "32 games" to a fewer number of games (0-31 games). Therefore, the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won may be determined, or the number of games to be shortened in the ceiling shortening lottery may be determined in advance.

The trigger for the ceiling shortening lottery is not limited to the above. For example, during a pseudo bonus, the ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous zone (normal play), when the current mode is any of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. In these cases, the advantageous zone winning sub-flag and advantageous zone winning sub-flag are referenced to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

As mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is held during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d), it can be seen that a 1G consecutive stock may be awarded regardless of the current mode. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be awarded regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling game count of "32 games" or not.

The manner in which the right is granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode in which the ceiling game number is "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may not be conducted in consideration of the fact that a ceiling shortening lottery will be conducted, and in a mode in which the ceiling game number is greater than "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may be conducted to prevent the game from becoming excessively gambling-like.

The trigger for the 1G consecutive lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G consecutive lottery may be performed in advantageous zones (performance zones) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G consecutive stocks accumulated as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the pseudo bonus starts or during the pseudo bonus, a special bonus performance is executed with a predetermined probability to suggest that the current mode is the heaven mode and that the player is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the special bonus performance is executed, the player can expect that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. This special bonus performance may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus performance is executed at the start of the pseudo bonus, it is suggested that the player is at least in the heaven mode, and the player can be made to have a sense of expectation that the ceiling shortening lottery may also be won. This special bonus performance may also be executed with a predetermined probability or 100% probability when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, various possibilities can be suggested, such as (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening lottery, (3) Heaven mode + 1G consecutive lottery, (4) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening lottery + 1G consecutive lottery, (5) 1G consecutive lottery only, etc., which can increase the interest of the game.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) will be controlled back to an advantageous state within a predetermined period (e.g., 32 games) after the end of the advantageous state (e.g., in the case of heaven mode), that period may be further shortened, so that even if the playing period of a series of advantageous zones is limited (e.g., when limit processing is executed), it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by allowing the player to play in as advantageous a state as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not certain that the advantageous state will be restored within a predetermined period of time after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of end mode), the advantageous state may be restored by granting a right (for example, 1G consecutive stock), which can heighten the player's expectations and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Determined Cherry" or "F_Reach Eye" is determined as the internal winning role), and when the result of the mode transition lottery described above is that the mode transition to Heaven C mode is decided, a special lock effect can be executed with a probability of 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). Note that, even when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role), the player can receive the same benefit as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, so when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, the special lock effect may be executed in the same way as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won.

Here, since the "fixed combination" is a combination that also determines the transition to the pseudo bonus (see FIG. 7(c)), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can recognize that the transition to the pseudo bonus and the transition to the Heaven C mode have occurred, which is very interesting for the player. The special lock effect is configured as an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalid for about 20 seconds at the start of the game, for example. During this time, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in reverse, or a special video that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. Also, a special song that is not normally output may be output. Of course, the effects can be performed by a combination of these. Also, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (i.e., the player can decide whether to execute the effect to the end or to cancel it midway and continue the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described below, even if the player is in Heaven C mode, the advantageous zone may be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process, so it may not be desirable to execute the above-mentioned special lock effect multiple times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous zones. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the special lock effect for the first time within a series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is executed, but thereafter, even if the same conditions are met within the same series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is controlled not to be executed. As a method, when the special lock effect is executed once, information indicating that is stored, and when the information is stored within the same series of advantageous zones thereafter, the decision on whether or not to execute the special lock effect may not be made in the first place, or the decision may be made, but when the information is stored, even if the decision result indicates execution, it may be rewritten to indicate no execution. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous zone ends.

The manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit on the number of times the special lock effect can be executed may be set to "two times" or "three times" rather than "one time." In other words, the execution of the special lock effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set to multiple times. This can be set appropriately depending on the expected number of balls per special lock effect.

The conditions for determining whether or not to execute the special lock effect are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is triggered by the winning of a "fixed role", and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, since there may be cases where a transition to Heaven C mode is triggered by something other than the winning of a "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a determination may be made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect in these cases as well, and it may be determined that the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (which may be the same probability as when the winning of a "fixed role" is the trigger, or may be a different probability).

For example, when a "guaranteed role" is won, a decision may first be made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock effect will be executed, a transition to Heaven C mode may occur. In other words, the special lock effect may be executed in response to a decision to transition to Heaven C mode, or a transition to Heaven C mode may be initiated in response to a decision to execute a special lock effect.

In addition, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the favorable zone may be used as a condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed. For example, when the value of the favorable zone game number counter or the control game number counter described below is less than "750", or when the value of the favorable zone payout counter or the control payout number counter described below is less than "1201", a determination as to whether or not the special lock effect is executed is made as described above, and when the value of the favorable zone game number counter or the control game number counter described below becomes "750" or more, or when the value of the favorable zone payout counter or the control payout number counter described below becomes "1201" or more, it is possible to prevent the determination of whether or not the special lock effect is executed in the same series of favorable zones thereafter.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the play period of a series of advantageous zones is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16 described below). Furthermore, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) is set multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, control is performed so that special effects (e.g., special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game while preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-like.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous zones, the winning of a specific role (e.g., a "fixed role") may trigger control to be established in an advantageous state (e.g., a pseudo bonus), and control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if such an event occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, the machine is controlled so that a special effect (e.g., a special lock effect) is not performed each time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game while preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-oriented.

The first gaming machine is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is won) according to the determined internal winning role, and is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered) according to the combination of symbols displayed, and is capable of determining whether or not to grant a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stopping operation is notified, according to the secondary information determined for each.

In this way, the first gaming machine can provide a sense of expectation regarding the award of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined, but also when a combination of symbols is displayed, thereby diversifying the gameplay regarding the award of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination are managed as common secondary information, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is a first amount (e.g., 3 coins), the first special role (e.g., 3BB) can be won, but the second special role (e.g., 2BB) cannot be won. In addition, when the gaming value bet is a second amount (e.g., 2 coins), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific role (e.g., "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags) is in effect, a combination of predetermined symbols (e.g., "Right-up replay") can be displayed, and if the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is in effect, a combination of specific symbols (e.g., "Parallel replay") can be displayed (see FIG. 15 described below).

The first gaming machine is capable of determining different secondary information when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. In other words, the first gaming machine can vary the content of the determination regarding the granting of an advantageous state depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific role is determined, and therefore can further diversify the gameplay while preventing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific winning combination is won.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to replay, the same privilege of activating replay is awarded regardless of which one is displayed.

The manner in which the same benefit is awarded is not limited to the above. For example, the specific role is configured as a specific minor role related to the award of game value. Then, when the specific minor role is won, for example, in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined patterns (a combination of patterns related to the award of game value equivalent to a "right-up lip") that awards a game value of one coin (this value is arbitrary and may be another value less than the bet game value, or may be a value exceeding the bet game value) is displayed, and in the second special permission state, a combination of specific patterns (a combination of patterns related to the award of game value equivalent to a "parallel lip") that awards the same number of game values as when the combination of predetermined patterns is displayed is displayed.

In addition, both the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols may be configured as "miss" symbol combinations (however, in order to be able to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state, the combination of symbols must be identifiable as being different from a pure "miss" combination). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the decision content regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on which special permission state is in place, even when the same specific role is determined, so that the gameplay can be diversified while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state. Furthermore, in a game in which a specific role has been determined, the same benefit is granted regardless of which special permission state is in place, so that even when the gameplay is varied, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a direct disadvantage.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won and the second special permission state is in effect, it may be configured so that it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, and not possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is not performed in the specific manner.

In addition, it may be possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a specific symbol combination is displayed. When a specific combination is determined as an internal winning role, it may be possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state different between when a specific symbol combination is displayed and when a specific symbol combination is not displayed.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, if the first special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the second special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, and a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

In this case, the specific combination can be configured so that, on at least one reel, a specific symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stopping operation is appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position O" or "correct press position", etc.), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stopping operation is inappropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position X" or "incorrect press position", etc.). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (the timing), which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and increases the enjoyment of the game.

As mentioned above, the specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressing position is ○), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded on at least one reel, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position is ×), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is greater than the specific number. Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is less than the specific number. Also, at least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only makes it possible to vary the degree of advantage in terms of granting an advantageous state based on the player's stopping operation (or the timing of that operation), but also makes it possible to vary the direct content of the bonus, allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and further diversifying the gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if there is only one type of specific role, the timing for the appropriate timing of the stop operation is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different appropriate timings for the stop operation. For example, on one reel, a first specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a third timing different from the first timing and the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

In this case, the special role can be configured so that a combination of specific symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (when the button press order is correct), and a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed when the batting order is inappropriate (when the button press order is incorrect). This allows the degree of advantage in terms of the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (procedure), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (when the button press is correct), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded, and when the batting order is not appropriate (when the button press is incorrect), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). The specific number may be awarded with a greater game value than the specific number. The specific number may be awarded with a lesser game value than the specific number. At least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only makes it possible to vary the degree of advantage in terms of the granting of an advantageous state based on the player's stopping operation (procedure), but also makes it possible to vary the direct content of the bonus, allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and further diversifying the gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific role, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different appropriate batting orders. For example, a first specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the left, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the center or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the center, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the right, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or center, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

So far, we have mentioned that in a unit game in which a specific combination has been won, the process of determining whether a non-advantageous zone will transition to an advantageous zone and the process of determining whether an advantageous state will be granted in an advantageous zone (including pseudo bonus transition lotteries, mode transition lotteries, and other processes for changing the degree of advantage of the game situation in an advantageous zone) change due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order). However, among such changes, any change that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may ultimately result in an disadvantage) can be considered as the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the configuration may be such that any presentation (warning announcement) can be generated to call the player's attention.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the possibility of an advantageous state being awarded is higher when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. In other words, assuming that three coins are bet, the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is a state in which the award of an advantageous state is favored more than the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined role (for example, the "push order bell B" described below) is won, if the first special permission state is selected, the combination of symbols to be awarded (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 8 coins) is displayed regardless of the batting order, while if the second special permission state is selected, if the batting order is the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is not displayed, resulting in a miss where no game value is awarded, or a combination of symbols to which less game value is awarded than when the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 1 coin) is displayed. In other words, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the award of game value is favored more than the second special permission state.

In other words, if a player plays in a 3-coin bet state between 3BB flags even in a non-recommended gaming state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is not favored, but the probability of obtaining a gaming value when an advantageous state is not in operation is favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in the slope value between when an advantageous state is in operation and when it is not in operation is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility of the player being able to suddenly increase the gaming value, is reduced, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state."

On the other hand, if a player plays in the recommended game state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is favored, but the probability of obtaining game value when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in the slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is more likely to be able to rapidly increase their game value, but in which the player's game value is likely to decrease, can be defined as, for example, a "rough sea state."

Here, the method of creating the two states, the stable state and the rough sea state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is increased in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "rough sea state", while the transition probability of the heaven mode is decreased in the mode transition lottery described above compared to the "rough sea state". Also, in the "rough sea state", the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is decreased in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "stable state", while the transition probability of the heaven mode is increased in the mode transition lottery described above compared to the "stable state". In this way, in the "stable state", a state can be created in which it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but difficult to win consecutive wins, and in the "rough sea state", a state can be created in which it is difficult to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but easy to win consecutive wins. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined role may vary between the 2BB flag and the 3BB flag, or may be different from this (i.e., not favoring the 3BB flag).

[5-2. Symbol Arrangement Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first gaming machine, ten types of symbols, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "white blank 1" and "white blank 2", are arranged in the positions shown in Fig. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Also, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal lottery winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 15. Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Figs. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination of the first gaming machine. That is, the following will explain the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine, and which symbol combination (which can also be referred to as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode (i.e., the hitting order, the stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described below, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 10. Also, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a symbol combination related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a symbol combination related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a symbol combination related to a minor role.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning role when playing in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) with 2 bets, but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning role when playing in a 3 bet state. In a game in which "F_2BB" wins in a 2 bet state or a game in which it is a "lose" between 2BB flags, if the pressed position for each reel is ○, "BB01" is displayed and the state transitions to 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB). On the other hand, in a 3 bet state, even between 2BB flags, "BB01" is not displayed.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) with 3 bets, but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a 2 bet state. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3 bet state, or in a game in which a "lose" occurs between 3BB flags, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, "BB02" is displayed and the game transitions to the 3BB state (bonus state based on 3BB). On the other hand, in a 2 bet state, even between 3BB flags, "BB02" is not displayed.

In the 2BB and 3BB states, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referenced to determine the internal winning combination (only three coins can be bet to start playing). In the 2BB and 3BB states, the RB, which is a first-class special combination, is always in operation (RB state). The RB state is repeatedly controlled to end once and then activate again if two wins occur or two games are played after it is activated. In the first gaming machine, the end condition for the 2BB state is stipulated as more than one medal being paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition for the 3BB state is stipulated as more than 176 medals being paid out in the 3BB state.

Here, when the 2BB state or 3BB state ends, a special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode when transitioning to the bonus state (same as when the bonus state ends, since no mode transition occurs during the bonus state), i.e. the current mode, is "start mode", the mode to transition to will be "start mode". Also, if the current mode is either "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", or "chance mode", the mode to transition to will be "normal A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the mode to transition to will be "end A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", or "heaven C mode", the mode to transition to will be "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and 2BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, any of "REP64" to "REP72" (these are collectively called "parallel reps" because they display the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the lower row or in the middle row. Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively called "lower row reps" and "REP72" can be called "middle row reps") is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, "REP73" (this is a replay symbol that displays the "replay" symbols in a straight line to the right, so it can be called a "right-up reps") is displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in a three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in a two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, a "parallel replay" is displayed and a replay is granted regardless of the stop operation mode in either state.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle row replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push position is ○ on at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" (these can be collectively referred to as "cherry replays" since they display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other replays (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is awarded.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Definite Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that, while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle row replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are used to display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L, and since symbols that can increase the player's expectations, such as "REP42", are also displayed on other reels), a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the button is pressed at an X position, other replies (such as the above-mentioned "Cherry rep" or "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed and a replay is granted. Also, if the button is pressed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", a "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_middle cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. It can be configured so that it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, but not determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the push position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are collectively referred to as "middle cherry lip" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the middle of the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other lips (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. Additionally, if the push order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay will be granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Reach Eye" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode in the two-coin bet state, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4," any of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are configured as combinations of symbols that can, by convention, definitely notify (or suggest) a transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "Reach Eye Lip") is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded. Also, if the push order is any of "batting order 5" and "batting order 6," a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

In a non-bonus state, "F_watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the push position for each reel is ○, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these are collectively called "watermelon" because they display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and if three coins are bet, three medals are paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, one of "FRU08" and "FRU09" (these are collectively called "watermelon spill" because they do not display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and one medal is paid out. Note that if the push position is ×, it can also be configured so that a spill occurs and zero medals are paid out.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning roles in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor role with six options (one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct push order), and if it is determined as the internal winning role, and the stopping operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the following "bells" will be displayed: "Downward Right Bell" ("FRU03"), "Top Row Bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02"), "Middle Row Bell" ("FRU04"), "Upward Right Bell" ("FRU05"), "Small Hill Bell" ("FRU06"), and "Bottom Row Bell" ("FRU07"). If three coins are bet, eight medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" are configured to be determined as internal winning roles in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor role between the 3BB flags in the 2-coin bet state and the 3-coin bet state. If it is determined to be an internal winning role, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 8 medals are paid out in the 3-coin bet state, and 2 medals are paid out in the 2-coin bet state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, the "Push Order Bell B" is a push order minor role in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-coin bet state (between non-flags in the 3-coin bet state, between the 2BB flags in the 3-coin bet state), and when it is determined as an internal winning role, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed and 8 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct push order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operation will have a 1/2 probability of being a push position ○, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the remaining stop operation will have a 1/8 probability of being a push position ○, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is an X, a miss will occur and no medals will be paid out.

The "8 F_RB" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, one of the "bells" described above will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and 8 medals will be paid out.

The "F_RB 1 coin" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning role, any of the above-mentioned "1 coin roles" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one medal is paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination tables shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 14, and the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations shown in FIG. 15 are merely examples, and are not limited to the modes shown here.

For example, in the first gaming machine, a "miss" may occur in various situations, such as when there is a pure "miss"; when in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed, "BB01" is missed and becomes a "miss"; when in a 3-bet state where "BB02" can be displayed, "miss" occurs when "BB02" is missed and becomes a "miss"; when there is a 3-bet state between 2BB flags; when there is a 2-bet state between 3BB flags; when there is a "miss" when a "push order minor role" is missed and becomes a "miss". In order to change the combination of symbols displayed as a "miss" in some or all of these cases, these different combinations of symbols are specified in advance in a symbol combination table, and these are allowed to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the determined internal winning role, so that the combination of symbols related to the "miss" displayed can be changed depending on the situation, etc.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, each limit processing of normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing (number of games), and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and limit processing other than each of these limit processings can be executed, or some of these limit processings can be prevented from being executed.

Normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaches 1500 or more (i.e., when 1500 consecutive plays have been played during the advantageous zone). The advantageous zone game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the advantageous zone (including the presentation zone) starts, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The advantageous zone game number counter also counts when the number of bets is either 2 or 3 coins. The advantageous zone game number counter also counts in the 2BB and 3BB states.

When the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), regardless of whether it is during the presentation period or the increase period (pseudo bonus), the advantageous period is forcibly ended and transitioned to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period (for example, information for controlling the presentation period or increase period, information related to the current mode, information related to the play period of the pseudo bonus, information related to the ceiling game number and whether the ceiling has been shortened, the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter, and various information obtained during the advantageous period and various information required to control the advantageous period) is also cleared (initialized).

Normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the favorable zone payout counter becomes "2401" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone exceeds 2400). The favorable zone payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (number of medals difference)") when the favorable zone (including the performance zone) starts, and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The favorable zone payout counter also counts when the number of bets is 2 or 3. The favorable zone payout counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. The favorable zone payout counter also subtracts a value that is appropriately counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-2 medals" or "-3 medals") when a "miss" or "miss" occurs during the favorable zone. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the start of the favorable zone, the value may become negative (or it may be configured to always remain "0" if the value becomes negative). In other words, the favorable zone payout number counter is capable of counting from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone to the defined highest point (difference in number of medals: 2400 medals).

When the normal limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), regardless of whether the player is in the performance period or the increase period (pseudo bonus), the advantageous period is forcibly ended and the player transitions to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (i.e., when 1445 consecutive plays have been played during the favorable zone). The control game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the favorable zone (including the presentation zone) starts, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three coins, and does not count when the number of bets is two coins. The control game number counter counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state. However, the control game number counter can also be configured in the same way as the favorable zone game number counter.

When the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increase period), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period is forcibly ended accordingly and a transition is made to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the aforementioned advantageous period is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the player is not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., during the presentation period), the game will first forcibly transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if the pseudo bonus transition lottery is not won, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the pseudo bonus to which the player has transitioned ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information regarding the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note here that the value of the advantageous zone game number counter where normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1445". Since the maximum number of games played (continuation period) during a pseudo bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit process (number of games) is executed when a predetermined restricted period of play has been played in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, which may reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit process (number of games) is executed in a game that is one possible continuation period (55 games) per increased zone before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, thereby preventing the pseudo bonus from ending prematurely and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per two increase sections (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + grace period (2 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in the case of a specification in which a premonition state is passed through before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this premonition state is "4 games," the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + maximum premonition period (4 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) can be any time before the timing at which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable period exceeds 2125). The control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference in number of medals)") from the start of the favorable period (including the performance period), and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable period ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control payout number counter also counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. The control payout number counter also counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable zone, the control payout counter subtracts an appropriate count value according to the actual number of medals paid out (for example, "-3 medals"). However, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable zone (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out), the control payout counter counts the number of medals paid out as if no "miss" (or difference) occurred. Specifically, for example, in a game where you bet three coins and win "Push Order Bell A," if the stroke order is correct, the number of medals paid out (maximum) will be "8 medals" (the difference in number is "+5 medals"), but if the stroke order is not correct and the pressing position is correct, the number of medals paid out will be "1 medal" (the difference in number is "-2 medals"), and if the pressing position is not correct, a missed medal will occur and the number of medals paid out will be "0 medals" (the difference in number is "-3 medals"); however, the control payout counter will count the difference in number of medals as "+5 medals" in either case in that game.

In addition, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter becomes greater than the value of the control payout number counter due to the activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is corrected to the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. The control payout number counter can also be configured in the same way as the advantageous zone payout number counter.

When the special limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increase period), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period is forcibly ended accordingly and a transition is made to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the player is not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., during the presentation period), the game will first forcibly transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if the player does not win the pseudo bonus transition lottery, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (payout number). Then, when the pseudo bonus to which the player has transitioned ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information regarding the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note that the value of the advantageous zone payout counter where normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed (activated) is "2401", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (payout amount) is executed (activated) is "2126". Since the maximum number of coins that can be won during a pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) in the first gaming machine is "275 coins" (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be awarded during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value equivalent to a predetermined regulated game value amount is awarded in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the game from becoming too gambling-like. However, for example, if this normal limit process (payout number) is executed immediately after the start of a pseudo bonus or during it, the player may feel distrustful or lose interest in the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increased zone (275 coins) is awarded, thereby preventing the pseudo bonus from ending midway and causing the player to feel distrustful or lose a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (payout number) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per two increase sections (275 pieces x 2 sets = 550 pieces). Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per one increase section (275 pieces) + the amount of game value equivalent to the grace period (8 pieces). In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The semi-limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and the result is "ceiling shortening enabled", then "1" is added) multiplied by "55" (i.e., the period during which the pseudo bonus can continue), and the result of the addition is "1390" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and "ceiling shortening enabled", then the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the semi-limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) when the value of the control game number counter is "1280".

The semi-limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and the ceiling shortening lottery is set to "with ceiling shortening", an additional "1" is added) multiplied by "275" (i.e., the amount of game value that can be awarded with the pseudo bonus), and the result of the addition is "1851" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and the ceiling shortening lottery is set to "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "1301". Note that since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (payout number) both perform the same restriction, once the operating condition of one is met and activated, there is no need to operate it redundantly even if the operating condition of the other is met.

When the semi-limit process (number of games) or the preparation limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are not executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous zones. In other words, the extension of the play period in the increase zone is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the play period in the increase zone is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of 1G consecutive may be made lower than normal, and in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of ceiling shortening may be made lower than normal. In other words, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery themselves are executed, but it may be made difficult to win these lotteries. Also, for example, in the performance zone after the execution of the semi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that will be a winning lottery in the pseudo bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to transition to the pseudo bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value that determines a mode transition that is advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered, making it more difficult for the pseudo bonus to be consecutive.

In addition, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or semi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), in the series of subsequent advantageous periods, during the presentation period, special processing is performed when a "fixed role" (see FIG. 7(a)) is drawn. Below, this special processing is explained using the example of the case where the "fixed role" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "Definite Cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period), a "Winning Lottery (Next Play)" is determined in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see FIG. 7(c)). In addition, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that players have high expectations for, so in a game in which information on the stop operation is not notified, the general procedure is for the player to perform a stop operation at the first left stop and while aiming for the "cherry" symbol (aiming for the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when playing according to the general procedure, when a "Definite Cherry" is drawn, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped on the lower row of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "fixed cherry" is drawn, a notification may be made to the effect that the first left stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") should be made. In addition, a "winning lottery (next game)" is not limited to a lottery in which the pseudo bonus starts from the next game, and may be a lottery in which the pseudo bonus starts from the next game or later.

Here, a skilled player will perform a stopping operation, for example, aiming for the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, in order to further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "definite cherry". As a result, the "BAR" symbols will line up in the middle of each reel, and the player will be able to recognize that they have won a "definite cherry" (see, for example, "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, a player without skill may not perform a stopping operation aiming for the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, or may be unable to perform such an operation, and may not be able to determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "definite cherry" from the stop display mode (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is operating, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is not displayed, but the symbol combination of a "cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100% or with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

Either way, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, you will be notified that a pseudo bonus will begin when the next game starts with a "Red 7s lined up" effect, and the pseudo bonus will begin.

On the other hand, if a "confirmed cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period) after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery will initially determine "winning lottery (next game)" (see FIG. 7(c)), but this determination result will be rewritten to "winning lottery (current game)" by executing a special process. Then, at the start of the current game, a "red 7s line up" presentation will be performed to announce that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will begin.

At this time, in the current game, the symbol combination of "Determined Cherry Lip" (including the symbol combination of "Cherry Lip") is not displayed, and a notification (special notification) of information on the stop operation to display the symbol combination of "Middle Lip" is made. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is made to the effect that the first right stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed to "Determined Cherry Lip" display → pseudo bonus start from the next game, but after the activation of either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts), the game flow is changed to "middle lip" display by performing a stop operation according to the special notification from the current game. The special notification may be controlled by the main (main control board 71) side, or it may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side, from the viewpoint that the player will not suffer any disadvantage even if the result is a transition to a pseudo bonus.

In addition, if a "Definite Cherry" is won after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, and the symbol combination for the "Definite Cherry Rep" is displayed despite a special notification being issued, the special winning sound will not be output.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, the procedure for the stop operation is not basically notified. For this reason, if the procedure for the stop operation is notified and the "middle replay" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, when such a state occurs, the player will clearly recognize that one of the semi-limit processes has been activated, which may result in a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous zone, regardless of whether or not one of the semi-limit processes is activated (or even after the activation of one of the semi-limit processes), if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the special notification is unnatural. Also, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Also, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a "winning lottery (current game)" may be determined with a predetermined probability.

So far, we have used the example of monitoring the play period in the favorable zone using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" to activate the normal limit process, special limit process, and semi-limit process, but the conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the favorable zone game number counter, the value of the favorable zone payout counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout counter, as well as the value of the 1G consecutive counter and the presence or absence of ceiling shortening (i.e., variables for activating the semi-limit process), etc., when each limit process is executed, can be changed as appropriate depending on the game specifications, market trends, etc.

Furthermore, the method for monitoring the play period of the advantageous zone is not limited to the above. For example, if the "number of navigations" is used to monitor the play period of the advantageous zone, normal limit processing (number of navigations), special limit processing (number of navigations), or semi-limit processing (number of navigations) can be executed in the same manner as described above. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be adopted to monitor the play period of the advantageous zone, and by specifying the value at which normal limit processing is executed, the value at which special limit processing is executed, and the value at which semi-limit processing is executed for the adopted element, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) and the specific state (e.g., presentation zone) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is "2401" or more), the series of advantageous zones are forcibly ended. However, when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), if the advantageous state exists, the series of advantageous zones are ended when transitioning to the specific state.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous periods is not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, but rather it is possible for a series of advantageous periods to end within a certain period in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessively high levels of gambling, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) and the specific state (e.g., presentation zone) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in this series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is "2401" or more), this series of advantageous zones is forcibly ended, but when the play period in this series of advantageous zones becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous zones becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is "2126" or more), if the advantageous state is not in an advantageous state, it is transitioned to the advantageous state, and when the transitioned advantageous state ends and transitions to the specific state, the series of advantageous zones is terminated.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous zones are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible to end a series of advantageous zones within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. Furthermore, when ending a series of advantageous zones in this way, if the state is not advantageous, the system transitions to an advantageous state before ending the series. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessive gambling, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set taking into consideration the period during which the advantageous state can continue (e.g., "55 games") or the amount of gaming value that can be awarded (e.g., "275 coins"), so that it is possible to prevent the amount of gaming value awarded to the player from being excessively restricted while still taking into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but when the play period in a series of advantageous zones is shorter than the specific period and becomes a special period set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the semi-limit process (number of games) is executed), or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous zones is less than the specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the series of subsequent advantageous zones. This prevents, for example, a player from being granted more rights than he or she can consume, which would result in the series of advantageous zones being forcibly ended in such a state, causing the player to feel distrustful or have a sense of loss, and thus makes it possible to suppress excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," even if a difference occurs between the amount of game value that should have been awarded and the amount of game value that has actually been awarded due to, for example, a player's operating error or ignoring instructions, this difference is not taken into consideration, and the calculation is performed based on the amount of game value that should have been awarded. This makes it possible to prevent a series of advantageous zones from being unnecessarily extended due to such player actions, and to prevent unfairness from occurring between players who have performed such actions and players who have not, making it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player while preventing excessive speculation.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a fixed combination (e.g., "fixed cherry") that confirms a transition to an advantageous state is won in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (e.g., a state after the semi-limit processing has been activated), a special notification is made to prevent the display of a special pattern combination (e.g., "fixed cherry replay") that clearly indicates the winning of this fixed combination. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger that started the advantageous state in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any presentation execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is made, the advantageous state that would have started from the next game is started from the current game. This allows the player to perform the stopping operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is made, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is possible to issue a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound), but when the granting of rights is suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is not possible to issue a special notification. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that started the advantageous state when the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any performance execution means may be used to issue the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the decision as to whether or not to issue a special notification is made depending on whether or not a fixed combination has been drawn, whether or not a special symbol combination has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been issued. This allows for more appropriate management of the circumstances under which a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous zone game number counter and advantageous zone payout number counter count regardless of the amount of gaming value bet, making it possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) not only in the three-coin bet state but also in the two-coin bet state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the three-coin bet state, but do not perform counting in the two-coin bet state. Therefore, in the three-coin bet state, it is possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed, but in the two-coin bet state, it is not possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed. Therefore, in the two-coin bet state, the execution of the normal limit process (number of games) or normal limit process (number of payouts) may forcibly end a series of advantageous periods even during a pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the probability of winning the minor prize and the number of medals paid out differ between the three-coin bet state and the two-coin bet state (see Figures 10 to 15), so playing in the two-coin bet state is more disadvantageous to the player than playing in the three-coin bet state. However, the method of making playing in the two-coin bet state more disadvantageous to the player is not limited to this. For example, if playing in the two-coin bet state during a pseudo bonus is played, the stopping operation procedure may be notified, so that the player is at a disadvantage.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a first amount (e.g., "3 coins") of gaming value is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible to end a series of advantageous periods within a certain period in a natural flow accompanying the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessively high gambling tendency, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player. On the other hand, when a second amount (e.g., "2 coins") of gaming value is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods may be forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, which makes it possible to make the player realize that he/she has not played in the intended playing method, and therefore encourages the player to play in the intended playing method.

In addition, since in a series of advantageous zones, when the second amount of game value is bet and play is performed, it is more disadvantageous for the player than when the first amount of game value is bet and play is performed, by making it possible to issue such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a more advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to playing in a way that the player did not intend.

[5-5. Storage Area Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the configuration of the storage areas of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figs. 17 to 22. Fig. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an activation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a push order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning lottery flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and pattern code storage area)
First, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 17. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the above storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by 1 byte of data. Note that the data stored in each storage area is only the 1 byte of data in the "Data" column in Figure 17, but for ease of explanation, Figure 17 also shows the "combination" (in Figure 17, the symbols on reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R are listed in that order) indicating the symbol combination associated with the bit of each storage area, and its contents (see Figures 11 to 14).

The data stored in the winning flag storage area is used to enable the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that corresponds to the internal winning role (i.e., the type of symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in the current game). For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if it is carried over), then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed role (i.e., the type of symbol combination displayed on the winning line in the current game). For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB is displayed on the winning line in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable identification of the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on an active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is spinning. For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB can still be displayed on an active line while at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

(Carryover role storage area)
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 18. The carryover combination storage area is configured with a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

When the internal lottery process determines that the bonus role of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is the internal winning role, these bonus roles are stored in the carryover role storage area as carryover roles ("1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover roles stored in the carryover role storage area are not cleared and are retained until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. Also, while the carryover role is stored in the carryover role storage area, the carryover role (bonus role) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning role (minor role/replay role) determined by the internal lottery process.

(Game Status Flag Storage Area)
Next, the configuration of the game status flag storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 19. The game status flag storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, when the current game status is 2BB, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

In the first gaming machine, since the RT state is not provided, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 does not have an area indicating the type of RT state. However, for example, if the RT state is provided, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) in the advantageous zone is stored in a mode flag storage area described later, but it can also be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming zones of the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone. It can be managed by providing an advantageous zone flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and the ART state. It can be managed by providing an AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each of which is represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is start mode, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Also, if the current mode is heaven A mode, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the activated stop button storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 21. The activated stop button storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 of the activated stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of stopped reel), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated (type of reel that is spinning).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button that has been pressed this time, i.e., the activated stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, i.e., a valid stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button that has been pressed this time and a stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the activated stop button storage area.

(Pressing order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 22. The pressing order storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data. Note that the pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, i.e., the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all reels are spinning, a "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing sequence storage area. Next, when stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), a "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but a "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. Next, when stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "center" second stop), a "1" remains stored in bit 0, but a "0" is stored in bit 1. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing sequence for the current game based on the data stored in the pressing sequence storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 32. Note that in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the process contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the process contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

[6-1. Main Processing]
First, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. Fig. 23 also shows the power-on processing executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). In this processing, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The power-on processing will be described in detail later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased for each unit game, such as a winning flag storage area or a winning activation flag storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance/start check process (S3). In this process, for example, the input state of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, etc. is checked, and various processes required at the start of the game are performed. Details of the medal acceptance/start check process will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, a random number value for an internal lottery (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535) and a random number value for effects (random number value for other lotteries) used in various lotteries related to gameplay (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535 or a range of 0 to 255) are extracted, and the various extracted random number values are stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the acquisition manner of the various random number values is not limited to the above. The required number of random number values can be appropriately acquired from each predetermined number range (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, a range of 0 to 127, etc.).

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes are performed that are necessary to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and the internal lottery random number value according to the current game state, etc. The internal lottery process will be described in detail later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, when a game is started, if a transition condition for each game state is met (for example, based on a determined internal lottery combination, etc.), various processes are performed to transition the game state according to the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the game period of the current game state. Details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in a communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32) described below. The methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are also basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main side presentation control processing at the start of play (S8). In this processing, when various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the start of play, various processes necessary for performing the presentation are performed. For example, if a lock presentation is to be performed at the start of play, the execution of the lock presentation is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification of the pseudo game) is controlled. Also, for example, if the AT state is present and information on a stop operation is to be notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Also, although details are omitted, if a lock presentation is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). In this processing, various information required for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of attraction priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination and game status, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel spin start processing (S10). In this processing, it requests that all reels start spinning. Then, when it is requested that all reels start spinning, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control processing described below (see S203 in FIG. 32), and each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts spinning. Each reel that has started spinning is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Also, although details are omitted, in this processing, a reel spin start command generation and storage processing is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case), data indicating the pull-in priority order is obtained by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority order table, and stored in a pull-in priority order data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process described below is performed prior to this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, various processes necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel are performed based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control sets set accordingly) and the stop operation state of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. The reel stop control process will be described in detail later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a winning activation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether there is a bit in which a "1" is stored in the winning activation flag storage area. In addition, although details are omitted, this process also involves the winning activation command generation and storage process.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout/replay activation process (S14). In this process, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processes necessary to activate a replay in the next game are performed. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a process is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. In addition, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs end-of-game state control processing (S15). In this processing, when the game ends, for various game states, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state according to the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the end-of-game state control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main side presentation control processing at the end of game (S16). In this processing, when various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the end of game, various processes necessary for performing the presentation are performed. For example, if a lock presentation is to be performed at the end of game, the execution of the lock presentation is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notifications related to the pseudo game) is controlled. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a lock presentation is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this processing.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the machine can be configured to perform processes other than these as needed, and can also be configured not to perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, the power-on process carried out in S1 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on initialization process (not shown), then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not writing to the main RAM 103 was performed normally based on the results of the test (S21). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

When the main CPU 101 determines that writing to the main RAM 103 was successful (YES in S21), it determines whether the setting key switch 52 is on (S22). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when changing the setting (S23). In this processing, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased when changing the setting, such as a carryover role storage area, a game status flag storage area, or a mode flag storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S24). In this process, data for an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has started and to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation or setting value confirmation operation, and then a new setting value is set (stored) in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch 52 has been turned off (S26). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the new setting value has been set.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), it waits until the setting key switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S26), it performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S27). In this process, it generates initialization command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process has ended, and stores the generated data in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), it determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various pieces of information backed up when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off (power outage) are normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), it performs a game return process (S29). In this process, it performs a process to return the pachislot machine 1 to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), or if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), it performs power-on error processing (S30). Note that errors that occur as a result of this power-on error processing are not resolved by the reset operation described above, but are resolved when a new setting value is set. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 does not transition to normal processing (S2 and subsequent steps in FIG. 23) until the power to the pachislot machine 1 is turned off once and a new setting value is set (until the processing of S22 to S26 described above is performed).

(Medal reception and start check processing)
Next, the medal acceptance/start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the medal acceptance/start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether a replay role was won in the previous unit game (whether a replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), it performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this processing, the same number of medals as were inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Also, although details are omitted, if automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this processing. Also, in this processing, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41) and after processing in S42, it performs auxiliary medal storage switch check processing (S43). In this processing, it determines whether the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (i.e., whether a certain number of medals or more are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33), and if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state, it generates an auxiliary medal storage error. In this case, the processing is put on hold until the error is resolved. Furthermore, if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits are checked, and it is also determined whether the acceptance of medals is prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the state becomes one in which medals can be accepted (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) (acceptance of medals is permitted). Note that if a selector error has occurred, the process is put on hold until the error is resolved.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the machine is ready to accept medals (S45). If the main CPU 101 determines that the machine is ready to accept medals (YES in S45), it performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the detection results of the bet switch 6S. Also, although details are omitted, if a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is possible to insert medals or to give credits (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". If the main CPU 101 judges that it is not possible to insert medals or to give credits (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (NO in S49), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the state as one in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which betting operations are not acceptable).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the game is not ready to accept medals (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that the game is ready to accept medals or receive credits (YES in S47), or after processing S48, it determines whether the number of medals inserted is the number that allows play to begin (S49). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the number required to start playing (YES in S49), it determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 then ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of inserted coins is not enough to start playing (NO in S49), or if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not on (NO in S50), it returns the process to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Note that Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check the setting value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the setting value, the number of bets, the game status, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for the internal lottery from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in S4 of the main process described above. Note that in this process, if it is determined that the setting value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred and executes the above-mentioned power-on error process (see S30 in FIG. 24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (e.g., updated by addition) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination defined in the set internal lottery table, and it is determined whether the updated result is a predetermined result (e.g., whether it has overflowed). If it is a predetermined result, that internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for this unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not obtained even after determining all internal winning combinations, the result of this unit game will be a "lose" ("lose" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). If the main CPU 101 judges that an internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be judged (sequentially updates the random number values for the internal lottery) and repeats the process of S64 until judgments have been made for all internal winning combinations (or until an internal winning combination is determined halfway through).

When the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning role has been determined (YES in S65), it determines whether the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (i.e., a minor role or a replay role, rather than a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role in the winning flag storage area.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning role is not a role that is not eligible for carryover (NO in S66), and after processing in S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning role is eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role eligible for carryover (YES in S68), it determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus roles have not yet been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S69), it updates the carryover role storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover role storage area is updated based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the carryover role storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning role is not a role eligible for carryover (NO in S68), if it determines in S69 that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (NO in S69), or after processing S70, it again determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (S71 is NO), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover role storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when a bonus role is carried over (or a winning role has been won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the winning flag storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the bonus role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing of S72, it performs a sub-flag setting process (S73). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag or an advantageous zone winning time sub-flag is set based on the internal winning role. Note that in this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to information on the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor may be set. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control process)
Next, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when starting a game, a check is made as to whether or not a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another game state is satisfied. For example, in the case of transitioning to a flag interval as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus role, this process checks whether or not the predetermined bonus role has been won. In the case of the first gaming machine, the flag interval is not configured as an RT state (i.e., as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so this check is not necessary. Also, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific transition condition is satisfied and a specific number of games are played, this specific number of games can also be managed in this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set game state (S84). In this process, when it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or to set a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the game state, such setting process is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has not been met (NO in S82), and after processing S84, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S85), it performs a favorable zone start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when starting play, it checks whether the transition condition for transitioning from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (favorable zone start condition) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process involves conducting the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery, and checking whether the lottery result will start the favorable zone.

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S87). If the main CPU 101 judges that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S87), it ends the game start state control process. If the main CPU 101 judges that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S87), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous zone. In this process, in response to the start of the advantageous zone, it appropriately performs setting processing such as starting counting various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes (that is, starting monitoring the game period of a series of advantageous zones).

Then, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started favorable zone. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the set mode or to set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, according to the set destination mode, when the mode is shifted to the pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the play period, when the mode is shifted to the end mode, "32 games" is set as the play period, and when the mode is shifted to the other mode, the corresponding ceiling number of games is set. In addition, the lottery value (lottery table) in various lotteries (see Figures 7 and 8, etc.) is set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current play zone is not a non-favorable zone (i.e., it is a favorable zone) (NO in S85), it performs processing at the start of play in the favorable zone (S91). Details of the processing at the start of play in the favorable zone will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for determining whether the advantageous zone end condition is met (S92). In this process, when starting play, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the end condition of the advantageous zone) is met. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the operation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of games in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (S93). When the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (YES in S93), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets the non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, it performs initialization processing to clear all information (that is, information about the advantageous zone) related to, for example, various counters related to various limit processing (see FIG. 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the game period of the mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control processing. Also, when the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has not been met (NO in S93), it ends the game start state control processing.

(Processing at the start of play during advantageous period)
Next, the game start processing during the advantageous period performed in S91 of the game start state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the start of play) (S101). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) in the advantageous zone, or various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtracting (adding) 1 per game, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S102). When the main CPU 101 judges that it is in a specific mode (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of play) (S103). In this processing, for example, when it is possible to extend the play period of the AT state (for example, extending the number of games or adding the number of sets, etc.) at the start of play, it judges whether or not the execution condition of such an extension is established, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on this judgment result (if it is possible to shorten the play period of the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S101 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and a process is performed to extend the pseudo bonus according to the lottery result.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the information of the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be included in the start command are set. Note that in this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. In other words, when a role to be notified is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily occur, and in this process, whether or not navigation occurs may be determined according to a predetermined condition (for example, the type of role to be notified or a predetermined probability of navigation occurrence).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the game is not in a specific mode (NO in S102) and after S104, it determines whether or not the mode transition condition is met (S105). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether or not the transition mode has been determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, for example.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is met (YES in S105), it updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process sets the transition mode determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process is similar to the process of S90 described above, for example. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not met (NO in S105), it ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone.

The state control process at the start of play shown in FIG. 27 and the state control process at the end of play shown in FIG. 30, as well as the process at the start of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 28 and the process at the end of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 31, are basically almost the same processing configuration. This means that for processes that may be performed either when play starts or when play ends (for example, processes that refer to a determined internal lottery role, such as a game state or mode transition, but the processing result only needs to be reflected by the time the current game ends (or the time the next game starts)), they may be performed in either one of them, and do not mean that similar processes are performed in both overlapping ways. Therefore, such processes may be performed either when play starts or when play ends.

In contrast, processing that needs to be performed when game play begins (such as the navigation setting processing described above) may be performed when game play begins, and processing that needs to be performed when game play ends (such as processing that references the combination of displayed symbols) may be performed when game play ends. Also, for example, processing that needs to be performed at a specified time after game play begins and before game play ends, or processing where it is better to perform processing (such as processing that references the stop operation mode of the first stop operation) may be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Note that Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of all reels has reached a predetermined constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) (i.e., whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), it waits until all reels rotate at the constant speed. On the other hand, if it determines that all reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), it allows each reel to stop (S112). In other words, the main CPU 101 enables each stop button. In addition, the activated stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the activated stop button storage area).

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the process waits until a valid stop button is operated. When automatic stop control is to be performed, this wait time is measured, and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (S113: YES), it updates the activated stop button storage area and the pressing sequence storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on reel 3L (when stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Also, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing sequence storage area are updated to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled based on the activated stop button (S115). In this process, for example, if stop button 8L is pressed, reel 3L is determined to be the reel to be controlled.

Then, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L was pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process for determining the number of sliding pieces (S117). In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 refers to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table and the data in the above-mentioned pull-in priority data storage area, and determines the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (amount of movement of the symbols).

Then, the main CPU 101 stores the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the pattern position data of the position where the pattern will finally stop based on the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the planned stop position.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S119). In this process, data for the reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can be configured to include parameters that can specify not only the intended stop position, but also the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pattern code storage process (S120). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the pattern code storage area while also referring to the type of pattern (pattern code) at the intended stopping position of the reel for which the intended stopping position has already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an active stop button (S121). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a reel that is still spinning (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button is present (YES in S121), it performs a control change process (S122). In this process, if it is necessary to change the stop table or the pull priority table set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process, for example, depending on the stop operation mode performed by the player up to this point, the various information required for such stop control is reset.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel, the main CPU 101 acquires data indicating the pull-in priority order by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority order table while also referring to the type of symbol at the intended stop position on the reel whose intended stop position has already been determined, and stores the data in the pull-in priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), it ends the reel stop control process.

(Game End State Control Processing)
Next, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game end state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, a check is made as to whether a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another game state has been satisfied. For example, when a transition to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state is made based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, this process checks whether the predetermined symbol combination has been displayed. Also, when in a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, this process checks whether the termination conditions for these game states have been satisfied. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks whether, for example, a symbol combination related to 2BB or 3BB has been displayed. Also, when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state, for example, a check is made as to whether the termination conditions for these game states have been satisfied by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area, and the 2BB state or 3BB state is set. Also, for example, when the game state is in the 2BB state or 3BB state, if the end condition for these game states is met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, when it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the gaming state, such setting processes are appropriately performed. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "1", and if the 3BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "176".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has not been met (NO in S132), and after processing S134, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S135), it performs a favorable zone start condition establishment check process (S136). As described above, in a non-favorable zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S86 described above (game start state control process).

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S137), it ends the state control process at the end of the game. Also, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S137), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S138). As described above, in the non-advantageous zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S88 described above (state control process at the start of the game).

Then, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous period that has started. As described above, in the non-advantageous period, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (game start state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) for the set mode or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. As described above, in the non-advantageous zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S90 described above (state control process at the start of play).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current play period is not a non-favorable period (i.e., it is a favorable period) (NO in S135), it performs processing at the end of play during the favorable period (S141). Details of the processing at the end of play during the favorable period will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for determining whether the advantageous zone end condition has been met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, a check is made as to whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the end condition of the advantageous zone) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the operating conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the payout number during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (S143). When the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (YES in S143), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets the non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, for example, it performs initialization processing to clear all information (i.e., information about the advantageous zone) related to various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the game period of the mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control processing. Also, when the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has not been met (NO in S143), it ends the game end state control processing.

(Processing at the end of play during advantageous period)
Next, the game end processing during the advantageous period performed in S141 of the game end state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game end processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the end of play) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the payout number during the favorable zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) during the favorable zone, or various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the payout number, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S152). When the main CPU 101 judges that it is in a specific mode (S152 is YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this processing, for example, when it is possible to extend the play period of the AT state (for example, extending the number of games or adding the number of sets, etc.) at the end of the game, it judges whether or not the execution condition of such an extension is established, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on this judgment result (if it is possible to shorten the play period of the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S151 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process involves the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery being performed based on the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the result of this lottery.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S152) and after S153, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is met (YES in S154), it updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process sets the transition mode determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting process is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process is similar to the process of S140 described above, for example. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S154), it ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, the periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the number of interrupts actually executed for some or all of the processing may be set to "2" or more, resulting in the periodic interrupt processing being executed at a different cycle.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input states (on or off) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether there has been a change in the input state. If there has been a change in the input state, the change is stored in input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and input states that have not changed are stored as they are in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, it controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and controls the rotation and stopping of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, it transmits each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In this embodiment, the various command data is temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in periodic interrupt processing; however, for example, the various command data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the various command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication; however, for example, the various command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S205). In this process, it controls the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14, etc., connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S206). In this process, it updates various timers managed by the main control circuit 100.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S207). In this process, it detects whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open/close check process (S208). In this process, for example, the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. If various error states have occurred and if the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is open (off), a security signal is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a register restoration process (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by the Sub-Control Circuit]
Next, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the overview of the sub-side control processing.

In addition, in the Pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but not so many restrictions are placed on the sub-control circuit 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can use various configurations depending on the type and number of connected presentation devices, the type of presentation performed by the presentation devices, etc., and the manufacturing costs, etc. This is why it is written "Overview" in Figure 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 201 performs power-on processing (S301 and S302) in the same manner as the main CPU 101. During this processing, processing is performed such as detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializing data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and starting various tasks required for performing various performance execution control processing described below.

When the sub-CPU 201 receives a command sent from the main control circuit 100, it performs a performance execution control process when the command is received (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if the settings have been changed, the appropriate initialization process is performed on the sub side, and if the settings have not been changed, the process of restoring the sub side to the state before the power outage is performed.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referenced, and if the state is not AT, the content of the presentation that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination or game state, etc. is determined (by lottery if necessary), and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if the state is AT, in addition to this, the content of the presentation that notifies the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.For example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the stop start position or the planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.For example, when a winning activation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning activation command is referenced, and if a bonus is awarded, the content of the effect linked to the bonus to be awarded is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

The sub-CPU 201 also performs processing for controlling the execution of effects when effect buttons 10a, 10b connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74) are operated (S305 and S306). In this processing, for example, when an effect button in accordance with an effect is operated while an operation-linked effect is being executed, the sub-CPU 201 controls various effect devices so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Also, for example, when an effect button is operated to call up a user menu (described below) while not playing, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to display the user menu. Also, when an effect button is operated to perform a selection or decision operation while the user menu is being displayed, the sub-CPU 201 performs control in accordance with these operations.

In addition, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger occurs, the sub-CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this processing, for example, when a non-operation period during which no operation related to the game or user menu is performed reaches a predetermined period (e.g., about 30 seconds), the sub-CPU 201 determines the content of the effect related to the demo state notification and controls various effect devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

[8. Other functions of Pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has various functions for controlling the game and the presentation, as well as various configurations for implementing these functions, but it can also have other functions, such as those shown below. In the following, an example of other functions on the player's side and an example of other functions on the gaming facility's side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, a user menu is displayed by the player's presentation operation, a desired menu is selected from the user menu, and then the player performs an appropriate selection and decision operation for the selected menu, enabling the player to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when the "arrangement and payout table" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the performance display section, which allows the player to check the pattern arrangement on the pachislot machine 1, the specified pattern combination, and game information showing the payout (contents of the bonus) when the combination is won.

For example, when "Volume/Light Adjustment" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display unit, which allows the brightness of the various display devices in the slot machine 1, the volume of the sound output from the speakers, or the light intensity of the lamps and LEDs to be set. During such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts settings-related operations (i.e., the operation unit that accepts performance operations).

For example, when "Custom" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display unit that allows the setting of the performance mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used in the performance (including the type of the character (display mode) itself, the type of voice corresponding to the character, or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character, etc.), the probability of the performance occurring (including the type of expectation when the performance occurs, etc.), or the mode of suggestion or notification (including the timing of performance execution, etc.)). Note that when setting in this manner, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept operations related to the settings, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts performance operations).

For example, when "UniMemo" is selected and confirmed, it becomes possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile terminal (e.g., a mobile phone, smartphone, etc.). With such an information provision service, for example, the player can log in to start playing (play can also be started without logging in), and by logging out when the game is over, the player can confirm or obtain game history information (e.g., information according to various game results, such as the total number of games played, the number of times an advantageous game state occurred, and the maximum number of coins won).

In addition, for example, the game history information also includes information regarding associated benefits, such as information indicating the type of character that can be displayed during play and the type of music that can be output depending on the game result (achievement of the unlocking conditions), and information indicating the type of character that can be displayed on the player's mobile terminal and the type of music that can be output.

Note that various methods can be used for logging in and out of such information provision services. For example, the player may use his/her terminal to read a two-dimensional code displayed on the display screen to log in and out, or the player may enter a password or memorize a password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a four- to ten-digit character string may be displayed as a password to be entered next time, which the player may obtain by writing it down on paper or taking a photo of it on a mobile device, and the password obtained in this way may be entered when logging in before the start of the next game). These methods can also be combined as appropriate to log in and out.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (which may be a setting change operation or other operation by the amusement facility's administrator) by the amusement facility's administrator, a desired menu is selected from the hall menu, and then an appropriate selection/determination operation is performed for the selected menu, allowing the amusement facility's administrator to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "Time Setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen that allows the date and time, etc. of the slot machine 1 to be set is displayed in the performance display section. The date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, during the sub-side power-on process described above (see S302 in FIG. 33).

For example, when "Total Medal Information" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the performance display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the number of coins inserted and paid out during a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

For example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a specified period (for example, each business day of seven business days) on the slot machine 1. For example, when "error information history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the date and time of error occurrences and their contents within a specified period (for example, each business day of seven business days) on the slot machine 1.

For example, when "Monitoring History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the door opening date and time within a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the Pachislot machine 1, as well as that period. For example, when "Warning Settings" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to set the manner and frequency of various warning notifications on the Pachislot machine 1.

For example, when "power saving mode setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislot machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu. Furthermore, when making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation section that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation section that accepts effect operations).

For example, when "limit setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the limit function in the slot machine 1. The limit function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is met, renders the machine unplayable until the manager of the gaming establishment cancels the condition (for example, a reset operation). The predetermined operating condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase zone, or an advantageous zone (including an operating zone)) ends. When the limit function is set to ON, the automatic settlement function described below may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

For example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function of the pachislot machine 1. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (i.e., all credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is met. The predetermined operating condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, either the bonus state, the increase zone, or the advantageous zone (including the effect zone)) ends. When the automatic settlement function is set to ON, the above-mentioned limit function may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

When setting the limit function or automatic settlement function, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations). However, in this case, since it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, it is also possible to use only a specific operation unit (e.g., a stop button) as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings.

[9. Extension Example]
Up to this point, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machines to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied are not limited to this. For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to gaming machines called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines", and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines that can play games (perform gaming control) according to the game actions (operations) of the player. In addition, the configurations and functions of gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example will be described, although it is merely an example.

(Pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine has, for example, a game board with a game area in which game balls can roll and flow down, a glass door including protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, a performance display device provided in a specified area of the game area (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to the game and performance, and these are supported by a frame body (which may be simply referred to as a "frame" or the like).

In addition, the front side of the pachinko machine is provided with, for example, a launch handle as one of the operation means for the player, an upper tray in which game balls to be used in the game can be stored, and a lower tray in which paid-out game balls can be stored. Many pachinko machines are also provided with the above-mentioned performance buttons and movable performance devices. In addition, the game area is provided with, for example, a starting area (sometimes called a "starting hole") or a specific area (sometimes called a "V winning hole") through which the game ball can pass, a variable winning device (sometimes called a "big winning hole") that can shift between a state in which it is easy for the game ball to win and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win, and a variable display device that can variably display identification information (sometimes called a "design" or the like, including "special designs" and "normal designs").

In a pachinko machine, a player operates a launch handle to launch a game ball into a game area to play. For example, when a launched game ball passes through a starting area, a variable display is started. At this time, whether or not to transition the game state (for example, whether or not to transition to a big win game state or a small win game state that is advantageous to the player) is determined based on a probability according to the current state (for example, whether or not the game state is in a certain probability game state with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area (that is, whether or not to transition the game state is determined by lottery (or judgment)). After that, when a stop condition for the variable display (for example, the set variable time has ended) is established, the variable display stops in a stop mode according to the above-mentioned determination result. At this time, if the above-mentioned determination result is one that transitions the game state (a win), the stop mode that is stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the win, and the game state corresponding to the win is transitioned in response to the display result being displayed. On the other hand, if the above decision result is one that does not change the game state (miss), the display result for the stop mode also corresponds to a miss, and the game state does not change. For example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (specific areas are usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), it is decided to change the game state regardless of the variable display device.

In other words, in a pachislot machine 1, the game begins when the player bets the necessary medals and performs a start operation, whereas in a pachinko machine, the player fires the necessary game balls by operating a launch handle, and the game begins when the game ball passes through a starting area, for example. However, both machines are similar in that the game begins due to the player's gaming action. Pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machines are also similar in that the stop mode that is ultimately permitted to be displayed (in other words, the content of the bonus to be awarded) is determined when the start trigger is met.

Furthermore, the Pachislot machine 1 basically stops the variable display by the player's stop operation, whereas the Pachinko machine stops the variable display when the stop condition is met (without the player's stop operation), which is different, but they are similar in that they both stop the variable display according to a pre-determined result and award a bonus according to the stopped state. The Pachislot machine 1 and the Pachinko machine are also similar in that they are capable of executing effects related to the game. For example, the effect display device functions as the above-mentioned effect display section or information display section. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the Pachinko machine may also be provided with effect execution means such as the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other effect devices, and effects may be executed by these.

In many pachinko machines, the decorative symbols (which are sometimes also referred to as "identification information") are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device. As mentioned above, the actual game results are displayed on the variable display device, but since the variable display device is small and the display results are shown as lighting patterns of multiple LEDs, it is often difficult for the player to recognize the game results. For this reason, the mainstream pachinko machines are designed to play by varying (and stopping) decorative symbols on the performance display device in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device. And, the variable display of such decorative symbols (for presentation purposes, the variable display may start after a certain delay when the start trigger is established, or may temporarily stop before the stop condition is established) is basically the same as the variable table device described above, and displays the identification information variably or statically as the game progresses (for example, in the case of a win, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a special stop mode (for example, matching symbols), while in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a non-special stop mode (for example, scattered symbols)). Therefore, it is possible to apply the invention according to this embodiment to this as one aspect of the variable display unit described above.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 can be applied to the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of a pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced by game balls, etc.).

In pachinko machines, various controls related to the game are performed by a main control circuit acting as a game control unit implemented on a main control board (including some payout-related controls that may be performed by a payout control circuit implemented on a payout control board electrically connected to the main control board), and various controls related to the presentation are performed by a sub-control circuit acting as a presentation control unit implemented on a sub-control board. Therefore, the various items described as the electrical configuration of pachinko machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of pachinko machines, except for those that have characteristics unique to pachinko machine 1 (for example, those related to the stop operation, etc.).

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 can provide game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration), such as a bonus state, an RT state, an AT state, and an ART state that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, the lottery mode for the small role is made more advantageous than the non-bonus state, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time; in the RT state, the lottery mode for the replay role is made more advantageous than the non-RT state, making it possible to continue a state in which losses are less likely to occur (and, as a result, medals are less likely to decrease) for a certain period of time; and in the AT state, a favorable stop operation mode is notified, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time.

In contrast, pachinko machines can also provide various game states with similar characteristics. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to transition to a state in which game balls are more likely to win, and thus making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes called an "electric support state"), normal symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to create a state in which game balls are more likely to pass through the starting area, thereby increasing the frequency of lottery draws by the variable display device and making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are less likely to decrease for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a probability-variation game state, special symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to continue a state in which the variable display device has a higher probability of winning (as a result, game balls are more likely to increase) for a certain period of time.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various matters described as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state of a Pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the Pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that involve transitions between play zones, etc.). The same applies to the various other matters described as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in pachinko machines, it is possible to switch to the time-saving game state when the number of plays in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) reaches a specified number. In other words, pachinko machines can also be equipped with a ceiling function (a function that can switch to a favorable state (e.g., time-saving game state) as a relief from being stuck if an unfavorable state (e.g., normal game state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without switching to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot game state)). Therefore, the various matters described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko machines.

In addition, in a pachinko machine, when the stop state of the variable display device during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) corresponds to a specific miss, this can trigger a transition to a time-saving game state. In other words, a transition (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot game state, etc.) is possible in a pachinko machine as well, due to the display of a specific display result (specific combination of symbols). Therefore, for example, the various matters described as configurations related to a transition (transition) to an RT state due to the display of a specific combination of symbols in a pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as configurations related to a transition (transition) to a time-saving game state due to the display of a specific display result in a pachinko machine.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, play begins with the player performing a betting operation (i.e., inserting held medals into the medal insertion slot 5 to place a bet, or operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet credited medals) as one of the starting conditions, and if medals are to be paid out when the game ends, the hopper device 32 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout outlet 11, or the medals are credited, as described above, but the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all forms in which a player bets the gaming value required for a game, plays the game based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded (e.g., gaming value is awarded) based on the results of the game. In other words, the invention can be applied not only to forms in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and medals are paid out by the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachislot machine 1 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner in which the player cannot directly touch the gaming value), allowing for medal-free play. Here, such a pachislot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine." Note that medal-less gaming machines are sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

The game value held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself, or by a game value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal count control board") that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). An example of the installation of this game value management device is described below.

The game value management device is a device provided in the slot machine 1, and includes at least a ROM and a RWM (or a RAM), and is connected to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be described as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be described as a "connection terminal board"). The game value management device performs necessary communication with the external game value providing device, thereby performing a game value lending operation (i.e., an operation of providing game value required for a player to perform a betting operation of game value), a game value granting operation (i.e., an operation of providing the game value related to granting to the player when a winning combination related to the granting of game value is won (the combination is established), etc.), and an operation of electromagnetically recording the game value provided by these operations, etc. The gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "gaming value (gaming medium) handling device," a "gaming value (gaming medium) lending device," or a "sand." The external gaming value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server), and the gaming value management device is configured to be able to transmit ball output management information to the external ball output management device via a communication device and the external gaming value providing device. Here, the ball output management information is composed of various information necessary to enable the external ball output management device to manage balls. An example of ball output management information will be described later. The external gaming value providing device and the external ball output management device are connected, for example, by an Internet line.

Here, "balls paid out" directly means the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, the concept also includes the degree of benefit given to the player, such as the difference (net increase) between the number of paid out and the number of bets (for example, how much the player made a profit (how much the gaming establishment made a loss) or how much the player made a loss (how much the gaming establishment made a profit), the continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous periods, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination of these, etc.

For example, a retained game value number display device (not shown) that displays the number of retained game values may be provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this retained game value number display device based on the management results of the number of game values. In other words, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that a player can use for playing by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is preferable that the game value management device has the ability to allow a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game values to an external game value providing device, and also has the ability to prevent the number of recorded game values from being reduced except when the player directly operates it, and also has the ability to transmit the signal indicating the number of recorded game values only via a communication device.

The gaming value management device may have not only a function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of the player using an external gaming value providing device, but also a function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the physical action of the player and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical action of the pachinko slot machine 1. In other words, it may be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachinko slot machine 1. In this way, the pachinko slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method, or by a method such as the medal-less gaming machine described above, so that the pachinko slot machine 1 can have a common configuration regardless of the specification. In this case, the gaming value management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and hopper device 32 described above, or a method of indirectly controlling them by controlling them by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachislot machine 1 may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operation means and a return (settlement) operation means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value providing device may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operation means and a return operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to various devices such as an insertion slot for valuables such as paper money, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal (all not shown). Note that insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued on the day at a gaming establishment, but also member recording media held by members of the gaming establishment. The gaming value recorded on a non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (it becomes invalid from the next day onwards), but the gaming value recorded on a member recording medium is valid from the next day onwards.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be described below. For example, first, the player deposits a valuable amount into the game value providing device by any method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined amount of valuable amount in response to the player's operation on any of the lending operation means, and provides the game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable amount to the pachislot machine 1. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game value is required. Thereafter, when the player has acquired a predetermined amount of game value as a result of the game and wishes to end the game, the player operates any of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's operation on any of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects a recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. The game value management device clears the number of game values stored in itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange office or the like to exchange it for a prize, or can move to another pachislot machine 1 and continue playing by inserting the ejected recording medium into a game value providing device corresponding to the other pachislot machine 1. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member recording medium, it will remain valid from the next day onwards, so the player can stop playing here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation, but it may be configured to transmit only the number of game values desired by the player depending on the manner of the player's return operation. In other words, it may be possible to divide the game value held by the player. Also, the game value providing device records the transmitted number of game values on a recording medium and discharges it, but it may transmit information of a similar value to the player's mobile terminal using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna, etc., and may also discharge, for example, cash or a cash equivalent, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be provided with a lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device may be controlled to a state (locked state) in which communication between them is disabled in response to an operation on this lock operation means. In this case, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be configured to perform authentication processes such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the locked state may be released if the result of the authentication process is normal.

The medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, does not require some external structures such as the medal insertion port 5 and medal payout port 11, or some internal structures such as the selector 31 and hopper device 32, so not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but the power consumption of the gaming machine can also be reduced. Also, since it is more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of medal-less gaming machine)
Next, a configuration example of the pachislot machine 1 configured as a medal-less gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medal-less gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal count control board is connected to the main control board 71, and manages the number of medals (game value number) owned by the player. The medal count control board is also connected to a communication-only unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). The medal count control board also transmits ball output management information to the ball output management device via the connection terminal board and the communication-only unit. The medal count control board is also equipped with a medal count control circuit (not shown). The medal count control circuit is also composed of, for example, a medal count control CPU (not shown), a medal count control ROM (not shown), and a medal count control RWM (not shown).

The ball output management device is, for example, a server for managing ball output managed by an association (information center) to which the gaming machine manufacturer belongs, and the transmitted ball output management information is stored in the ball output management device, which is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling characteristics of each gaming machine are appropriate (ball output performance).

From this perspective, the medal count control board and the connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, perform important functions in the slot machine 1, and therefore must be provided inside the slot machine 1 in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 show examples of such a manner.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in Fig. 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similar to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing processes to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize traces of opening (or the number of times it has been opened) (for example, sealing by crimping, affixing a sealing sticker, or affixing a crimping sticker that records that the crimp has been cut, etc.).

Therefore, by housing the medal count control board and the connection terminal board inside the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal count control board case provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the above-mentioned configuration example 1. Note that the medal count control board case is configured as a resin case that is transparent (or nearly transparent) like the main control board case, and the medal count control board and the connection terminal board housed therein are housed in a state where they can be easily seen.

Here, the medal count control board case of configuration example 2 can be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or can be configured to undergo at least a portion of the sealing process. For example, the medal count control board case can be configured to be sealed by crimping like the main control board case, but without a sealing sticker. Also, for example, the main control board case may be required to use a predetermined crimp sticker, but the medal count control board case may be configured to allow the use of any sticker as the crimp sticker.

<Example of accumulated data>
The example of stored data shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball management device. That is, it shows an example of ball management information that the medal count control board transmits to the ball management device via the connection terminal board and the communication unit. Note that this is only an example, and it is possible to configure the device so that some of the various information shown in FIG. 34 is not transmitted, or to transmit information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34.

The timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may also be arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device may also be arbitrary. As long as the ball payout management device is capable of monitoring the ball payout performance of each gaming machine at least for each unit (e.g., each business day of an amusement facility), the information may be transmitted at any timing. For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may differ depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of coins inserted" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operation, excluding those bets made by the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of paid out coins" is the cumulative number of paid out coins per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values granted by the payout process of the gaming machine, excluding those granted by the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference in number of coins that occurred during one unit after each gaming machine was powered on (in other words, the difference in number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most during one unit. This is referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal count control board calculates such a maximum difference in number of coins and transmits the calculated information to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes for business), and the communication-only unit transmits the information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of coins paid out from game devices" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit since the power of each gaming machine was turned on, and is also the cumulative number of coins paid out while the various game devices are in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded by the payout process of the gaming machine while the various game devices are in operation to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the various game devices are in operation), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the closing time of the gaming establishment).

The accumulated data "total number of consecutive feature payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on, and is also the cumulative number of payouts paid out while the consecutive feature (RB, including RB when BB is in operation) is in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game value awarded by the payout process of the gaming machine while the consecutive feature is in operation to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the consecutive feature is in operation), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the gaming establishment).

The medal count control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communication-only unit transmits the information to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). The accumulated data "role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information, the accumulated data "continuous role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous role ratio information, the accumulated data "advantageous zone ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information, the accumulated data "instruction-included role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the AT state, and the accumulated data "role, etc. state ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the operation of various roles.

The accumulated data "number of plays" is the cumulative number of plays per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of plays played to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also called "CPU ID", hereafter referred to as the "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball management device, it transmits information including the transmitted individual identification number.

The stored data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball output management device, it transmits information including the transmitted manufacturer code.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball output management device, it transmits information including the transmitted product code.

The stored data "medal count control chip ID number" is the individual identification number of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball management device, it sends information including the individual identification number that was sent. Note that if there is no medal count control board and the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit, the information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball management device, it sends information including the manufacturer code that was sent. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is sent to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, the information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the transmitted product code. Note that if there is no medal count control board and the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit, the information will be "0".

In this way, the ball dispensing management device is capable of storing various information (ball dispensing management information) transmitted from gaming machines. The ball dispensing management information also includes multiple individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal count control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball dispensing management device can identify the gaming machine that sent the information by these individual identification information, and if, for example, the correspondence between the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal count control chip ID number" changes from a certain point in time, it can recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (i.e., the possibility that fraud or unauthorized modification has occurred).

The ball output management information also includes multiple pieces of ball output information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of coins inserted" to "number of games played") that can identify the ball output performance per unit. Therefore, the ball output management device can use these pieces of ball output information to determine whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine that sent the information is within an appropriate range. For example, if the "total number of coins paid out" or the "ratio of instructed features" becomes significantly high from a certain point in time, it can determine the possibility that fraudulent activity or tampering has occurred, or that there was some kind of flaw in the original specification design.

If the ball output management device recognizes the above-mentioned possibility, it is expected that the result will be notified to the gaming facility or gaming machine manufacturer, etc., and appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, by constructing a management system that includes multiple managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication-only unit) that transmits ball output management information transmitted from the managed gaming machines to the ball output management device, and a ball output management device that manages the ball output performance of each managed gaming machine based on the transmitted ball output management information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to manage the number of game values owned by a player. Therefore, in order to allow the manager of the gaming facility to grasp such management status or other information, a medal count monitor device (not shown) may be provided on the medal count control board.

The medal count monitor device is, for example, configured with a four-digit seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal count control board case. The medal count monitor device sequentially displays various information (for example, part or all of the above-mentioned ball payout management information) related to the game value number tallied and calculated by the medal count control CPU (or it may be the main CPU 101). Note that if the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54 are all displayed by the medal count monitor device, the role ratio monitor device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may be configured to be used in combination with the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or on another board (e.g., a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the medal count control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the medal count monitor device or for switching its contents may be provided within the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be configured to be used in combination with the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may display the type of error state that has occurred when any of the various error states related to the device occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, if a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, if a communication error occurs with the gaming value providing device, or if an abnormality occurs in the medal count control RWM, a numerical value corresponding to the error may be displayed. In this case, an explanation section (such as a sticker or printing) indicating the correspondence may be provided on or near the medal count control board case so that the manager of the gaming facility can easily recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to transmit ball management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided as a means for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. This not only reduces the number of parts, but also reduces the amount of wiring to the outside, thereby improving security.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged in close proximity at least inside the cabinet G. This can improve the efficiency of the connection process. Also, the length of the wiring can be kept constant, and the wiring locations can be limited, improving security.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit ball-discharge management information to the ball-discharge management device. The ball-discharge management device can appropriately manage the ball-discharge performance of each medalless gaming machine by the transmitted ball-discharge management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball-discharge performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the function of forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition may not be provided.

In addition, the medal count control board may be provided with a function for appropriately managing the ball output performance, and on the assumption that the ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous zone based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above or a different RWM). The ball output monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but is not initialized when the favorable zone ends, so as to monitor the ball output. When the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the favorable zone itself is not forcibly ended, but the control may be performed to reduce the ball output performance by lowering the probability of navigation occurrence, lowering the probability that the AT state is extended, or ending the AT state itself. In this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball output performance. In this case, such control results may be transmitted to the ball output management device as ball output management information. In other words, the ball output performance of each medal-less gaming machine may be managed in both the medal count control board and the ball output management device.

(Example of the main control board configuration of a pachinko slot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. In the following, a configuration example of the reuse of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71 in the pachislot machine 1, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. The manufacturer's name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that produces the pachislot machine 1, and the control number is a number that identifies the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer name and the board management number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 as in the past. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, a slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are printed. After that, if model A is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model B"), AA Co., Ltd. must erase the manufacturer name and board management number printed in the lower row by laser engraving and newly print the manufacturing number and board management number related to its own company in a different space (for example, the manufacturer name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board management number "AA-00-11-22" in the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35).

Then, if model B is subsequently removed from the gaming establishment, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. were to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"), BB Co., Ltd. would have to remove the manufacturer's name and board control number printed on the top line by laser engraving, and print a new manufacturing number and board control number related to their company in a different space. However, since there is no more free space in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, there is a problem in that, even though the hardware is still fully reusable, the main control board 71 may not be able to be reused due to the constraints mentioned above.

This is also true in cases where multiple manufacturer names and board control numbers have been printed on the machine from the beginning. For example, even if the serial numbers and board control numbers for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed on the machine in advance, the serial numbers and board control numbers for AA Co., Ltd. are erased by laser engraving when Model A is manufactured. Therefore, while BB Co., Ltd. may be able to reuse the machine, AA Co., Ltd. will not be able to reuse it. In contrast, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 are expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. In other words, the reusability of boards used to control games, such as the main control board 71, can be increased.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35 shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of the code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) or other code can be used. In other words, the code may be any code as long as it includes information that allows a checker to uniquely identify the manufacturer's name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal, etc.).

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, when model A is assumed to have been manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can erase the third code from the right by laser engraving and print the fourth code from the right, so that the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of AA Co., Ltd., and thus it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

In other words, in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number, it is possible to save the printing space for each manufacturer's name and board control number on the surface of the main control board 71, making it possible to increase the reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Configuration Example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 shows that a code including a manufacturer name and a board management number is printed, similarly to configuration example 2 described above. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, multiple codes (for example, four) are printed from the beginning. For example, two codes are printed for each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. In addition, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the parts corresponding to each code are crimped with, for example, a strip-shaped member, etc., so that the codes can be fixed in an unreadable state. In addition, for example, by cutting the strip-shaped member, etc., the fixation can be released to make the codes readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, when model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is made readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right is made readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right is made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can make only the fourth code from the right readable and the first through third codes from the right unreadable, thereby making it possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even new pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, further reuse is possible, and it is also possible for the machine to be reused by a greater number of gaming machine manufacturers. Note that configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 can also be configured so that only crimping holes are provided, and the code is printed in the location corresponding to the crimping hole each time the machine is reused.

[10. Door monitoring related]
Next, referring to Figures 36 to 82, a specific example of the specifications of the Pachislot machine 1 regarding the sub-control circuit and the door monitoring by the 24-hour door monitoring unit will be described. Below, a description will be given of configurations (e.g., configurations that are added or changed) that are different from the first gaming machine described above.

(Sub-control circuit)
First, an example of the sub-control circuit will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit. Note that the internal configuration shown in Fig. 36 is merely an example of the detailed internal configuration of the sub-control circuit in the first gaming machine described above, and is not limited thereto.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to a ROM cartridge board 202 and a display relay board 205. The ROM cartridge board 202 and the display relay board 205 are housed in the sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 72, but this is not limiting and they may be housed in a case separate from the sub-control board case.

The ROM cartridge board 202 is a board for managing the images (video), audio, LED board (not shown), and communication data for the performance. The display relay board 205 is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 to the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 (collectively referred to below as the display devices).

The sub-control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 100, and performs processes such as deciding and executing the performance content based on commands sent from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 basically includes a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, a rendering processor 204, a drawing RAM 206, a driver 207, and a sub-RTC 208. In this embodiment, the sub-RTC 208 constitutes the timekeeping means.

The sub-CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light in response to commands sent from the main control circuit 100 and in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 202. The ROM cartridge board 202 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The program memory area stores control programs executed by the sub-CPU 201. For example, the control programs include programs for executing sub-side control processing, including the power-on processing shown in FIG. 33, and power-off processing that is performed when the power is turned off. The control programs also include a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 100, and a performance registration task for extracting random numbers for performance and determining and registering performance content (performance data). In addition, the control programs also include a drawing control task for controlling the display of images by the display device based on the determined performance content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output from light sources such as LED groups, and an audio control task for controlling the sound output from speakers such as speaker groups.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing performance data that constitutes each performance content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to the creation of images. It also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to background music and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to light on/off patterns, etc.

The sub-RAM 203 is composed of a sub-DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 203a and a sub-SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 203b. The sub-DRAM 203a has a storage area for registering the determined performance contents and performance data, and a storage area for storing various data such as internal lottery winnings transmitted from the main control circuit 100. The sub-SRAM 203b stores various information such as information received from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 and date and time information obtained from the sub-RTC 208 when the power is cut off. The sub-DRAM 203a is a RAM used for various tasks, and the sub-SRAM 203b is a RAM used to back up data by connecting to a battery. The sub-SRAM 203b may also be referred to as a backup memory below. The backup memory is not limited to SRAM, but may be non-volatile memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), which is a device that does not require a battery connection, or EEPROM (Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory).

The sub-CPU 201, rendering processor 204, drawing RAM (including frame buffer) 206, and driver 207 create images according to animation data specified by the performance content, and display the created images on the display device.

The sub-CPU 201 also outputs sounds such as background music from speakers such as a speaker group according to sound data specified by the performance content. The sub-CPU 201 also controls the turning on and off of light sources such as a LED group according to lamp data specified by the performance content.

The sub-RTC (Real Time Clock) 208 is a clock circuit that constantly keeps track of the date and time using an installed battery, regardless of whether the power to the pachislot machine 1 is turned on or not, and outputs information indicating the current date and time, i.e., the year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and day of the week, in response to a request from the sub-CPU 201.

(Configuration of 24-hour door monitoring unit)
Next, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61.

As shown in FIG. 37, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 has a control LSI 300, an RTC (Real Time Clock) 301, a battery 302, a ROM 303, a RAM 304, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) 305. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is also electrically connected to a sub-control board 72, a door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 for the unit, and a power supply 34.

The control LSI 300 controls the operation of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The control LSI 300 has a control controller circuit 306, a serial communication circuit 307, a random number generating circuit 308, and an I/O port circuit 309.

The control controller circuit 306 executes various processes described later according to the programs stored in the ROM 303. The random number generating circuit 308 is composed of a free-running counter (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "FRC"), and generates random numbers by performing a prescribed calculation using a count value acquired from the FRC. The I/O port circuit 309 is connected to a unit door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310. The unit door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. The unit door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 monitors (detects) the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state. The I/O port circuit 309 receives a signal indicating the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD from the unit door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310. The unit door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or on the cabinet G side. Also, for example, in cases where the cabinet G does not include an intermediate support plate G1, a door opening/closing monitoring sensor for a similar unit may be provided for the upper door mechanism UD, and a signal indicating the opening/closing of the upper door mechanism UD may also be received by the I/O port circuit 309, so that the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 may be configured to monitor the opening/closing of not only the lower door mechanism DD but also the upper door mechanism UD.

The serial communication circuit 307 is used to send and receive commands and data to and from the host device connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. Every time the serial communication circuit 307 receives one byte of command or data from the host device, the control LSI 300 executes the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 54) described below.

In addition, FIG. 37 shows an example in which the sub-control board 72 as the host device is connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. However, the host device connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit is not limited to this. For example, when various settings of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 are made during the manufacture or maintenance of the pachislot machine 1, a setting machine (not shown) is connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 as the host device. This setting machine is equipped with a non-volatile storage device (such as a hard disk) and a volatile storage device (such as a RAM).

The battery 302 is composed of, for example, a lithium ion secondary battery. The battery 302 functions as a power source for the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the power source of the slot machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is capable of performing various processes described below even when the power source of the slot machine 1 is turned off. The battery 302 stores the power supplied from the power supply device 34 when the power source of the slot machine 1 is ON (when the power is turned on). The power source for the slot machine 1 while it is turned off is not limited to a lithium ion secondary battery, but may be other types of secondary batteries such as a lithium ion polymer secondary battery, and may be a primary battery (for example, a lithium battery, an alkaline manganese dry battery) instead of a rechargeable secondary battery.

RTC301 is a clock circuit that outputs information indicating the current date and time (date, time, etc.) in response to a request from control LSI300, i.e., information indicating the year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and day of the week. RTC301 constitutes the monitoring side clock means.

EEPROM 305 is a non-volatile memory that stores information indicating the opening and closing history of the lower door mechanism DD (hereinafter referred to as "opening and closing history information"). The information stored in EEPROM 305 and the storage location of the information in EEPROM 305 will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

RAM 304 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic Random Access memory) and is used as a working area for control LSI 300 and a buffer area for communication between control LSI 300 and the host device. The information stored in RAM 304 and the storage location of information in RAM 304 will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

(EEPROM memory map)
Next, the information stored in EEPROM 305 and the storage locations of information in EEPROM 305 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a memory map of EEPROM 305, and is a diagram conceptually showing the storage locations of information in EEPROM 305. In Fig. 38, the storage area of EEPROM 305 is shown divided into 1-byte units. Therefore, 1 square in Fig. 38 represents 1-byte storage area.

As shown in FIG. 38, the first 16 consecutive bytes form a serial ID storage area. The serial ID of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is stored in the serial ID storage area. The serial ID consists of 16 alphanumeric characters (for example, "0123456789ABCDEF"). In other words, each byte stores a hexadecimal value for one character.

The next 16 consecutive bytes form a private key storage area. The private key storage area stores a private key. The private key consists of 16 alphanumeric characters (for example, "SECRETKEY0000000"). That is, each byte stores a hexadecimal value for one character (for example, 53H in ASCII code for the character "S" and 30H in ASCII code for the character "0"). The private key is used when generating a password in the random number command reception process (see FIG. 58) executed by the control LSI 300, which will be described later. That is, in this embodiment, the EEPROM 305 constitutes a monitoring side reference data storage means having a private key storage area in which the private key is stored.

The next 5 consecutive bytes are reserved and no information is stored therein.

The next 1-byte area forms the recording mode storage area. In the recording mode storage area, information indicating the type of recording mode is stored. There are two types of recording modes: a "constant recording mode" in which the EEPROM 305 constantly records the opening and closing history information of the lower door mechanism DD (described below), and a "non-recording mode" in which no recording is performed.

The next 1-byte area forms a history counter storage area. The history counter storage area stores the value of the history counter. The history counter value indicates the number of opening and closing history information items (described below) stored in the EEPROM 305. In this embodiment, a maximum of 128 pieces of opening and closing history information can be stored, so 0 to 128 are stored as the history counter value. Note that the number of opening and closing history information items that can be stored increases or decreases as appropriate depending on the type and storage capacity of the non-volatile memory installed in the 24-h door monitoring unit 61.

The next 1-byte area forms the latest number storage area. The latest number storage area stores the latest number, which is the number of the opening/closing history storage area (described below) in which the latest opening/closing history information is stored.

The next 1024 consecutive bytes of area store opening/closing history information. The opening/closing history information is information that indicates the date and time when the lower door mechanism DD was closed or opened. The opening/closing history information also consists of 8 consecutive bytes of information. Therefore, 128 pieces of opening/closing history information can be stored in this 1024 consecutive bytes of area.

The opening and closing history information consists of one byte of monitored object information indicating the monitored object (in this embodiment, the lower door mechanism DD), one byte of status information indicating whether it is open (OPEN) or closed (CLOSE), and six consecutive bytes of time information, each byte indicating the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. Each byte of the time information indicates the last two digits of the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second as a hexadecimal value.

This continuous area of 1024 bytes is divided into areas each of which stores one piece of opening/closing history information, that is, into 8-byte areas. Each of these divided areas forms an opening/closing history information storage area, and is numbered 1 to 128. Note that the opening/closing history information stored after the opening/closing history information is stored in the opening/closing history information storage area numbered "128" is overwritten and stored in the opening/closing history information storage area numbered "1". Thereafter, the opening/closing history information is similarly overwritten and stored in the opening/closing history information storage areas numbered "2" and onward. In other words, in this embodiment, the EEPROM 305 having an opening/closing history information storage area for storing the opening/closing history information constitutes the opening/closing history information storage means.

The next 4 consecutive bytes form a monitoring interval storage area. The monitoring interval storage area stores a count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time. The monitoring interval time is the interval at which the open/close history information is stored in the EEPROM 305. In this embodiment, the monitoring interval time can be set in minute increments from 1 minute to 100 minutes. As described below, the control LSI 300 adds the monitoring interval count every 20 msec (milliseconds), and stores the open/close history information in the EEPROM 305 after the monitoring interval count reaches the count number corresponding to the set monitoring interval time. Therefore, the monitoring interval storage area stores 3000 (the count number corresponding to a monitoring interval time of 1 minute) to 300000 (the count number corresponding to a monitoring interval time of 100 minutes) as the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time. The hexadecimal value of the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time is stored in this monitoring interval storage area.

The next 4 consecutive bytes form the recording start time storage area. The recording start time storage area stores a count number corresponding to the recording start time. The recording start time is the time from when the recording start time setting process described later (see SA88 of the process when receiving a privileged command shown in FIG. 56) is performed to when the opening and closing history information starts to be stored. In this embodiment, the recording start time can be set in minute increments from 1 minute to 100 minutes. As described later, the control LSI 300 adds the recording start time count every 20 msec (milliseconds), and stores the opening and closing history information in the EEPROM 305 after the recording start time count reaches the count number corresponding to the set recording start time. Therefore, the recording start time storage area stores a value of 3000 (the count number corresponding to the recording start time of 1 minute) to 300000 (the count number corresponding to the recording start time of 100 minutes) as the count number corresponding to the recording start time. The recording start time storage area stores the hexadecimal value of the count number corresponding to the recording start time.

Although not shown in the figure, the EEPROM 305 has a storage area for storing various information in addition to the above. For example, the EEPROM 305 has a program version storage area for storing the program version. The program version is the version of the program executed by the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61.

(RAM memory map)
Next, the information stored in RAM 304 and the storage locations of information in RAM 304 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a memory map of RAM 304, and is a diagram conceptually showing the storage locations of information in RAM 304. In Fig. 39, the storage area of RAM 304 is divided into 1-byte units. Therefore, 1 square in Fig. 39 represents 1-byte storage area.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first byte of the field forms the output port information storage area. The output port information storage area stores information to be sent via the output port of the I/O port circuit 309.

The next 1-byte area forms the input port information storage area. In the port input process (see FIG. 49) described later, the input port information storage area stores status information indicating whether the lower door mechanism DD is in the open or closed state based on the signal received from the door open/close monitoring sensor 310 via the input port of the I/O port circuit 309.

The next 1-byte area forms a status change flag storage area. A status change flag is stored in the status change flag storage area. The status change flag is a flag indicating whether or not opening/closing history information is being stored in the EEPROM 305. The status change flag is set to ON when the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD indicated by the information stored in the input port information storage area does not match the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD indicated by the latest opening/closing history information stored in the EEPROM 305, and opening/closing history information based on the information stored in the input port information storage area is stored in the EEPROM 305 (see SA46 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in Figure 51 described later). In addition, the status change flag is set to OFF after the opening/closing history information is stored in the EEPROM 305 (see SA34 of the door monitoring process shown in Figure 50 described later).

The next 1-byte area forms a reception completion flag storage area. A reception completion flag is stored in the reception completion flag storage area. The reception completion flag is a flag that indicates whether or not reception of the command and associated information transmitted from the host device has been completed. The reception completion flag is set ON (set to "1") when reception is completed, and is set OFF (cleared) when transmission processing is performed in response to the received command (see transmission processing in Figure 60 described below).

The next 1-byte area forms the thumb counter storage area. The thumb counter storage area stores a thumb counter. The thumb counter indicates the number of sum values transmitted from the host device. In this embodiment, the command and associated information transmitted from the host device contain a two-digit thumb value. The thumb value is transmitted from the host device as one byte of information per digit, and the control LSI 300 adds 1 to the thumb counter each time it receives a thumb value for each digit (see SA68 of the reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 described below).

The next 1-byte area forms the ETX reception flag storage area. The ETX reception flag is stored in the ETX reception flag storage area. The ETX reception flag is a flag that indicates whether or not an ETX command has been received from the host device. If an ETX command has been received, the ETX reception flag is set to ON (set to "1").

The next 1-byte area forms a login flag storage area. A login flag is stored in the login flag storage area. The login flag is a flag that indicates whether the password received from the host device matches the password stored in the password storage area of RAM 304, which will be described later. If the passwords match, the login flag is set to ON, i.e., "1" is set (see the processing upon receipt of a login command shown in FIG. 59, which will be described later).

The next 1-byte area forms a recording permission flag storage area. A recording permission flag is stored in the recording permission flag storage area. The storage permission flag is a flag that indicates whether or not opening and closing history information can be stored in EEPROM 305. The storage permission flag is set to ON when the recording mode is set to the continuous recording mode and the value of the recording start time counter is equal to or greater than the count number corresponding to the recording start time, i.e., when opening and closing history information can be recorded in EEPROM 305.

The next 8 consecutive bytes form the first detection result storage area. Opening/closing history information is stored in the first detection result storage area. The manner in which the opening/closing history information is stored in the first detection result storage area will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. In this embodiment, the control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which has a first detection result storage area arranged in the RAM 304 and performs the door monitoring status detection process described later (see FIG. 51 described later), constitutes the opening/closing status acquisition means.

The next 8 consecutive bytes form the second detection result storage area. Opening and closing history information is stored in the second detection result storage area. The manner in which the opening and closing history information is stored in the second detection result storage area will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

The next 16 consecutive bytes form a password storage area. A password is stored in the password storage area. The password is information required when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to perform processing related to a privileged command, which will be described later. The password is also made up of 16 alphanumeric characters. That is, each byte stores the hexadecimal value of one character. The manner in which the password is stored in the password storage area will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. That is, in this embodiment, the RAM 304, which includes a password storage area in which the password is stored, constitutes a monitoring side authentication information storage means.

The next 24 consecutive bytes (SA1 to SA24) temporarily store information related to transmission when the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 transmits information to the host device. In other words, these 24 consecutive bytes form a transmission buffer that functions as a buffer when transmitting commands, etc.

The next 24 consecutive bytes (R1 to R24) temporarily store commands and associated information that the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives from the host device. In other words, these 24 consecutive bytes form a receive buffer that functions as a buffer when receiving commands, etc.

The next 4 consecutive bytes form the recording start time counter storage area. The recording start time counter area stores the value of the recording start time counter that is incremented in SA8 of the door monitoring unit main processing, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

The next 4 consecutive bytes form the monitoring interval counter storage area. The monitoring interval counter storage area stores the value of the monitoring interval counter that is incremented in SA24 of the door monitoring process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

The next 8 consecutive bytes form the random number storage area. This random number storage area stores an 8-digit (hexadecimal) random number value generated by SA121 in the random number command reception process described later with reference to FIG. 58. In other words, each byte stores a one-digit value.

Although not shown in the figure, RAM 304 has a storage area for storing various information in addition to the above. For example, RAM 304 has a reception counter storage area. The value of the reception counter storage area indicates the area of the reception buffer (corresponding to R1 to R24) in which received data is stored.

(command)
Next, commands used in communication between the 24h door monitoring unit 61 and the host device will be described. In this embodiment, the types of commands used in communication between the 24h door monitoring unit 61 and the host device include "privileged commands" and "general commands." Privileged commands are used when the host device requests various settings from the 24h door monitoring unit. General commands are used when the host device requests the 24h door monitoring unit to transmit information. In the answers of "privileged commands" and "general commands" to be described later that the 24h door monitoring unit 61 transmits to the host device, the ID of each command is used as the ID for the answer, that is, a one-to-one relationship is established between the command and the answer by the ID.

(Privileged command)
First, the privileged commands will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a diagram for explaining the privileged commands used in the communication between the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 and the host device.

As shown in Figure 40, the privileged commands include an initialization command, a clock set command, a monitoring interval time setting command, a recording start time setting command, a mode recording setting command, and a private key setting command.

(1) Initialization Command The initialization command is a command that is transmitted from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests initialization of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The ID of the initialization command is "SI".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the initialization command, it sends an initialization answer to the host device indicating that it has received the command. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also initializes the monitoring interval time setting and the recording start time setting. Specifically, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 clears the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time and the count number corresponding to the recording start time stored in the EEPROM 305. It also clears the monitoring interval counter value and the recording start time counter value stored in the RAM 304.

(2) Clock Set Command The clock set command is a command sent from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to set the year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week. The ID of the clock set command is "ST." The clock set command is accompanied by information indicating the year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week obtained from the RTC provided in the host device.

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the clock set command, it sends a date and time setting answer to the host device indicating that it has received the command. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also sets the year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of the week of the RTC 301 based on the information indicating the year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of the week that accompanies the clock set command (see SA84 in Figure 56 described below). In this way, the control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 constitutes the monitoring side clock setting means.

(3) Monitoring Interval Time Setting Command The monitoring interval time setting command is a command sent from the host device to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 to set a monitoring interval time. The ID of the monitoring interval time setting command is "SA." The monitoring interval time setting command is accompanied by information (count number) indicating the monitoring interval time.

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the monitoring interval setting command, it sends a monitoring interval setting answer to the host device indicating that it has received the command. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also sets the monitoring interval based on the information (count number) indicating the monitoring interval that accompanies the monitoring interval setting command. Specifically, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 stores the received count number in the monitoring interval storage area in the EEPROM 305. Note that if a count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time has already been stored in that area, the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time to be stored this time is overwritten.

(4) Recording Start Time Setting Command The recording start time setting command is a command sent from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to set a recording start time. The ID of the recording start time setting command is "SB." The recording start time setting command is accompanied by information (count number) indicating the recording start time.

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the recording start time setting command, it sends a recording start time setting answer to the host device indicating that it has received the command. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also sets the recording start time based on the information (count number) indicating the recording start time that accompanies the recording start time setting command. Specifically, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 stores the received count number in the recording start time storage area in the EEPROM 305. Note that if a count number corresponding to the recording start time has already been stored in that area, the count number corresponding to the recording start time to be stored this time is overwritten.

(5) Recording mode setting command The recording mode setting command is a command sent from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to set a recording mode ("constant recording mode" or "non-recording mode"). The ID of the recording mode setting command is "SC". The recording mode setting command is accompanied by information indicating the recording mode.

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the recording mode setting command, it sends a recording mode setting answer to the host device indicating that it has received the command. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also sets the recording mode based on the information indicating the recording mode that accompanies the recording mode setting command. Specifically, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 stores information indicating either a "constant recording mode" in which opening/closing history information is constantly recorded, or a "non-recording mode" in which no recording is performed, in the recording mode storage area of the EEPROM 305.

(6) Private Key Setting Command The private key setting command is a command sent from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to set a private key. The ID of the private key setting command is "SW." The private key setting command is accompanied by a private key consisting of 16 alphanumeric characters.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the private key setting command stores (overwrites) the private key accompanying the private key setting command in the private key storage area of the EEPROM 305. Then, based on whether or not the private key data accompanying the private key setting command matches the private key stored in the EEPROM 305, it transmits an answer indicating whether the setting result is OK or NG to the host device. For example, if a fault occurs in the EEPROM 305 and the private key accompanying the private key setting command cannot be properly stored in the EEPROM 305, the private key accompanying the private key setting command does not match the private key stored in the EEPROM 305. In this case, an answer indicating that the setting result is NG is transmitted.

(General commands)
Next, the general commands will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a diagram for explaining the general commands used in the communication between the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 and the host device.

As shown in FIG. 41, general commands include a serial ID command, a version request command, a random number command, a login command, a logout command, a clock read command, a latest number command, an opening/closing history information read command, an opening/closing history information number command, and a status read command.

(1) Serial ID Command The serial ID command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24h door monitoring unit 61 to transmit the serial ID of the 24h door monitoring unit 61. The ID of the serial ID command is "CR".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the serial ID command, it transmits (responds) the serial ID stored in the EEPROM 305 to the host device. When the host device receives the serial ID, it compares the received serial ID with the serial ID stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device.

(2) Version Request Command The version request command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24h door monitoring unit 61 to transmit the program version of the 24h door monitoring unit 61. The ID of the version request command is "CV".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the version request command, it transmits (responds) the program version stored in the EEPROM 305 to the host device. When the host device receives the program version, it compares the received program version with the program version stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device.

(3) Random Number Command The random number command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to transmit a random number value. The ID of the random number command is "CK".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the random number command, it performs a specified calculation using the value obtained from the random number generating circuit 308 to generate an 8-digit random number, and transmits (responds) the generated random number value to the host device. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also stores the generated random number value in the random number storage area of the RAM 304.

When the host device receives the random number value, it stores the received random number value in a volatile storage device provided in the host device.

(4) Login Command The login command is a command that is sent from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to set itself in a state in which it can request various settings based on privileged commands, i.e., when the host device requests login. The ID of the login command is "CI".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the login command, it determines whether the 16-digit password accompanying the login command matches the password stored in the password storage area of the RAM 304, and if they match, it sends (replies) an answer to the effect that login is permitted (OK). On the other hand, if they do not match, it sends (replies) an answer to the effect that login is not permitted (NG).

(5) Logout Command The logout command is a command sent from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to set the unit 61 to a state in which the unit 61 cannot request various settings based on privileged commands, i.e., to log out. The ID of the logout command is "CO".

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the logout command performs the logout. Specifically, it sets (clears) the login flag in RAM 304 to OFF. As described below, when the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives a general command while in a logged-in state, it sets (clears) the login flag to OFF (see SA77 in FIG. 55). It then sends an answer (logout answer) to the host device indicating that it has logged out.

(6) Read Clock Command The read clock command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the reading of the current time kept by the RTC 301 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The ID of the read clock command is "CT".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the clock read command, it transmits (replies) the current time (monitoring side time) kept by the RTC 301 to the host device (see SA172 in FIG. 62 described below). In this way, the control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 constitutes the monitoring side time transmission means. In addition, the host device, for example the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control board 72, which receives the time information kept by the RTC 301 sent from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (see SA352 in FIG. 75 described below), constitutes the setting side time receiving means.

(7) Latest Number Command The latest number command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 to transmit the latest number, which is the number of the opening/closing history storage area in which the latest opening/closing history information is stored. The ID of the latest number command is "CN".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the latest number command, it references the latest number storage area in the EEPROM 305 and transmits (responds) the latest number to the host device. The host device that receives the latest number compares the latest number already stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device with the received latest number, and if they do not match, stores (overwrites) the received latest number in the non-volatile storage device.

(8) Opening/Closing History Information Read Command The opening/closing history information read command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests transmission of opening/closing history information stored in the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The ID of the opening/closing history information read command is "CB".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the opening/closing history information read command, it transmits (responds) to the host device the opening/closing history information stored in the opening/closing history storage area of the EEPROM 305 that corresponds to the number associated with the opening/closing history information read command. The host device that receives the opening/closing history information stores the received opening/closing history in a non-volatile storage device.

(9) Opening/Closing History Information Number Command The opening/closing history information number command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24h door monitoring unit 61 to transmit the number of opening/closing history information pieces stored in the 24h door monitoring unit 61. The ID of the opening/closing history information number command is "CC".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the opening/closing history information count command, it references the history counter storage area in the EEPROM 305 and transmits (responds) the history counter value to the host device. The host device that receives the history counter value compares the history counter value already stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device with the received history counter value, and if they do not match, stores (overwrites) the received history counter value in the non-volatile storage device.

(10) Status read command The status read command is a command transmitted from the host device to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 when the host device requests the 24h door monitoring unit 61 to transmit the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD, i.e., the status. The ID of the status read command is "CS".

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the status read command, it transmits (responds) the opening/closing history information stored in the first detection result storage area of the RAM 304 to the host device.

The various information (serial ID, program version, random number, opening/closing history information number, opening/closing history information, number of opening/closing history information) received from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 in response to the transmission of a general command is stored in the sub-DRAM 203a or sub-SRAM 203b, for example, when the host device is the sub-control board 72. Also, when the host device is a setting machine (not shown), it is stored in the hard disk or RAM equipped in the setting machine. Also, the storage device in which the various received information is stored is not limited to this, and any well-known rewritable storage device can be selected as appropriate.

(Communication format)
Next, the communication format between the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 and the host device will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a diagram for explaining the communication format between the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 and the host device, where Fig. 42A is a diagram for explaining an outline of the communication format, and Fig. 42B is a diagram showing an example of the form of communication data when a random number is transmitted from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to the host device.

As shown in FIG. 42A, in this embodiment, communication data is transmitted in the form of ASCII code. At the beginning of the communication data is placed STX (Start of TeXt), a control character indicating the start of the text portion of the communication message. Following STX is the information (TEXT) to be transmitted and received by communication. Following TEXT is ETX (End of TeXt), a control character indicating the end of the text portion of the communication message. Following ETX is a two-digit sum value based on the sum of the TEXT values. Therefore, communication data in this embodiment consists of 1 byte of STX, 0 to 20 bytes (depending on the information being transmitted and received) of TEXT, 1 byte of ETX, and 2 bytes of sum value.

The communication format shown in FIG. 42A is used not only when sending a command from the host device to the 24h door monitoring unit 61, but also in the answer that the 24h door monitoring unit 61 returns to the host device in response to a command sent from the host device. For example, an example of an answer that the 24h door monitoring unit 61 returns to the host device in response to a random number command (CK) sent from the host device is shown in FIG. 42B (an example in which the 24h door monitoring unit 61 generates a random number of "12345678"). As shown in FIG. 42B, this answer begins with an ASCII code corresponding to STX (02H), and after STX is an ASCII code corresponding to the random number command ID "CK", which indicates that it is an answer to a random number command. After that, an 8-digit ASCII code corresponding to the random number value "12345678" is placed, and after that, an ASCII code corresponding to ETX (03H) and an ASCII code corresponding to the sum value are placed.

(sequence)
Next, the sequence will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a sequence table held by the host device.

The sequence table is stored in a non-volatile storage device of the host device, for example, in the ROM cartridge board 202 if the host device is the sub-control board 72, or in a hard disk if the host device is a setting machine (not shown).

The sequence table defines multiple sequences. A sequence consists of at least one general command or privileged command. When a sequence is executed in a specific process performed by the host device, the commands that make up the sequence are sent from the host device to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. If there are multiple commands that make up a sequence, the sequence table also defines the order in which the commands are sent. In any sequence, the host device sends a later command in the sequence after receiving an answer or information corresponding to the earlier command from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61.

As shown in FIG. 43, the sequence table specifies the following sequences: startup sequence, first state detection sequence, history acquisition sequence, full history acquisition sequence, initialization sequence, clock set sequence, monitoring interval time setting sequence, and recording start time setting sequence. It also specifies a recording mode setting sequence, private key setting sequence, batch setting sequence, and second state detection sequence.

The "Step" column of the sequence table specifies the order in which the commands that make up the sequence are sent. In addition, a command with the "check" column set to ON indicates that after the command is sent, processing will be carried out according to the contents specified in the "Condition" column.

(1) Start-up sequence First, the start-up sequence will be described. The start-up sequence is composed of a version request command (CV), a serial ID command (CR), and a status read command (CS). When executing the start-up sequence, the host device transmits commands to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 in the following order: version request command (CV), serial ID command (CR), and status read command (CS).

(2) First Status Detection Sequence The first status detection sequence is composed of a status read command (CS), an opening/closing history information number command (CC), and a latest number command (CN). When the first status detection sequence is executed, the host device transmits commands to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 in the order of the status read command (CS), the opening/closing history information number command (CC), and the latest number command (CN).

In addition, after sending the latest number command (CN), if the latest number received does not match the latest number stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device, i.e., if there is a change in the latest number, the host device executes the history acquisition sequence described below.

(3) History Acquisition Sequence The history acquisition sequence is made up of an opening/closing history information read command (CB), and when the history acquisition sequence is executed, the host device transmits the opening/closing history information read command (CB) to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61. This opening/closing history information read command is accompanied by the latest number stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device.

(4) Full History Acquisition Sequence The full history acquisition sequence consists of an opening/closing history information number command (CC), a latest number command (CN), and an opening/closing history information read command (CB). When the first state detection sequence is executed, the host device transmits commands to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 in the order of the opening/closing history information number command (CC), the latest number command (CN), and the opening/closing history information read command (CB).

After sending the latest number command, if the received latest number and history counter value do not match the latest number and history counter value stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device, the host device will identify the number of the opening and closing history information storage area from which to obtain the opening and closing history information based on the received latest number and the history counter value. In this case, if the history counter value is "60" and the latest number is "60", "1 to 60" will be identified as the number of the opening and closing history information storage area from which to obtain the opening and closing history information. Also, if the history counter value is "128", "1 to 128" will be identified as the number of the opening and closing history information storage area from which to obtain the opening and closing history information, regardless of the value of the latest number.

Then, the host device repeats (loops) sending the opening/closing history information read command (CB) until it has acquired the opening/closing history information from all of the opening/closing history information storage areas that are assigned the numbers of the identified opening/closing history information storage areas.

If the result of comparing the latest number and history counter value received with the latest number and history counter value stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device shows a match, the process of sending commands related to the entire history acquisition sequence is terminated without identifying the number of the opening/closing history information storage area from which the opening/closing history information is to be obtained and without sending the opening/closing history information read command (CB).

(5) Initialization Sequence The initialization sequence consists of a random number command (CK), a login command (CI), an initialization command (SI), and a logout command (CO). When executing the initialization sequence, the host device transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), initialization command (SI), and logout command (CO).

If the host device receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted (NG) after sending the login command (CI), the host device will not send the subsequent initialization command (SI) or logout command (CO), and will end the process of sending the commands that make up the initialization sequence.

(6) Clock Set Sequence The clock set sequence consists of a random number command (CK), a login command (CI), a clock set command (ST), and a logout command (CO). When executing the clock set sequence, the host device transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), clock set command (ST), and logout command (CO).

If the host device receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted (NG) after sending the login command (CI), the host device will not send the subsequent clock set command (ST) or logout command (CO), and will end the process of sending the commands that make up the clock set sequence.

(7) Monitoring interval time setting sequence The monitoring interval time setting sequence is made up of a random number command (CK), a login command (CI), a monitoring interval time setting command (SA), and a logout command (CO). When executing the monitoring interval time setting sequence, the host device transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), monitoring interval time setting command (SA), and logout command (CO).

If the host device receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted (NG) after sending the login command (CI), the host device will not send the subsequent monitoring interval time setting command (SA) or logout command (CO), and will end the process of sending the commands that make up the monitoring interval time setting sequence.

(8) Recording Start Time Setting Sequence The recording start time setting sequence consists of a random number command (CK), a login command (CI), a recording start time setting command (SB), and a logout command (CO). When executing the recording start time setting sequence, the host device transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), recording start time setting command (SB), and logout command (CO).

If the host device receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted (NG) after sending the login command (CI), the host device will not send the subsequent recording start time setting command (SB) or logout command (CO), and will end the process of sending the commands that make up the recording start time setting sequence.

(9) Recording Mode Setting Sequence The recording mode setting sequence consists of a random number command (CK), a login command (CI), a recording mode setting command (SC), and a logout command (CO). When executing the recording mode setting sequence, the host device transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), recording mode setting command (SC), and logout command (CO).

If the host device receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted (NG) after sending the login command (CI), the host device will not send the subsequent recording mode setting command (SC) or logout command (CO), and will end the process of sending the commands that make up the recording mode setting sequence.

(10) Private Key Setting Sequence The private key setting sequence consists of a random number command (CK), a login command (CI), a private key setting command (SW), and a logout command (CO). When executing the private key setting sequence, the host device transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), private key command (SW), and logout command (CO).

If the host device receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted (NG) after sending the login command (CI), the host device will not send the subsequent private key setting command (SW) or logout command (CO), and will end the process of sending the commands that make up the private key setting sequence.

(11) Bulk Setting Sequence The bulk setting sequence consists of a random number command (CK), a login command (CI), a monitoring interval time setting command (SA), a recording start time setting command (SB), a recording mode setting command (SC), and a logout command (CO). When executing the bulk setting sequence, the host device transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), monitoring interval time setting command (SA), recording start time setting command (SB), recording mode setting command (SC), and logout command (CO).

If the host device receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted (NG) after sending the login command (CI), the host device will not send the subsequent monitoring interval time setting command (SA), recording start time setting command (SB), recording mode setting command (SC), or logout command (CO), and will end the process of sending the commands that make up the batch setting sequence.

(12) Second Status Detection Sequence The second status detection sequence consists of a status read command (CS), an opening/closing history information number command (CC), a latest number command (CN), and a clock read command (CT). When the second status detection sequence is executed, the host device transmits commands to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 in the following order: status read command (CS), opening/closing history information number command (CC), latest number command (CN), and clock read command (CT).

(Processing when setting a private key)
Next, as an example of the processing performed by the host device and the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, processing at the time of setting a private key will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Note that in the following description, processing at the time of setting a private key in the case where the initial private key is changed will be described. Fig. 44 is a diagram for explaining processing at the time of setting a private key.

In this process, the host device refers to the sequence table, executes the private key sequence, and sends commands to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), private key setting command (SW), and logout command (CO).

First, the host device sends a random number command (CK) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C11). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the random number command, generates a random number, and sends (replies to) the generated random number value to the host device (C12: random number answer).

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also stores the generated random number value in the random number storage area of the RAM 304. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also reads an initial private key from the private key storage area of the EEPROM 305, and performs a predetermined calculation using the read private key and the random number value stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 304 to generate a password. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 then stores the generated password in the password storage area of the RAM 304.

On the other hand, when the host device receives a random number value from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, it stores the received random number value in a volatile storage device. The host device also reads out an initial private key value from the non-volatile storage device. Note that the non-volatile storage device of the host device pre-stores a private key that is the same as the initial private key value stored in the EEPROM 305. The host device performs a predetermined calculation using the read out private key and the random number value stored in the volatile storage device to generate a password. The host device then stores the generated password in the volatile storage device.

Next, the host device transmits a login command (CI) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C13). The login command includes a password that the host device has generated and stored in a volatile storage device.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the login command determines whether the password accompanying the login command matches the password stored in the password storage area of the RAM 304, and if they match, sends (replies) an answer indicating that login is permitted (OK), and if they do not match, sends (replies) an answer indicating that login is not permitted (NG) (C14).

When receiving an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted, the host device performs a first warning display process. In the first warning display process, the host device displays a screen indicating that login is not permitted on the display device of the host device. For example, when the host device is the sub-control board 72, as shown in FIG. 46, a warning screen with a message "Cannot log in to the monitoring unit" is displayed in the center of the screen on the display device. In addition, a message "Please check the status of the monitoring unit. The monitoring unit cannot be set for one hour" is displayed at the bottom of this warning screen. Note that, as a display device that displays a screen based on information from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (including the screens in FIG. 46 and those described later), an example using a sub-display device 220 having a touch panel will be described, but this is not limited to this, and the main display device 210 may be used, or both may be used.

When an answer indicating that login is permitted is received from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, the host device transmits a private key setting command (SW) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The private key setting command is accompanied by the private key related to the change. The private key related to the change may be generated automatically by the host device, may be input by an operator operating an input operation unit (not shown) of the host device, or may be stored in advance in a non-volatile storage device of the host device.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that has received the private key setting command stores (overwrites) the private key accompanying the private key setting command in the private key storage area of the EEPROM 305. Then, it transmits an answer indicating whether the above-mentioned setting result is OK or NG to the host device (C16).

Next, the host device sends a logout command (CO) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C17). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which has received the logout command, performs the logout. Then, it sends a logout answer indicating that the user has been logged out to the host device (C18).

In this embodiment, the contents of the processing related to the random number command (CK) and login command (CI) are the same when executing other sequences (specifically, the initialization sequence, clock set sequence, monitoring interval time setting sequence, recording start time setting sequence, recording mode setting sequence, and bulk setting sequence) that are sent in this order: random number command (CK) and login command (CI).

The above describes the process for setting a private key when changing the initial private key. However, the process for setting a private key when changing a private key that has already been changed from the initial value is the same as the above, except that the private key used to create the password is the private key that has been changed from the initial value.

(Processing from startup to monitoring)
Next, as another example of the processing performed by the host device and the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, the processing performed when the host device monitors the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD from the start-up of the host device will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a diagram for explaining the processing performed from the start-up to monitoring.

At the beginning of this process, the host device refers to the sequence table, executes the startup sequence, and sends commands to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 in the following order: version request command (CV), serial ID command (CR), and status read command (CS).

First, the host device transmits a version request command (CV) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C21). Upon receiving the version request command, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 transmits (replies) the program version stored in the EEPROM 305 to the host device (C22: version answer).

When the host device receives the program version, it compares the received program version with the program version stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device. If they do not match, it performs a second warning display process. In the second warning display process, the host device displays a screen on the display device of the host device indicating that login is not permitted. For example, if the host device is the sub-control board 72, a warning screen (not shown) is displayed on the display device with the message "Program versions are different" in the center of the screen.

When the host device receives the program version, it sends a serial ID command (CR) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C23). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which has received the serial ID command, sends (replies) the serial ID stored in the EEPROM 305 to the host device (C24: serial ID answer).

When the host device receives the serial ID, it compares the received serial ID with the serial ID stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device. If they do not match, it performs a third warning display process. In the third warning display process, the host device displays a screen indicating that the 24-hour monitoring door monitoring unit has been replaced. For example, if the host device is the sub-control board 72, the display device displays a warning screen with the message "The monitoring unit has been replaced" in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 47. In addition, at the bottom of this warning screen, the serial ID stored in the storage device of the host device is displayed as "OLD UNIT SERIAL ID", and the received serial ID is displayed as "NEW UNIT SERIAL ID".

When the host device receives the serial ID, it sends a status read command (CS) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C25). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which has received the status read command, sends (replies to) the opening/closing history information stored in the first detection result storage area of the RAM 304 to the host device (C26: status answer).

When the transmission of the commands related to the startup sequence is completed, the host device refers to the sequence table, executes the full history acquisition sequence, and transmits commands to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 in the following order: opening/closing history information count command (CC), latest number command (CN), and opening/closing history information read command (CB).

First, the host device transmits an opening/closing history information count command (CC) (C27). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the opening/closing history information count command transmits the value of the history counter to the host device (C28: opening/closing history information count answer).

Then, the host device transmits a latest number command (CN) (C29). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the latest number command transmits the latest number to the host device (C28: latest number answer).

The host device compares the received latest number and history counter value with the latest number and history counter value stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device. If the comparison reveals a difference, it identifies the number of the opening and closing history information storage area from which to obtain the opening and closing history information based on the latest number and the history counter value. The host device then transmits an opening and closing history information read command (CB) specifying the opening and closing history information storage area to which the identified opening and closing history information storage area number is assigned (C31).

When the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 receives the opening/closing history information read command, it sends (replies) to the host device the opening/closing history information stored in the opening/closing history storage area that corresponds to the number attached to the read command (C32: opening/closing history information read answer).

Note that C31 and C32 are repeated until opening and closing history information is obtained from all opening and closing history information storage areas that are assigned the numbers of the identified opening and closing history information storage areas.

When the transmission of the commands related to the full history acquisition sequence is completed, the host device refers to the sequence table, executes the first status detection sequence, and transmits commands to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 in the following order: status read command (CS), opening/closing history information count command (CC), and latest number command (CN). After that, the first status detection sequence is executed at a predetermined interval, which in this embodiment is every 500 msec.

First, the host device transmits a status read command (CS) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C33). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which receives the status read command, transmits (replies) the opening/closing history information stored in the first detection result storage area of the RAM 304 to the host device (C34: status answer).

If the received opening/closing history information indicates that the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state, the host device causes a display device connected to the host device (such as the sub-display device 220 if the host device is the sub-control board 72) to display a screen (not shown) indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state (door open display).

The host device then transmits an opening/closing history information count command (CC) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C35). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which has received the opening/closing history information count command, references the history counter storage area in the EEPROM 305 and transmits (responds) the value of the history counter to the host device (C35: opening/closing history information count answer). The host device, which has received the history counter value, compares the history counter value already stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device with the received history counter value, and if they do not match, stores (overwrites) the received history counter value in the non-volatile storage device.

The host device then transmits a latest number command (CN) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (C37). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which has received the latest number command, references the latest number storage area of the EEPROM 305 and transmits (replies) the latest number to the host device (C38: latest number answer). The host device, which has received the latest number, compares the latest number already stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device with the received latest number, and if they do not match, stores (overwrites) the received latest number in the non-volatile storage device.

In addition, if the latest number received does not match the latest number stored in the non-volatile storage device, the host device executes a history acquisition sequence.

The host device executes a history acquisition sequence and sends an opening/closing history information read command (CB) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. This opening/closing history information read command is accompanied by the latest number stored in the non-volatile storage device of the host device.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the opening/closing history information read command transmits (replies) the opening/closing history information stored in the opening/closing history storage area corresponding to the number attached to the opening/closing history information read command to the host device (C40: opening/closing history information read answer). Then, the host device that receives the opening/closing history information stores the received opening/closing history in a non-volatile storage device.

(Processing performed by the control LSI 300 of the 24-h door monitoring unit)
Next, various processes performed by the control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(1) Door Monitoring Unit Main Processing First, the door monitoring unit main processing performed by the control LSI 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Fig. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring unit main processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring unit main processing, the control LSI 300 first performs an initialization process (SA1). In the initialization process, the control LSI 300 clears the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time and the count number corresponding to the recording start time stored in the EEPROM 305. It also clears the monitoring interval counter value and the recording start time counter value stored in the RAM 304.

Next, the control LSI 300 performs port input processing (SA2). In the port input processing, the control LSI 300 acquires information indicating whether the lower door mechanism DD is in an open or closed state from the input port of the I/O port circuit 309, and stores the acquired information in the RAM 304. The specific contents of the port input processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Next, the control LSI 300 performs door monitoring processing (SA3). In the door monitoring processing, the control LSI 300 stores the opening and closing history information in the EEPROM 305. The specific contents of the door monitoring processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

Next, the control LSI 300 performs reception processing (SA4). In the reception processing, the control LSI 300 performs various processes according to the command received from the host device in the reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 54) described below. The specific contents of the reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the control LSI 300 performs a transmission process (SA5). In the transmission process, the control LSI 300 transmits various answers to the host device. The specific contents of the transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the control LSI 300 performs periodic wait processing (SA6). In periodic wait processing, the control LSI 300 determines whether 20 msec has elapsed since the previous periodic wait processing, and if not, suspends transition to the next processing (SA7) until 20 msec has elapsed, and transitions to SA7 after the elapse. Therefore, the processing of adding 1 to various counters in various processing executed by the control LSI 300 is executed once every 20 msec. The processing of adding 1 to various counters in various processing executed by the control LSI 300 includes SA8 in the door monitoring unit main processing described below, and SA24 in the door monitoring processing (see FIG. 50) described below.

Next, the control LSI 300 refers to the recording start time counter storage area of the RAM 304 and the recording start time storage area of the EEPROM 305, and determines whether the value of the recording start time counter is less than the count number corresponding to the recording start time (SA7). When it is determined in SA7 that the value of the recording start time counter is not less than the count number corresponding to the recording start time (if SA7 returns NO), the control LSI 300 transitions to SA2 and repeats the processes from SA2 onwards.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA7 that the value of the recording start time counter is less than the count number corresponding to the recording start time (SA7 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 adds 1 to the value of the recording start time counter (SA8). After that, the control LSI 300 transitions the process to SA2 and repeats the process from SA2 onwards.

(2) Port Input Processing Next, the port input processing at SA2 of the door monitoring unit main processing (see Fig. 48) will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the port input processing in this embodiment.

In the port input process, the control LSI 300 first obtains status information (information from the unit door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310) indicating whether the lower door mechanism DD is open or closed from the input port of the I/O port circuit 309 (SA11).

Next, the control LSI 300 stores the acquired status information in the input port information storage area of the RAM 304 (SA12). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the port input process and returns the process to SA3 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

(3) Door Monitoring Processing Next, the door monitoring processing at SA3 of the door monitoring unit main processing (see Fig. 48) will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the door monitoring processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring process, the control LSI 300 first performs a door monitoring status detection process (SA21). In the door monitoring status detection process, the control LSI 300 stores the status information stored in the input port information storage area of the RAM 304 in the first detection result storage area and the second detection result storage area. The specific contents of the door monitoring status detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, the control LSI 300 performs a door monitoring record determination process (SA22). In the door monitoring record determination process, the control LSI 300 determines whether or not the opening/closing history information can be stored in the EEPROM 305, and if it determines that recording is possible, it sets the recording permission flag to ON (sets "1"). On the other hand, if it determines that recording is not possible, it sets the recording permission flag to OFF (clears it). The specific contents of the door monitoring record determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether the recording permission flag is set to ON (whether "1" is set) (SA23). When it is determined in SA23 that the recording permission flag is set to OFF (if SA23 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring process and returns the process to SA4 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA23 that the recording permission flag is set to ON (SA23 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 adds 1 to the value of the monitoring interval counter stored in the monitoring interval counter storage area of the RAM 304 (SA24).

Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether the value of the monitoring interval counter in the RAM 304 is equal to or greater than the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time stored in the monitoring interval time storage area of the EEPROM 305 (SA25). When it is determined in SA25 that the value of the monitoring interval counter is less than the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time (if SA25 returns NO), the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring process and returns the process to SA4 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA25 that the value of the monitoring interval counter is equal to or greater than the count number corresponding to the monitoring interval time (SA25 returns YES), the control LSI 300 sets (clears) the monitoring interval counter to 0 (SA26).

Then, the control LSI 300 determines whether the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of the RAM 304 is set to ON (SA27). The status change flag is set to ON in SA46 of the door monitoring status detection process (see FIG. 51) described below. When it is determined in SA27 that the status change flag is set to OFF (if SA27 returns NO), the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring process and returns the process to SA4 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA27 that the status change flag is set to ON (SA27 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 determines whether the latest number stored in the latest number storage area of the EEPROM 305 is 128 or greater (SA28).

When it is determined in SA27 that the latest number stored in the latest number storage area of EEPROM 305 is 128 or greater (SA28 is judged as YES), control LSI 300 sets the latest number to "1" in the latest number storage area of EEPROM 305 (SA29). Then, control LSI 300 transitions to processing in SA31.

When it is determined in SA27 that the latest number stored in the latest number storage area of EEPROM 305 is less than 128 (SA28 returns NO), the control LSI 300 adds "1" to the value in the latest number storage area of EEPROM 305 (SA30). Then, the control LSI 300 transitions to SA31.

In the process of SA31, the control LSI 300 determines whether the history counter stored in the history counter storage area of the EEPROM 305 is less than 128 (SA31). In the process of SA31, when it is determined that the history counter is less than 128 (if SA31 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 adds 1 to the history counter (SA32). Then, the control LSI 300 transitions to the process of SA33.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of SA31 that the history counter is not less than 128 (SA31 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 transitions the processing to SA33.

In the processing of SA33, the control LSI 300 stores the opening/closing history information stored in the second detection result storage area of the RAM 304 in the opening/closing history information storage area assigned the latest number stored in the latest number storage area of the EEPROM 305.

Next, the control LSI 300 sets the state change flag stored in the state change flag storage area of the RAM 304 to OFF (SA34). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring process and returns the process to SA4 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

(4) Door Monitoring Status Detection Processing Next, the door monitoring status detection processing in SA21 of the door monitoring processing (see Fig. 50) will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring status detection processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring status detection process, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the status information (information indicating whether the door is open or closed) in the opening and closing history information stored in the first detection result storage area of the RAM 304 differs from the status information stored in the input port information storage area of the RAM 304 (SA41).

When it is determined in SA41 that the status information in the first detection result storage area and the status information in the input port information storage area are not different (match) (SA41 is a NO determination), the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring status detection process and returns the process to SA22 of the door monitoring process (see FIG. 50).

When it is determined in SA41 that the status information in the first detection result storage area and the status information in the input port information storage area are different (SA41 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 acquires current date and time information from the RTC 301, and stores opening and closing history information consisting of the acquired date and time information and the status information in the input port information storage area in the first detection result storage area (SA42).

Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether the state change flag stored in the state change flag storage area of the RAM 304 is set to OFF (SA43). When it is determined in SA43 that the state change flag is not set to OFF (if SA43 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring state detection process and returns the process to SA22 of the door monitoring process (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA43 that the status change flag is set to OFF (SA43 is determined as YES), the control LSI 300 determines whether the status information of the opening and closing history information stored in the opening and closing history information storage area assigned with the latest number stored in the latest number storage area of the EEPROM 305 is different from the status information of the input port information storage area (SA44).

In the processing of SA44, when it is determined that the status information of the opening/closing history information stored in the opening/closing history information storage area with the latest number is not different (matches) with the status information in the input port information storage area (if SA44 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring status detection processing and returns the processing to SA22 of the door monitoring processing (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, in the processing of SA44, when it is determined that the status information of the opening and closing history information stored in the opening and closing history information storage area with the latest number is different from the status information of the input port information storage area (if SA44 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 acquires the current date and time information from the RTC 301, and stores the opening and closing history information consisting of the acquired date and time information and the status information of the input port information storage area in the second detection result storage area (SA45).

Next, the control LSI 300 sets the state change flag stored in the state change flag storage area of the RAM 304 to ON (SA46). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring state detection process and returns the process to SA22 of the door monitoring process (see FIG. 50).

(5) Door Monitoring Record Determination Processing Next, the door monitoring record determination processing in SA22 of the door monitoring processing (see Fig. 50) will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring record determination processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring record determination process, the control LSI 300 first refers to the record mode storage area of the EEPROM 305 and determines whether the record mode is set to the continuous record mode (SA51). In the process of SA51, if it is determined that the record mode is not set to the continuous record mode (if SA51 returns NO), the control LSI 300 proceeds to the process of SA54, which will be described later.

When it is determined in the process of SA51 that the recording mode is set to the continuous recording mode (SA51 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 refers to the recording start time counter storage area of the RAM 304 and the recording start time storage area of the EEPROM 305, and determines whether the value of the recording start time counter is equal to or greater than the count number corresponding to the recording start time (SA52). When it is determined in SA52 that the value of the recording start time counter is not equal to or greater than the count number corresponding to the recording start time (SA52 is judged as NO), the control LSI 300 transitions to the process of SA54 described below.

When it is determined in SA52 that the value of the recording start time counter is equal to or greater than the count number corresponding to the recording start time (SA52 is determined as YES), the control LSI 300 sets the recording permission flag stored in the recording permission flag storage area of the RAM 304 to ON (SA53). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring recording determination process and returns the process to SA23 of the door monitoring process (see FIG. 50).

In SA54, the control LSI 300 sets the recording permission flag stored in the recording permission flag storage area of the RAM 304 to OFF (SA54). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the door monitoring recording determination process and returns the process to SA23 of the door monitoring process (see FIG. 50).

Here, the timing of outputting a signal from the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 as a result of the processing in Figs. 48 to 52, the timing of storing the opening/closing history information in the first detection result storage area, and the timing of storing the opening/closing history information in the second detection result storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a timing chart showing the timing of storing the opening/closing history information in the first detection result storage area and the second detection result storage area.

Figure 53 shows the state after the preset recording start time has elapsed. The vertical solid lines in Figure 53 indicate the timing at which the opening/closing history information stored in the second detection result storage area of RAM 304 is stored in the opening/closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 (the execution timing of SA33 of the door monitoring process shown in Figure 50). Therefore, the interval between the vertical solid lines indicates the monitoring interval time.

Time t0 in Figure 53 indicates the time when the lower door mechanism DD remains closed for a while, and the opening/closing history information indicating the closed state stored in the second detection result storage area is stored in the opening/closing history storage area of EEPROM 305.

When the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 outputs status information indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state at time t1, opening/closing history information indicating the open state is stored in the first detection result storage area at time t2 (see SA42 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). Similarly, at time t2, opening/closing history information indicating the open state is stored in the second detection result storage area (see SA45 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). Also, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to ON (see SA46 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51).

The interval between t1 and t2 is a time lag caused by the door monitoring status detection process SA42 and SA45 being executed every 20 msec. In other words, the maximum value of this time lag is a maximum of 20 msec. The intervals between t3 and t4, between t6 and t7, between t8 and t9, between t11 and t12, and between t14 and t15, which will be described later, also show similar time lags.

At time t3, when the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 outputs status information indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state, at time t4, opening/closing history information indicating the closed state is stored in the first detection result storage area (see SA42 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in Figure 51).

On the other hand, at time t4, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to ON (see SA46 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). Therefore, the opening/closing history information based on the status information output at time t3 is not stored in the second detection result storage area (SA43 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). In other words, the status in which the opening/closing history information indicating the open state is stored in the second detection result storage area is maintained.

At time t5, when the start interval time has elapsed from time t0, the opening/closing history information indicating the open state stored in the second detection result storage area is stored in the opening/closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 that has the latest number assigned to it (see SA33 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50). In addition, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to OFF (see SA34 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50).

At time t6, when the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 outputs status information indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state, at time t7, opening/closing history information indicating the open state is stored in the first detection result storage area (see SA42 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in Figure 51).

On the other hand, at time t7, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to OFF, but the opening and closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 with the latest number has opening and closing history information indicating the open state stored therein. Therefore, the opening and closing history information based on the status information output at time t6 is not stored in the second detection result storage area (SA44 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). In other words, the state in which opening and closing history information indicating the open state is stored in the second detection result storage area is maintained.

At time t8, when the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 outputs status information indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state, at time t9, opening/closing history information indicating the closed state is stored in the first detection result storage area (see SA42 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51).

At time t9, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to OFF, and the opening and closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 with the latest number stores opening and closing history information indicating the open state. Therefore, the opening and closing history information based on the status information output at time t8 is stored in the second detection result storage area (SA45 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). That is, the opening and closing history information indicating the closed state is stored in the second detection result storage area. Also, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to ON (see SA46 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51).

At time t10, when the start interval time has elapsed from time t5, the opening/closing history information indicating the closed state stored in the second detection result storage area is stored in the opening/closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 that has the latest number assigned to it (see SA33 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50). In addition, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to OFF (see SA34 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50).

When the door open/close monitoring sensor 310 outputs status information indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state at time t11, opening/closing history information indicating the open state is stored in the first detection result storage area at time t12 (see SA42 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). Similarly, at time t12, opening/closing history information indicating the open state is stored in the second detection result storage area (see SA45 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). Also, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to ON (see SA46 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51).

At time t13, when the start interval time has elapsed from time t11, the opening/closing history information indicating the open state stored in the second detection result storage area is stored in the opening/closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 that has the latest number assigned to it (see SA33 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50). In addition, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to OFF (see SA34 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50).

At time t14, when the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 outputs status information indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state, at time t15, opening/closing history information indicating the closed state is stored in the first detection result storage area (see SA42 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in Figure 51).

At time t14, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to OFF, and the opening and closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 with the latest number stores opening and closing history information indicating the open state. Therefore, the opening and closing history information based on the status information output at time t14 is stored in the second detection result storage area (SA45 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51). That is, the opening and closing history information indicating the closed state is stored in the second detection result storage area. Also, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to ON (see SA46 of the door monitoring status detection process shown in FIG. 51).

At time t16, when the start interval time has elapsed from time t13, the opening/closing history information indicating the closed state stored in the second detection result storage area is stored in the opening/closing history information storage area of EEPROM 305 that has the latest number assigned to it (see SA33 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50). In addition, the status change flag stored in the status change flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to OFF (see SA34 of the door monitoring process shown in FIG. 50).

(6) Reception Interrupt Processing Next, a reception interrupt processing executed by the control LSI 300 every time the serial communication circuit 307 of the control LSI 300 receives one byte of a command or data from the host device will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the reception interrupt processing in this embodiment.

In the reception interrupt process, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the received data is "STX" (SA61). When it is determined in SA61 that the received data is "STX" (SA61 returns YES), the control LSI 300 sets the reception counter value stored in the reception buffer and reception counter storage area of RAM 304 to "1", and sets the ETX reception flag stored in the ETX reception flag storage area of RAM 304 to OFF (SA62). The control LSI 300 then ends the reception interrupt process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA61 that the received data is not "STX" (SA61 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 stores the received data in the reception buffer corresponding to the reception counter value stored in the reception counter storage area (SA63).

Next, the control LSI 300 adds 1 to the value of the reception counter (SA64).

Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether the received data is "ETX" or not (SA65). When it is determined in SA65 that the received data is "ETX" (if SA65 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 sets the ETX reception flag stored in the ETX reception flag storage area of RAM 304 to ON. It also clears the value of the sum counter of RAM 304 (SA66). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the reception interrupt process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA65 that the received data is not "ETX" (SA65 is a NO determination), the control LSI 300 determines whether the ETX reception flag stored in the ETX reception flag storage area of the RAM 304 is set to ON (SA67). When it is determined in SA67 that the ETX reception flag is not set to ON (SA67 is a NO determination), the control LSI 300 ends the reception interrupt process.

When it is determined in SA67 that the ETX reception flag is set to ON (SA67 returns YES), the sum counter is incremented by 1 (SA68).

Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether the value of the sum counter is 2 or not (SA69). When it is determined in SA69 that the value of the sum counter is not 2 (if SA69 is a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the reception interrupt process. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA69 that the value of the sum counter is 2 (if SA69 is a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 sets the reception completion flag stored in the reception completion flag storage area of RAM 304 to ON (SA70) and ends the reception interrupt process.

(7) Reception Processing Next, the reception processing at SA4 of the door monitoring unit main processing (see Fig. 48) will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the reception processing in this embodiment.

In the reception process, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the reception completion flag stored in the reception completion flag storage area of the RAM 304 is set to ON (SA71). If it is determined in SA71 that the reception completion flag is not set to ON (if SA71 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the reception process and returns the process to SA5 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA71 that the reception completion flag is set to ON (SA71 is determined as YES), the control LSI 300 refers to the reception buffer of RAM 304 and performs a consistency determination process to determine whether the received sum value and the received data are consistent (SA72). Specifically, in the consistency determination process, the received data (see FIG. 42A) stored in the reception buffer of RAM 304 is sequentially added in units of one byte up to "ETX" excluding "STX" to calculate a one-byte sum value, and the calculation result is converted into ASCII code to generate a two-byte sum value, and the generated sum value is compared with the sum value stored in the reception buffer (SAM (ASCII) 2 Byte in FIG. 42A) to determine whether the received data is consistent. Note that, as a specific example of the consistency determination process, an example of calculating the sum value by addition has been described, but the invention is not limited to this, and the sum value may be calculated by subtraction or exclusive OR, for example. Also, instead of calculating the sum value, the sum value stored in the receive buffer may be converted from ASCII code to binary code to determine the sum value.

Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether the result of the consistency determination process in SA72 indicates that the received sum value and the received data are consistent, i.e., whether the result of the consistency determination process is OK or not (SA73). If it is determined in SA73 that the result of the consistency determination process is not OK (if SA73 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the reception process and returns the process to SA5 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA73 that the result of the consistency determination process is OK (SA73 is determined as YES), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a privileged command (SA74). Specifically, the control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains a privileged command ID (any of SI, ST, SA, SB, SC, or SW shown in FIG. 40), it determines that the received command is a privileged command, and if it does not, it determines that it is not a privileged command.

When it is determined in SA74 that the received command is not a privileged command (SA74 is judged as NO), the control LSI 300 proceeds to SA77 described below. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA74 that the received command is a privileged command (SA74 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 determines whether the login flag stored in the login flag storage area of RAM 304 is set to ON (SA75).

When it is determined in SA75 that the login flag is not set to ON (SA75 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the reception process and returns the process to SA5 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA75 that the login flag is set to ON (SA75 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs privileged command reception processing (SA76). In the privileged command reception processing, the control LSI 300 performs various processes according to the received privileged command. The specific contents of the privileged command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. After the privileged command reception processing, the control LSI 300 ends the reception processing and returns the processing to SA5 of the door monitoring unit main processing (see FIG. 48).

Returning now to the explanation of the processing of SA74, when it is determined that the received command is not a privileged command (SA74 returns NO), the control LSI 300 sets the login flag to OFF (SA77).

Then, the control LSI 300 performs general command reception processing (SA78). In the general command reception processing, the control LSI 300 performs various processes according to the received general command. The specific contents of the general command reception processing will be explained later with reference to FIG. 58. After the general command reception processing, the control LSI 300 ends the reception processing and returns the processing to SA5 of the door monitoring unit main processing (see FIG. 48).

(8) Processing upon Receipt of Privileged Command Next, the processing upon reception of a privileged command in SA76 of the reception processing (see Fig. 55) will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing upon reception of a privileged command in this embodiment.

In the process of receiving a privileged command, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the received privileged command is an initialization command (SA81). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "SI", which is the ID of the initialization command, it determines that the privileged command is an initialization command, and if "SI" is not contained, it determines that it is not an initialization command.

When it is determined in SA81 that the received privileged command is an initialization command (SA81 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 performs initialization processing (SA82). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the processing performed when a privileged command is received.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA81 that the received privileged command is not an initialization command (SA81 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a clock set command (SA83). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "ST", which is the ID of the initialization command, it determines that the privileged command is a clock set command, and if "ST" is not contained, it determines that it is not a clock set command.

When it is determined in SA83 that the received privileged command is a clock set command (SA81 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 performs an RTC setting process (SA84). That is, information indicating the year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week that accompanies the clock set command is obtained from the receive buffer of RAM 304, and the RTC 301 is set based on the obtained information. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the privileged command reception process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA83 that the received privileged command is not a clock set command (SA83 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a monitoring interval time setting command (SA85). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "SA", which is the ID of the monitoring interval time setting command, it determines that the privileged command is a monitoring interval time setting command, and if "SA" is not contained, it determines that it is not a monitoring interval time setting command.

When it is determined in SA85 that the received privileged command is a monitoring interval setting command (SA85 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs a monitoring interval setting process (SA86). That is, information indicating the monitoring interval (count number) associated with the monitoring interval setting command is obtained from the reception buffer of RAM 304, and the information is stored in the monitoring interval storage area of EEPROM 305. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the privileged command reception process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA85 that the received privileged command is not a monitoring interval time setting command (SA85 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a recording start time setting command (SA87). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "SB", which is the ID of the recording start time setting command, it determines that the privileged command is a recording start time setting command, and if "SB" is not contained, it determines that the command is not a recording start time setting command.

When it is determined in SA87 that the received privileged command is a recording start time setting command (SA87 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs recording start time setting processing (SA88). That is, information indicating the recording start time associated with the recording start time setting command (count number) is obtained from the receive buffer of RAM 304, and stored in the recording start time storage area of EEPROM 305. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the privileged command reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA87 that the received privileged command is not a recording start time setting command (SA87 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether it is a recording mode setting command (SA89). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "SC", which is the ID of the recording mode setting command, it determines that the privileged command is a recording mode setting command, and if "SC" is not contained, it determines that it is not a recording mode setting command.

When it is determined in SA89 that the received privileged command is a recording mode setting command (SA89 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs recording mode setting processing (SA90). That is, information indicating the recording mode associated with the recording mode setting command is obtained from the reception buffer of RAM 304, and stored in the recording mode storage area of EEPROM 305. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the processing performed when the privileged command is received.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA89 that the received privileged command is not a recording mode setting command (SA89 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether it is a private key setting command (SA91). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "SW", which is the ID of the private key setting command, it determines that the privileged command is a private key setting command, and if "SW" is not contained, it determines that it is not a private key setting command.

When it is determined in SA91 that the received privileged command is a private key setting command (SA89 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 performs private key setting processing (SA92). That is, the control LSI 300 obtains the private key associated with the private key setting command from the reception buffer of the RAM 304, and stores it in the private key storage area of the EEPROM 305. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the processing when the privileged command is received.

On the other hand, when SA91 determines that the received privileged command is not a private key setting command (SA91 returns NO), the control LSI 300 ends the processing performed when a privileged command is received.

(9) General Command Reception Processing Next, the general command reception processing in SA78 of the reception processing (see Fig. 55) will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the general command reception processing in this embodiment.

In the process of receiving a general command, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the received general command is a serial ID command (SA101). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CR", which is the ID of the serial ID command, it determines that the general command is a serial ID command, and if "CR" is not included, it determines that it is not a serial ID command.

When SA101 determines that the received general command is a serial ID command (SA101 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs a process for receiving a serial ID command (SA102). In this process, the control LSI 300 acquires the serial ID stored in the serial ID storage area of the EEPROM 305. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the process for receiving a general command.

On the other hand, when SA101 determines that the received general command is not a serial ID command (SA101 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a version request command (SA103). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CV", which is the ID of the version request command, determines that the general command is a version request command, and if "CV" is not included, determines that it is not a version request command.

When it is determined in SA103 that the received general command is a version request command (SA103 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs a process for when a version request command is received (SA104). In this process, the control LSI 300 obtains the program version stored in the version storage area of the EEPROM 305. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the process for when a general command is received.

On the other hand, when SA103 determines that the received general command is not a version request command (SA103 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a random number command (SA105). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CK", which is the ID of the random number command, determines that the general command is a random number command, and if "CK" is not included, determines that it is not a random number command.

When it is determined in SA105 that the received general command is a random number command (SA105 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs processing when a random number command is received (SA106). In this processing, the control LSI 300 generates a random number and also creates a password. The specific contents of the processing when a random number command is received will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. After the processing when a random number command is received, the control LSI 300 ends the processing when a general command is received.

On the other hand, when SA105 determines that the received general command is not a random number command (SA105 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a login command (SA107). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CI", which is the ID of the login command, determines that the general command is a login command, and if "CI" is not contained, determines that it is not a login command.

When it is determined in SA107 that the received general command is a login command (SA107 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs login command reception processing (SA108). In this processing, the control LSI 300 determines whether the password accompanying the login command matches the password stored in the password storage area of RAM 304, and if they match, sets the device to a state in which various settings based on privileged commands can be requested (sets the login flag to ON). The specific contents of the login command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the general command reception processing.

On the other hand, when SA107 determines that the received general command is not a login command (SA107 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a logout command (SA109). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CO", which is the ID of the logout command, determines that the general command is a logout command, and if "CO" is not contained, determines that it is not a logout command.

When it is determined in SA109 that the received general command is a logout command (SA109 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs a logout command reception process to set the login flag stored in the login flag storage area of the RAM 304 to OFF (SA110). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the general command reception process.

On the other hand, when SA109 determines that the received general command is not a logout command (SA109 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a clock read command (SA111). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CT", which is the ID of the clock read command, determines that the general command is a clock read command, and if "CT" is not contained, determines that it is not a clock read command.

When it is determined in SA111 that the received general command is a clock read command (SA111 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs processing for receiving a clock read command (SA112). In this processing, the control LSI 300 obtains the current time kept by the RTC 301. Then, the control LSI 300 ends the processing for receiving a general command.

On the other hand, when SA111 determines that the received general command is not a clock read command (SA111 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is the latest number command (SA113). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CN", which is the ID of the latest number command, determines that the general command is the latest number command, and if "CN" is not included, determines that it is not the latest number command.

When it is determined in SA113 that the received general command is the latest number command (SA113 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs processing for when the latest number command is received (SA114). In this processing, the control LSI 300 refers to the latest number storage area of the RAM 304 and obtains the latest number stored in the latest number storage area. Then, the control LSI 300 ends the processing for when the general command is received.

On the other hand, when SA113 determines that the received general command is not the latest number command (SA113 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is an open/close history information read command (SA115). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CB", which is the ID of the open/close history information read command, determines that the general command is an open/close history information read command, and if "CB" is not contained, determines that it is not an open/close history information read command.

When it is determined in SA115 that the received general command is an opening/closing history information read command (SA115 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs processing at the time of receiving the opening/closing history information read command (SA116). In this processing, the control LSI 300 acquires the opening/closing history information stored in the opening/closing history storage area of the EEPROM 305 that corresponds to the number associated with the opening/closing history information read command. Then, the control LSI 300 ends the processing at the time of receiving the general command.

On the other hand, when SA115 determines that the received general command is not an opening/closing history information read command (SA115 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is an opening/closing history information number command (SA117). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CC", which is the ID of the opening/closing history information number command, determines that the general command is an opening/closing history information number command, and if "CC" is not contained, determines that it is not an opening/closing history information number command.

When it is determined in SA117 that the received general command is an opening/closing history information number command (SA117 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 performs processing for when an opening/closing history information number command is received (SA118). In this processing, the control LSI 300 acquires the value of the history counter stored in the history counter storage area of the EEPROM 305. Then, the control LSI 300 ends the processing for when a general command is received.

On the other hand, when SA117 determines that the received general command is not an opening/closing history information number command (SA117 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a status read command (SA119). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains "CS", which is the ID of the status read command, determines that the general command is a status read command, and if "CS" is not included, determines that it is not a status read command.

When it is determined in SA119 that the received general command is a status read command (SA119 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs processing for when the status read command is received (SA120). In this processing, the control LSI 300 acquires the open/close history information stored in the first detection result storage area of the RAM 304. Then, the control LSI 300 ends the processing for when the general command is received.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received general command is not a status read command (SA119 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the processing performed when a general command is received.

(10) Processing upon Receiving a Random Number Command Next, the processing upon receiving a random number command in SA106 of the processing upon receiving a general command (see Fig. 57) will be described with reference to Fig. 58. Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing upon receiving a random number command in this embodiment.

In the process of receiving a random number command, the control LSI 300 first causes the random number generating circuit 308 to generate a random number, and stores the generated random number in the random number storage area of the RAM 304 (SA121). Specifically, the control LSI 300 obtains the count value of the FRC, which is the random number generating circuit 308, and performs the calculation of Equation 1 to generate a random number.
Random number = count value x count value + count value ... formula 1
The random number calculated by the operation of Equation 1 is converted into ASCII code and stored in a random number storage area of the RAM 304. The control LSI 300 which performs the processing of the SA 121 constitutes a specific information generating means.

Then, the control LSI 300 acquires the private key stored in the private key storage area of the EEPROM 305 (SA122). Next, the control LSI 300 performs a password generation process to generate a password using the random number in the random number storage area of the RAM 304 and the private key acquired in SA122 (SA123). Specifically, the control LSI 300 calculates a hash value as a password based on the 16-byte private key and the 8-byte random number (e.g., MD5, SHA-0, SHA-1, SHA-2, SHA-3, etc.). The control LSI 300 that performs the process of SA123 constitutes a monitoring-side authentication information generation means.

Next, the control LSI 300 stores the generated password in the password storage area of the EEPROM 305 (SA124). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the process when the random number command is received.

(11) Login Command Reception Processing Next, the login command reception processing in SA108 of the general command reception processing (see Fig. 57) will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the login command reception processing in this embodiment.

In the process when a login command is received, the control LSI 300 determines whether the login disallowance timer is running (SA131). Here, the login disallowance timer is a timer that measures the time that the login disallowance state is maintained. In order to prevent unauthorized login, the login disallowance timer is started when it is determined in the process of SA134 described below that the password does not match. In this embodiment, the login disallowance timer is run using the RTC 301, and the length is set to one hour. Specifically, the control LSI 300 stores the time when the measurement started in the RAM 304, and in the process of SA131, if the difference between the current time acquired from the RTC 301 and the time when the measurement started is less than one hour, the control LSI 300 determines that the login disallowance timer is running. On the other hand, if the difference between the current time acquired from the RTC 301 and the time when the measurement started is one hour or more, the control LSI 300 determines that the login disallowance timer is not running.

When it is determined in SA131 that the login disallowance timer is currently measuring (SA131 is judged as YES), the control LSI 300 ends the process when the login command is received. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA131 that the login disallowance timer is not currently measuring (SA131 is judged as NO), the control LSI 300 obtains the password received from the host device from the reception buffer of RAM 304 (SA132).

Next, the control LSI 300 compares the password acquired in SA132 with the password stored in the password storage area of the EEPROM 305 (SA133). Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether or not the passwords match as a result of the comparison in SA133 (SA134). The control LSI 300 that performs the processing in SA134 constitutes an authentication information determination means.

When it is determined in SA134 that these passwords match (SA134 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 sets the login flag stored in the login flag storage area of the RAM 304 to ON (SA135). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the process performed when a login command is received.

When it is determined in SA134 that these passwords do not match (SA134 returns NO), the control LSI 300 starts measuring the login disallowance timer (SA136). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the process when the login command is received.

(12) Transmission Processing Next, the transmission processing at SA5 of the door monitoring unit main processing (see Fig. 48) will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the transmission processing in this embodiment.

In the transmission process, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the reception completion flag stored in the reception completion flag storage area of the RAM 304 is set to ON (SA141). If it is determined in SA141 that the reception completion flag is not ON (if SA141 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 ends the transmission process and returns the process to SA6 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA141 that the reception completion flag is set to ON (SA141 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 sets the reception completion flag to OFF (SA142).

Next, the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a privileged command (SA143). Specifically, the control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer, and if the received data contains a privileged command ID (any of SI, ST, SA, SB, SC, or SW shown in FIG. 40), it determines that the received command is a privileged command, and if it does not, it determines that the received command is not a privileged command.

When it is determined in SA143 that the received command is a privileged command (SA143 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs a privileged answer transmission process (SA144). In the privileged answer transmission process, the control LSI 300 performs various transmission processes according to the received privileged command. The specific contents of the privileged answer transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the transmission process and returns the process to SA6 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

When it is determined in SA143 that the received command is not a privileged command (SA143 is judged as NO), the control LSI 300 performs a general answer transmission process (SA145). In the general answer transmission process, the control LSI 300 performs various transmission processes according to the received general command. The specific contents of the general answer transmission process will be explained later with reference to FIG. 62. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the transmission process and returns the process to SA6 of the door monitoring unit main process (see FIG. 48).

(13) Privileged Answer Transmission Processing Next, the privileged answer transmission processing in SA144 of the transmission processing (see Fig. 59) will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the privileged answer transmission processing in this embodiment.

In the privileged answer transmission process, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the received command is a private key setting command (SA151). The control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer of the RAM 304, and if the received data contains "SW", which is the ID of the private key setting command, determines that the privileged command is a private key setting command, and if "SW" is not contained, determines that it is not a private key setting command.

When SA151 determines that the received command is not a private key setting command (SA151 judges NO), the control LSI 300 performs the process of SA155 described below. On the other hand, when SA151 determines that the received command is a private key setting command (SA151 judges YES), the control LSI 300 determines whether the private key stored in the receive buffer, i.e., the private key associated with the received private key setting command, matches the private key stored in the private key storage area of the EEPROM 305 (SA152).

When it is determined in the process of SA152 that the two match (SA152 returns a YES judgment), a transmission process is performed to transmit an answer indicating that the setting result is OK to the host device (SA153). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the privileged answer transmission process.

When it is determined in the process of SA152 that the two do not match (SA152 is judged as NO), a transmission process is performed to transmit an answer indicating that the setting result is NG to the host device (SA154). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the privileged answer transmission process.

Returning to the explanation of SA151, when it is determined that the received command is not a private key setting command (SA151 is judged as NO), the control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer of RAM 304 and identifies the received privileged command (SA155).

Next, the control LSI 300 performs a transmission process (SA156) to transmit an answer corresponding to the command identified in SA155 to the host device. Then, the control LSI 300 ends the privileged answer transmission process. In SA153 and SA154, an answer is transmitted to the host device, with the answer ID corresponding to the ID of the received privileged command and information indicating "setting result OK" or "setting result NG". However, in SA156, since there is no information to accompany the answer ID, only the answer ID corresponding to the ID of the received privileged command is transmitted to the host device as the answer.

(14) General Answer Transmission Processing Next, the general answer transmission processing in SA145 of the transmission processing (see Fig. 60) will be described with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of the general answer transmission processing in this embodiment.

In the general command reception process, the control LSI 300 first determines whether the received general command is a serial ID command (SA161). When it is determined in SA161 that the received general command is a serial ID command (SA161 returns YES), the control LSI 300 performs answer transmission process (serial ID) to transmit the serial ID acquired in the serial ID command reception process (SA102 in FIG. 57) to the host device (SA162). The control LSI 300 then ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA161 that the received general command is not a serial ID command (SA161 is a NO judgement), the control LSI 300 judges whether the received command is a version request command or not (SA163). When it is determined in SA163 that the received general command is a version request command (SA163 is a YES judgement), the control LSI 300 performs an answer transmission process (version) to transmit the program version acquired in the version request command reception process (see SA104 in FIG. 57) to the host device (SA164). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA163 that the received general command is not a version request command (SA163 is a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a random number command or not (SA165). When the control LSI 300 determines in SA165 that the received general command is a random number command (SA165 is a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs an answer transmission process (random number) in which the random number generated in the random number command reception process (see FIG. 58) and stored in the random number storage area of RAM 304 is transmitted to the host device (SA166). The control LSI 300 that performs the process of SA166 constitutes a specific information transmission means. Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA165 that the received general command is not a random number command (SA165 is a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a login command or not (SA167). When it is determined in SA167 that the received general command is a login command (SA167 is a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 refers to the login flag storage area of RAM 304 and performs an answer transmission process (login flag state) that transmits information indicating the state (ON or OFF) of the login flag set in the login command reception process (see FIG. 59) to the host device (SA168). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA167 that the received general command is not a login command (SA167 returns NO), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a logout command (SA169). When it is determined in SA169 that the received general command is a logout command, the control LSI 300 refers to the login flag storage area of RAM 304, and performs answer transmission processing (login flag status) to transmit information indicating the status (OFF) of the login flag set in the logout command reception processing (see SA110 in FIG. 57) to the host device (SA170). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA169 that the received general command is not a logout command (SA169 is a NO judgement), the control LSI 300 judges whether the received command is a clock read command or not (SA171). When it is determined in SA171 that the received general command is a clock read command (SA171 is a YES judgement), the control LSI 300 performs an answer transmission process (RTC) to transmit the current time acquired in the clock read command reception process (SA112 in FIG. 57) to the host device (SA172). Thereafter, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA171 that the received general command is not a clock read command (SA171 is a NO judgement), the control LSI 300 judges whether the received command is a latest number command or not (SA173). When it is determined in SA173 that the received general command is a latest number command (SA173 is a YES judgement), the control LSI 300 performs an answer transmission process (latest number) to transmit the latest number acquired in the latest number command reception process (SA114 in FIG. 57) to the host device (SA174). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA173 that the received general command is not the latest number command (SA172 is a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is an open/close history information read command (SA175). When it is determined in SA175 that the received general command is an open/close history information read command (SA175 is a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs an answer transmission process (open/close history information) to transmit to the host device the open/close history information stored in the open/close history storage area of the EEPROM 305 corresponding to the number associated with the open/close history information read command obtained in the open/close history information read command reception process (see SA116 in FIG. 57) (SA176). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA175 that the received general command is not an open/close history information read command (SA175 is a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is an open/close history information number command (SA177). When it is determined in SA177 that the received general command is an open/close history information number command (SA177 is a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs an answer transmission process (open/close history information number) that transmits the value of the history counter acquired in the open/close history information number command reception process (SA118 in FIG. 57) to the host device (SA178). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA177 that the received general command is not an opening/closing history information number command (SA177 is a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received command is a status read command (SA179). When it is determined in SA179 that the received general command is a status read command (SA179 is a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs an answer transmission process (status) to transmit the opening/closing history information stored in the first detection result storage area of RAM 304 obtained in the status read command reception process (SA120 in FIG. 57) to the host device (SA180). Then, the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received general command is not a status read command (SA179 returns NO), the control LSI 300 ends the general answer transmission process.

In the process of determining the type of command received in the general answer transmission process (SA161, SA163, SA165, SA167, SA169, SA171, SA173, SA175, SA177, SA179), the control LSI 300 refers to the receive buffer and determines the type of command based on the command ID included in the received data.

In the answer transmission process (SA162, SA164, SA166, SA168, SA170, SA172, SA174, SA176, SA178, SA180) in the general answer transmission process, an answer with an ID for the answer corresponding to the ID of the received general command and various information (information shown in parentheses in SA162, SA164, SA166, SA168, SA170, SA172, SA174, SA176, SA178, SA180 in Figure 62) is sent to the host device.

(Processing performed by the host device)
Next, various processes performed by the host device will be described with reference to Figures 63 to 78, taking as an example the processes performed by the sub-CPU 201 provided on the sub-control board 72, which is an example of a host device.

Here, the sub-SRAM 203b has a serial ID storage area, a secret key storage area, a history counter storage area, a latest number storage area, 128 opening/closing history information storage areas, and a program version storage area, similar to those of the EEPROM 305. The serial ID storage area of the sub-SRAM 203b stores the serial ID of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 in advance. The secret key storage area of the sub-SRAM 203b stores the same secret key as the secret key stored in the EEPROM 305 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The program version storage area stores the version of the program executed by the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 in advance. The history counter storage area, latest number storage area, and 128 opening/closing history information storage areas store the value of the history counter, latest number, and opening/closing history information received from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The sub-SRAM 203b constitutes a setting side storage means.

In addition, the sub-DRAM 203a is formed with a sub-reception completion flag storage area, a sub-summ counter storage area, a sub-ETX reception flag storage area, and a sub-reception counter storage area, which are similar to the reception completion flag storage area, the thumb counter storage area, the ETX reception flag storage area, and the reception counter storage area, which are similar to the RAM 304. In addition, the sub-DRAM 203a is formed with a password storage area, a transmission buffer, and a reception buffer, which are similar to the RAM 304. In addition, the sub-DRAM 203a is formed with a status storage area that stores opening and closing history information associated with the answer of the status command transmitted from the 24h door monitoring unit 61. In addition, the sub-DRAM 203a is formed with a first door monitoring counter storage area in which the value of the first door monitoring counter to which 1 is added in SA232 of the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68) described later is stored, and a second door monitoring counter storage area in which the value of the second door monitoring counter to which 1 is added in SA235 of the same task is stored. In addition, the sub-DRAM 203a is formed with a privilege flag storage area, which will be described later. The sub-DRAM 203a constitutes the setting side authentication information storage means.

(1) Hall Menu Task First, the hall menu task performed by the sub-CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 63. Fig. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the hall menu task in this embodiment.

The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu used when changing or checking the settings of the slot machine 1. The hall menu task is performed by the sub-CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle (a predetermined time, for example 33 msec, in this embodiment) after the power-on process on the sub-side is performed.

First, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting key has changed from OFF to ON (SA201). In this process, when the sub-CPU 201 receives a setting change start command sent from the main CPU 101 in response to the operation of the setting key switch 52, the sub-CPU 201 determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON.

When it is determined in SA102 that the setting key has not changed from OFF to ON (SA102 returns NO), the sub-CPU 201 performs the process of SA101 again. In other words, the sub-CPU 201 repeats the process of SA201 until it is determined that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON.

When it is determined in SA201 that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON (SA201 judges YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs a hole menu display process to display a hole menu screen (not shown) on the display device (sub-display device 220 in this embodiment) (SA202). The sub-CPU 201 displays icons corresponding to each of the selectable hole menus [Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change/confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting], [Alarm setting], and "Maintenance" on the hole menu screen. In addition to the items shown in FIG. 64, etc., the hole menu can also select and determine, for example, the power saving mode setting, the limit setting, and the automatic settlement setting described above.

To check various information and settings or change various settings, the operator touches an icon included in the hole menu screen to select one of the hole menus displayed on the hole menu screen. When the main display device 210 is used as the display device, for example, a selection icon (e.g., a cross key) and a decision icon may be displayed on the sub-display device 220, and the selection may be confirmed by operating the icon. Also, the selection items may be moved one by one by operating the performance button 10a, and the selection may be confirmed by operating the performance button 10b. Alternatively, an operation unit such as a jog dial or a cross key may be provided as a group of performance buttons, and the selection may be confirmed by operating the operation unit.

After the hole menu display process in SA202, the sub-CPU 201 performs hole menu processing (SA203). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing according to the selected hole menu. The specific contents of the hole menu processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

Next, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting key has been turned off (SA204). In this process, when the sub-CPU 201 receives a setting change end command sent from the main CPU 101 in response to the operation of the setting key switch 52, the sub-CPU 201 determines that the setting key has been turned off.

When it is determined in SA204 that the setting key has not been changed from on to off (SA204 returns NO), the sub-CPU 201 returns the process to SA203.

When it is determined in SA204 that the setting key has changed from on to off (SA204 returns YES), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a setting change has been made in the hall menu processing (SA203) (SA205).

When it is determined in SA205 that a setting change has been made (SA205 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs a setting change initialization process to perform various initializations associated with the setting change (SA206), and transfers processing to SA207. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA205 that a setting change has not been made (SA205 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 transfers processing to SA207.

In SA207, the sub-CPU 201 performs a game screen return display process (SA207). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 displays on the display device an image for effects to be displayed when playing a game, and an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot machine 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. Then, after processing SA207, the sub-CPU 201 transfers the process to SA201.

(2) Hole Menu Processing Next, the hole menu processing (SA203) in the hole menu task (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the hole menu processing in this embodiment.

In the hall menu processing, the sub-CPU 201 first performs a hall menu selection process (SA211) to select the hall menu for which various information and settings are to be confirmed or various settings are to be changed based on the operation by the operator.

Next, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in SA211 is [Time setting] or not (SA212). If it is determined in SA212 that the selected hall menu is [Time setting] (SA212 returns YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs a time setting process (SA213). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) on the display device, allowing the operator to confirm and change the time that has been set.

If it is determined that the hole menu selected in SA211 is not [Time Setting] (SA212 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in SA211 is [Total Medal Information] or not (SA214). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [Total Medal Information] (SA214 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs total medal information processing (SA215). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 displays a total medal information screen (not shown) on the display device, allowing the operator to check the total medal information.

If it is determined that the hole menu selected in SA211 is not [Total medal information] (SA214 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in SA211 is [Change settings/Confirm] (SA216). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [Change settings/Confirm] (SA216 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs a setting change/confirmation process (SA217). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 displays a setting change/confirmation screen (not shown) on the display device, allowing the operator to confirm and change the settings.

If it is determined that the hole menu selected in SA211 is not [Change/Check Settings] (SA216 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in SA211 is [Error Information History] (SA218). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [Error Information History] (SA218 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs error information history processing (SA219). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (not shown) on the display device, allowing the operator to check and change the error information history.

If it is determined that the hall menu selected in SA211 is not [Error Information History] (SA218 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in SA211 is [Monitoring History] or not (SA220). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Monitoring History] (SA220 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (SA221). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 displays a monitoring history screen showing the opening and closing history information of the lower door mechanism DD on the display device, allowing the operator to check the monitoring history. The specific contents of the monitoring history screen will be explained later with reference to FIG. 65.

If it is determined that the hole menu selected in SA221 is not [Monitoring History] (SA220 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in SA211 is [Warning Display Setting] or not (SA222). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [Warning Display Setting] (SA222 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a warning display setting process (SA223). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen on the display device, allowing the operator to confirm and change the warning display setting. The specific contents of the warning display setting will be described later with reference to FIG. 66. The sub-CPU 201 performing the process of SA223 constitutes a period setting means.

If it is determined that the hole menu selected in SA211 is not [Warning Display Setting] (SA222 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in SA211 is [Alarm Setting] or not (SA224). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [Alarm Setting] (SA224 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs an alarm setting process (SA225). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 displays an alarm setting screen (not shown) on the display device, allowing the operator to confirm and change the alarm setting.

If it is determined that the hall menu selected in SA211 is not [Alert Setting] (SA224 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in SA211 is [Maintenance] (SA226). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Maintenance] (SA226 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (SA227).

If it is determined that the hall menu selected in SA211 is not [Maintenance] (SA226 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 ends the hall menu processing and returns the processing to SA204 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 63).

Furthermore, after processing SA215, SA217, SA219, SA221, SA223, SA225, and SA227, the sub-CPU 201 ends the hall menu processing and returns the processing to SA204 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 63).

Next, the monitoring history screen that the sub-CPU 201 displays on the display device in the monitoring history process (SA221 in FIG. 64) of the hall menu process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the monitoring history screen in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 65, the monitoring history table is located approximately in the center of the monitoring history screen. The monitoring history table is a list of opening and closing history information stored in the sub SRAM 203b. The monitoring history table can display 10 pieces of opening and closing history information.

The monitoring history screen shown in FIG. 65 displays the latest 10 pieces of opening/closing history information stored in the sub-SRAM 203b, but other opening/closing history information stored in the sub-SRAM 203b can be displayed by swiping up or down on the monitoring history screen, and opening/closing history information prior to the latest 10 pieces of opening/closing history information can be displayed by swiping down on the monitoring history screen where the latest 10 pieces of opening/closing history information are displayed. Note that the number of opening/closing history information displayed on the monitoring history screen can be set as appropriate.

In addition, the status information ("UNIT STATUS"), serial ID ("UNIT SERIAL"), and program version ("UNIT VERSION") of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 are displayed at the top of the monitoring history screen. The sub-CPU 201 executes the startup sequence in the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68) described below, and displays the status information, serial ID, and program version obtained from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. In addition, an icon corresponding to "Back" is displayed in the lower left corner of the monitoring history screen, and when this icon is selected, the display of the monitoring history screen is closed and the screen for selecting the hall menu is displayed again.

Next, the specific contents of the warning display setting process (SA223 in FIG. 64) of the hole menu process performed by the sub-CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a warning display setting screen in this embodiment.

Here, in the Pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, a warning display is performed when the Pachislot machine 1 is started up (when the power is turned on), displaying opening/closing history information indicating opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred during a specified time, for example while the power of the Pachislot machine 1 was OFF. In the warning display setting, this specified time and the time for which the warning display is performed (display time) are set. The specific contents of the warning display screen that is displayed on the display device when a warning is displayed will be explained later with reference to FIG. 67.

As described above, in the warning display setting process of the hall menu processing (SA223 in FIG. 64), the sub-CPU 201 displays the warning display setting screen shown in FIG. 66. At the top of the warning display setting screen, a character string is displayed stating, "The monitoring history for the specified time set here will be displayed as a warning at startup." In addition, approximately in the center of the warning display setting screen, the initial value or the previously set display time and the specified time are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 66, the display time can be set within the range of 1 second to 99 minutes and 59 seconds. The display time is displayed using four digits (two digits for minutes and two digits for seconds). The operator, for example, touches the digit that they wish to set. This causes a numeric keypad image containing the numbers 0 to 9 to be displayed, and the value of that digit can be selected by touching that number. In this way, the display time can be changed by touching the digit that you wish to set and selecting a value.

As shown in FIG. 66, the start time and end time of the specified time are each displayed with four digits (two digits for hours and two digits for minutes). The operator can change the start time and end time of the specified time by touching the digit he or she wants to change and selecting a number from the displayed numeric keypad image, in the same way as when changing the displayed time.

An icon corresponding to "Save" and an icon corresponding to "Back" are displayed in the lower left corner of the warning display setting screen. When the icon corresponding to "Save" is selected, the sub-CPU 201 stores the display time displayed on the warning display setting screen and the start time and end time of the specified time in the sub-SRAM 203b. In addition, when the icon corresponding to "Save" or "Back" is selected, the sub-CPU 201 ends the display of the warning display setting screen.

Next, the warning display screen displayed on the display device when a warning is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the warning display screen in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 67, the warning display screen displays opening and closing history information that indicates the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred within the specified time set in the warning display setting process. In addition, an icon corresponding to "End" is displayed in the lower left corner of the warning display screen.

When the slot machine 1 is started, the sub-CPU 201 performs the power-on process on the sub side, and then in the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68) that starts to be executed afterwards, after the full history acquisition sequence is executed, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the sub-SRAM 203b, acquires (extracts) the opening and closing history information within the specified time from the stored opening and closing history information, and displays a warning display screen showing the acquired opening and closing history information on the display device. After displaying the warning display screen, the sub-CPU 201 periodically acquires the current time from the sub-RTC 208, and ends the display of the warning display screen when the elapsed time since the warning display screen was displayed reaches the display time stored in the sub-SRAM 203b or when the icon corresponding to "end" is selected. The sub-CPU 201 that executes the full history acquisition sequence at the time of startup and acquires the opening and closing history information constitutes the opening and closing history acquisition means. The sub-CPU 201 that acquires (extracts) the opening and closing history information within the specified time from the opening and closing history information stored in the sub-SRAM 203b constitutes the opening and closing history extraction means.

If there is no opening/closing history information within the specified time in the sub-SRAM 203b, a warning display screen indicating that there is no opening/closing history information is displayed on the display device. In this case, a person who sees the warning display screen can understand that the lower door mechanism DD was not opened or closed within the specified time.

(3) Door Monitoring Task Next, the door monitoring task will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring task in this embodiment.

The door monitoring task begins execution when the slot machine 1 is started and after the power-on process on the sub side has been performed. In the door monitoring task, the sub CPU 201 first sets the above-mentioned startup sequence and the full history acquisition sequence as sequences to be executed (SA231).

Next, the sub-CPU 201 increments the first door monitoring counter by 1 (SA232). The value of the first door monitoring counter is stored in the first door monitoring counter storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a.

Next, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the value of the first door monitoring counter is 25 or greater (SA233). When the sub-CPU 201 determines in SA233 that the value of the first door monitoring counter is not 25 or greater (if SA233 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs the process of SA240, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 201 determines in SA233 that the value of the first door monitoring counter is 25 or greater (if SA233 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 clears the first door monitoring counter (SA234).

Next, the sub-CPU 201 increments the second door monitoring counter by 1 (SA235). The value of the second door monitoring counter is stored in the second door monitoring counter storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a.

Next, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the value of the second door monitoring counter is 7200 or greater (SA236). When the sub-CPU 201 determines in SA236 that the value of the second door monitoring counter is 7200 or greater (SA236 returns YES), the sub-CPU 201 sets the second status detection sequence as the sequence to be executed (SA237). In other words, the sequence to be executed that was set as the startup sequence and full history acquisition sequence in the processing of SA231 is changed to the second status detection sequence.

Next, the sub-CPU 201 clears the value of the second door monitoring counter (SA238). The sub-CPU 201 then performs the process of SA240, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA236 that the value of the second door monitoring counter is not equal to or greater than 7200 (SA236 returns NO), the sub-CPU 201 sets the first status detection sequence as the sequence to be executed (SA239). That is, the sequence to be executed that was set as the startup sequence and full history acquisition sequence in the processing of SA231 is changed to the first status detection sequence. Then, the sub-CPU 201 performs the processing of SA240 described below.

In SA240, the sub CPU 201 performs sequence control processing (SA280). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 executes the sequence set as the execution target in SA231 (No. 1 and No. 4 in FIG. 43), SA237 (No. 2 in FIG. 43, up to No. 3 depending on the conditions), or SA239 (No. 12 in FIG. 43).

Next, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a request (SA241). A request is when the sub-CPU 201 requests the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 to perform a specific operation, and is generated based on a specific trigger (such as the passage of a specific period of time) or input from the operator. When a request is generated, the sub-CPU 201 transmits a privileged command or a general command corresponding to the generated request to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. When it is determined in SA241 that there is no request (SA241 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 201 performs the process of SA243 described below.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA241 that a request has been received (SA241 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs door monitoring transmission processing (SA242). The specific contents of the door monitoring transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69. The sub-CPU 201 then performs processing in SA243, which will be described later.

In SA243, the sub-CPU 201 performs door monitoring reception processing (SA243). In the door monitoring reception processing, the sub-CPU 201 receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The specific contents of the door monitoring reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

After SA243, the sub-CPU 201 returns the process to SA232. Thereafter, the sub-CPU 201 repeats the processes of SA232 to SA243 every 20 msec. Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 500 msec for the first door monitoring counter to reach 25 or more. For this reason, the sub-CPU 201 executes the first status detection sequence every 500 msec. However, even if the timing is at a 500 msec cycle, the first status detection sequence is not executed when the second status detection sequence is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second door monitoring counter, which is incremented by 1 every 500 msec, reaches 7,200 or more at 3,600,000 msec (1 hour). Therefore, the sub-CPU 201 executes the second status detection sequence every hour. Note that the value compared with the first door monitoring counter in SA233 and the value compared with the second door monitoring counter in SA237 can be set as appropriate. In other words, the cycle for executing the first status detection sequence and the second status detection sequence can be set as appropriate.

Next, the specific contents of the door monitoring transmission process (SA242 in FIG. 68) of the door monitoring task will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring transmission process in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring transmission process, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the request is a privileged command (SA251). That is, it determines whether the request generated based on a predetermined trigger (elapse of a predetermined period of time, etc.) or input from the operator is a request related to a privileged command.

When it is determined in SA251 that the request is not a privileged command (SA251 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs the process of SA254 described below. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA251 that the request is a privileged command (SA251 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not the privilege flag stored in the privilege flag storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a is set to ON (SA252). When the sub-CPU 201 receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is permitted (OK), the privilege flag is set to ON in the login reception process described below (see FIG. 77).

When it is determined in SA252 that the privilege flag is not set to ON (SA252 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 ends the door monitoring transmission process. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA252 that the privilege flag is set to ON (SA252 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs door monitoring privilege command transmission process (SA253). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 transmits various privilege commands to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The specific contents of the door monitoring privilege command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

Returning now to the explanation of the processing of SA251, when it is determined that the request is not a privileged command (SA251 judges NO), the sub-CPU 201 performs door monitoring general command transmission processing (SA254). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 transmits various general commands to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The specific contents of the door monitoring general command transmission processing will be explained later with reference to FIG. 71.

(4) Door Monitoring Privileged Command Transmission Processing Next, the specific contents of the door monitoring privileged command transmission processing (SA253 in Fig. 69) of the door monitoring transmission processing by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring privileged command transmission processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring privileged command transmission process, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the privileged command related to the request is an initialization command (SA261). When it is determined in SA261 that the privileged command related to the request is an initialization command (if SA261 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (initialization) to transmit the initialization command to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 (SA262).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA261 that the privileged command related to the request is not an initialization command (SA261 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the privileged command related to the request is a clock set command (SA263). When it is determined in SA263 that the privileged command related to the request is a clock set command (SA263 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (RTC) to transmit the clock set command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA264). This clock set command is accompanied by information (setting side time information) indicating the year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week, which is time information indicating the time (setting side time) kept by the sub-RTC 208. The time kept by the sub-RTC 208 can be changed, for example, based on input from the operator (for example, if the host device is the sub-control circuit 200, the time setting process of the hall menu process (SA213 in FIG. 64)).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA263 that the privileged command related to the request is not a clock set command (SA263 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the privileged command related to the request is a monitoring interval time setting command (SA265). When it is determined in SA265 that the privileged command related to the request is a monitoring interval time setting command (SA265 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (interval time) to transmit a monitoring interval time setting command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA266). This monitoring interval time setting command is accompanied by a count number based on, for example, an input from the operator.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA265 that the privileged command related to the request is not a monitoring interval time setting command (SA265 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not the privileged command related to the request is a recording start time setting command (SA267). When it is determined in SA267 that the privileged command related to the request is a recording start time setting command (SA267 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (start time) that transmits a recording start time setting command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA268). Note that this recording start time setting command is accompanied by a count number based on, for example, an input from the operator.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA267 that the privileged command related to the request is not a recording start time setting command (SA267 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not the privileged command related to the request is a recording mode setting command (SA269). When it is determined in SA269 that the privileged command related to the request is a recording mode setting command (SA269 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (recording setting) that transmits a recording mode setting command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA270). Note that this recording mode setting command is accompanied by information indicating the type of recording mode ("constant recording mode" or "non-recording mode") based on, for example, input from the operator.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA269 that the privileged command related to the request is not a recording mode setting command (SA269 is NO), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the privileged command related to the request is a private key setting command (SA271). When it is determined in SA271 that the privileged command related to the request is a private key setting command (SA271 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (private key) to transmit a private key setting command to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 (SA272). Note that this private key setting command is accompanied by the private key related to the setting. The sub-CPU 201 then ends the door monitoring privileged command and returns the process to SA243 of the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68).

Furthermore, after processing SA262, SA264, SA266, SA268, SA270, SA272, and SA227, the sub-CPU 201 terminates the door monitoring privilege command and returns processing to SA243 of the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68).

(5) Door Monitoring General Command Transmission Processing Next, the specific contents of the door monitoring general command transmission processing (SA254 in Fig. 69) of the door monitoring transmission processing by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. Fig. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring general command transmission processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring general command transmission process, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the general command related to the request is a serial ID command (SA281). When it is determined in SA281 that the general command related to the request is a serial ID command (if SA281 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (serial ID) to transmit the serial ID command to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 (SA282).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA281 that the general command related to the request is not a serial ID command (SA281 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the general command related to the request is a version request command (SA283). When it is determined in SA283 that the general command related to the request is a version request command (SA283 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (version request) to transmit a version request command to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 (SA284).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA283 that the general command related to the request is not a version request command (SA283 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the general command related to the request is a random number command (SA285). When it is determined in SA285 that the general command related to the request is a random number command (SA285 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (random number) to transmit a random number command to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 (SA286).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA285 that the general command related to the request is not a random number command (SA285 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not the general command related to the request is a login command (SA287). When it is determined in SA287 that the general command related to the request is a login command (SA287 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs door monitoring command transmission processing (login) to transmit a login command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA288). Note that this login command is accompanied by a password that is generated, for example, in the random number reception processing (FIG. 76) described below and stored in the password storage area. The sub-CPU 201 that performs the processing of SA288 constitutes authentication information transmission means.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA287 that the general command related to the request is not a login command (SA287 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the general command related to the request is a logout command (SA289). When it is determined in SA289 that the general command related to the request is a logout command (SA289 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (logout) to transmit a logout command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA290).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA289 that the general command related to the request is not a logout command (SA289 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not the general command related to the request is a clock read command (SA291). When it is determined in SA291 that the general command related to the request is a clock read command (SA291 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (clock read) to transmit the clock read command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA292).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA291 that the general command related to the request is not a clock read command (SA291 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the general command related to the request is a latest number command (SA293). When it is determined in SA293 that the general command related to the request is a latest number command (SA293 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (latest number) to transmit the latest number command to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 (SA294).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA293 that the general command related to the request is not the latest number command (SA293 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the general command related to the request is an opening/closing history information read command (SA295). When it is determined in SA295 that the general command related to the request is an opening/closing history information read command (SA295 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (history information read) that transmits an opening/closing history information read command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (SA296). Note that this opening/closing history information read command is accompanied by information indicating the number of the opening/closing history information storage area from which the opening/closing history information is to be read.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA295 that the general command related to the request is not an opening/closing history information read command (SA295 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 judges whether the general command related to the request is an opening/closing history information number command (SA297). When it is determined in SA297 that the general command related to the request is an opening/closing history information number command (SA297 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (opening/closing history information number) to transmit the opening/closing history information number command to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 (SA298).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA297 that the general command related to the request is not an opening/closing history information number command (SA297 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the general command related to the request is a status read command (SA299). When it is determined in SA299 that the general command related to the request is a status read command (SA299 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a door monitoring command transmission process (status read) that transmits a status read command to the 24-h door monitoring unit 61 (SA300). The sub-CPU 201 then ends the door monitoring general command and returns the process to SA243 of the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68).

Furthermore, after processing SA282, SA284, SA286, SA288, SA290, SA292, SA294, SA296, SA298, and SA300, the sub-CPU 201 ends the door monitoring general command and returns processing to SA243 of the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68).

(6) Door monitoring reception interrupt processing Next, the door monitoring reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 201 every time it receives one byte of command or data from the 24h door monitoring unit 61 will be described with reference to Fig. 72. Fig. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the door monitoring reception interrupt processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring reception interrupt process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the received data is "STX" (SA301). When it is determined in SA301 that the received data is "STX" (if SA301 returns a YES judgment), the sub CPU 201 sets the reception counter value stored in the sub reception buffer and sub reception counter storage area of the sub DRAM 203a to "1", and sets the sub ETX reception flag stored in the sub ETX reception flag storage area of the sub DRAM 203a to OFF (SA302). The sub CPU 201 then ends the door monitoring reception interrupt process.

On the other hand, when SA301 determines that the received data is not "STX" (SA301 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 stores the received data in the sub-reception buffer corresponding to the value of the sub-reception counter stored in the sub-reception counter storage area (SA303).

Then, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the sub reception counter (SA304). The sub CPU 201 then determines whether the received data is "ETX" (SA305). When it determines in SA305 that the received data is "ETX" (if SA305 returns a YES judgment), the sub CPU 201 sets the sub ETX reception flag stored in the sub ETX reception flag storage area of the sub DRAM 203a to ON. It also clears the value of the sub sum counter of the sub DRAM 203a (SA306). The sub CPU 201 then ends the door monitoring reception interrupt process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA305 that the received data is not "ETX" (SA305 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the sub-ETX reception flag stored in the sub-ETX reception flag storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a is set to ON (SA307). When it is determined in SA307 that the sub-ETX reception flag is set to ON (SA307 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 ends the door monitoring reception interrupt process.

When it is determined in SA307 that the sub-ETX reception flag is not set to ON (SA307 returns NO), 1 is added to the value of the sub-sum counter (SA308).

Next, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the value of the sub-sum counter is 2 (SA309). If it is determined in SA309 that the value of the sub-sum counter is not 2 (SA309 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 ends the door monitoring reception interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined in SA309 that the value of the sub-sum counter is 2 (SA309 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 sets the sub reception completion flag stored in the sub reception completion flag storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a to ON (SA301), and ends the door monitoring reception interrupt process.

(7) Door Monitoring Reception Processing Next, the door monitoring reception processing in SA243 of the door monitoring task (see Fig. 68) will be described with reference to Fig. 73. Fig. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the door monitoring reception processing in this embodiment.

In the door monitoring reception process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the sub reception completion flag stored in the sub reception completion flag storage area of the sub DRAM 203a is set to ON (SA311). When it is determined in SA3111 that the sub reception completion flag is not set to ON (SA311 returns NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the door monitoring reception process and returns the process to SA232 of the door monitoring task (see FIG. 68).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA311 that the sub reception completion flag is set to ON (SA311 returns a YES judgment), the sub CPU 201 sets the sub reception completion flag to OFF (SA312).

Then, the sub-CPU 201 performs a privileged answer reception process (SA313). In the privileged answer reception process, the sub-CPU 201 performs various processes corresponding to the answer received from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 as a reply to the transmitted privileged command. The specific contents of the privileged answer reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Then, the sub-CPU 201 performs a general answer reception process (SA314). In the general answer reception process, the sub-CPU 201 performs various processes corresponding to the answer received from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 as a reply to the transmitted general command. The specific contents of the general answer reception process will be explained later with reference to FIG. 75. Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the door monitoring reception process.

(8) Privileged Answer Reception Processing Next, the privileged answer reception processing in SA313 of the door monitoring reception processing (see Fig. 73) will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Fig. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the privileged answer reception processing in this embodiment.

In the privileged answer reception process, the sub-CPU 201 first determines whether the received answer is an answer to an initialization command (SA321). When it is determined in SA321 that the received answer is an answer to an initialization command (SA321 returns YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs initialization reception processing to confirm the answer contents (SA322). Thereafter, the sub-CPU 201 ends the privileged answer reception process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA321 that the received answer is not an answer to an initialization command (SA321 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a clock set command (SA323). When it is determined in SA323 that the received answer is an answer to a clock set command (SA323 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs clock set reception processing to confirm the contents of the answer (SA324). Thereafter, the sub-CPU 201 ends the privileged answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA323 that the received answer is not an answer to a clock set command (SA323 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a monitoring interval time setting command (SA325). When it is determined in SA325 that the received answer is an answer to a monitoring interval time setting command (SA325 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs a monitoring interval time setting reception process to confirm the answer contents (SA326). Thereafter, the sub-CPU 201 ends the privileged answer reception process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA325 that the received answer is not an answer to a monitoring interval time setting command (SA325 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a recording start time setting command (SA327). When it is determined in SA327 that the received answer is an answer to a recording start time setting command (SA327 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs recording start time setting reception processing to confirm the answer contents (SA328). Thereafter, the sub-CPU 201 ends the privileged answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA327 that the received answer is not an answer to a recording start time setting command (SA327 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a recording mode setting command (SA329). When it is determined in SA329 that the received answer is an answer to a recording mode setting command (SA329 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs recording mode setting reception processing to confirm the answer contents (SA330). Thereafter, the sub-CPU 201 ends the privileged answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA329 that the received answer is not an answer to a recording mode setting command (SA329 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a private key setting command (SA331). When it is determined in SA331 that the received answer is not an answer to a private key setting command (SA331 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 ends the privilege answer reception process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA331 that the received answer is an answer to a private key setting command (SA331 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 checks the answer content and judges whether the setting result is NG or not (SA332). When it is determined in SA332 that the setting result is not NG (SA332 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 ends the privileged answer receiving process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA332 that the setting result is NG (SA332 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 requests the display device to display a setting NG screen indicating that the private key could not be set (SA333), and causes the display device to display the setting NG screen. Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the privileged answer receiving process.

In the process of determining the type of the received answer in the privileged answer reception process (SA321, SA323, SA325, SA327, SA329, SA331), the sub-CPU 201 refers to the reception buffer of the sub-DRAM 203a and determines the type of the answer based on the command ID (see FIG. 40) included in the received data (answer).

(9) General Answer Reception Processing Next, the general answer reception processing in SA314 of the door monitoring reception processing (see Fig. 73) will be described with reference to Fig. 75. Fig. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the general answer reception processing in this embodiment.

In the general answer reception process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the received answer is an answer to a serial ID command (SA341). When it is determined in SA341 that the received answer is an answer to a serial ID command (SA341 returns YES), the sub CPU 201 performs serial ID reception processing (SA342). In this process, the sub CPU 201 compares the serial ID stored in the serial ID storage area of the sub SRAM 203b with the serial ID associated with the received answer, and if they do not match, performs a third warning display process that displays the warning screen shown in FIG. 47 on the display device. The sub CPU 201 then ends the general answer reception process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA341 that the received answer is not an answer to a serial ID command (SA341 returns a NO judgment), the control LSI 300 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a version request command (SA343). When it is determined in SA343 that the received answer is an answer to a version request command (SA343 returns a YES judgment), the control LSI 300 performs version reception processing (SA344). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 compares the program version stored in the version storage area of the sub-SRAM 203b with the program version associated with the received answer, and if they do not match, performs the second warning display processing described above. Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the general answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA343 that the received answer is not an answer to a version request command (SA343 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a random number command (SA345). When it is determined in SA345 that the received answer is an answer to a random number command (SA345 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs random number reception processing (SA346). The specific contents of the random number reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 76. The sub-CPU 201 then ends the general answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA345 that the received answer is not an answer to a random number command (SA345 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a login command (SA347). When it is determined in SA347 that the received answer is an answer to a login command (SA347 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs login reception processing (SA348). The specific contents of the login reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. The sub-CPU 201 then ends the general answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA347 that the received answer is not an answer to a login command (SA347 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a logout command (SA349). When it is determined in SA349 that the received answer is an answer to a logout command (SA349 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 sets the privilege flag stored in the privilege flag storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a to OFF (SA350). Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the general answer receiving process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA349 that the received answer is not an answer to a logout command (SA349 is a NO judgement), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a clock read command (SA351). When it is determined in SA351 that the received answer is an answer to a clock read command (SA351 is a YES judgement), the sub-CPU 201 performs clock read reception processing (SA352). The specific contents of the clock read reception processing will be explained later with reference to FIG. 78. Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the general answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA351 that the received answer is not an answer to a clock read command (SA351 returns NO), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a latest number command (SA353). When it is determined in SA353 that the received answer is an answer to a latest number command (SA353 returns YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs latest number reception processing (SA354). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 stores (overwrites) the latest number associated with the answer in the latest number storage area of the sub-SRAM 203b. Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the general answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA353 that the received answer is not an answer to the latest number command (SA353 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is for an open/close history information read command (SA355). When it is determined in SA355 that the received answer is an answer to an open/close history information read command (SA355 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs open/close history information reception processing (SA356). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 stores the open/close history information associated with the answer in the open/close history storage area of the sub-SRAM 203b. Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the general answer reception processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA355 that the received answer is not an answer to the open/close history information read command (SA355 is a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to an open/close history information number command (SA357). When it is determined in SA357 that the received answer is an answer to an open/close history information number command (SA357 is a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 performs processing at the time of receiving the open/close history information number (SA358). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 stores the number of open/close history information items associated with the answer. Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the general answer receiving processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA357 that the received answer is not an answer to the opening/closing history information number command (SA357 is NO), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the received answer is an answer to a status read command (SA359). When it is determined in SA359 that the received answer is an answer to a status read command (SA359 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs status reception processing (SA360). In this processing, the sub-CPU 201 stores the opening/closing history information associated with the answer in the status storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a, and when the door opening/closing status of the opening/closing history information is OPEN, if the door opening status has not been notified, it notifies the user that the door is open (for example, by displaying "Door is open" on the display unit and emitting a warning sound from all or any of the speakers). When the door opening/closing status of the opening/closing history information is CLOSE, if the door opening status is notified, the notification of the door opening status is terminated. The sub-CPU 201, which performs processing when a status read command is received, constitutes a status acquisition means. Then, the control LSI 300 ends processing when a general command is received.

On the other hand, when SA359 determines that the received answer is not an answer to a status read command (SA359 returns NO), the sub-CPU 201 ends the general answer reception process.

(10) Random Number Reception Processing Next, the random number reception processing in SA346 of the general answer reception processing (see Fig. 75) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number reception processing in this embodiment.

During random number reception processing, the sub-CPU 201 obtains the private key stored in the private key storage area of the sub-SRAM 203b (SA361).

Next, the sub-CPU 201 obtains the random number received from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 from the receiving buffer of the sub-DRAM 203a (SA362).

Then, the sub-CPU 201 performs a password generation process to generate a password using the acquired random number and private key (SA363). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 generates a password using the same method (calculation) as SA123 of the random number command reception process (see FIG. 58) executed by the control LSI 300 described above. The sub-CPU 201 that performs the process of SA363 constitutes the setting side authentication information generation means.

Next, the sub-CPU 201 stores the generated password in the password storage area of the sub-SRAM 203b (SA364). The sub-CPU 201 then ends the random number reception process.

(11) Login Receiving Process Next, the login receiving process in SA348 of the general answer receiving process (see Fig. 75) will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the login receiving process in this embodiment.

During login processing, the sub-CPU 201 obtains an answer to the login command from the receive buffer of the sub-DRAM 203a (SA371).

Then, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the content of the acquired answer indicates that login is permitted (OK) (SA372). In the process of SA372, when it is determined that the content of the acquired answer indicates that login is permitted (OK) (if SA372 returns YES), the sub-CPU 201 sets the privilege flag stored in the privilege flag storage area of the sub-DRAM 203a to ON (SA373). Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the login reception process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA372 that the content of the acquired answer is not login permission (OK) (SA372 is a NO determination), the sub-CPU 201 sets the privilege flag to OFF (SA374). Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the login reception process. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 causes the display device to display the warning screen shown in FIG. 46.

(12) Clock Read Reception Processing Next, the clock read reception processing in SA352 of the general answer reception processing (see Fig. 75) will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the clock read reception processing in this embodiment.

In the clock read processing, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the receive buffer of the sub-DRAM 203a, compares the time information (date and time data) accompanying the answer to the clock read command with the time information acquired from the sub-RTC 208 of the sub-control board 72, and determines whether the difference is greater than a predetermined time (3 minutes in this embodiment) (SA381). Note that, although the embodiment describes an aspect in which the predetermined time is set to 3 minutes, this predetermined time can be set arbitrarily.

When it is determined in SA381 that the difference is 3 minutes or more (SA381 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 201 executes a clock set sequence (SA382). Then, the sub-CPU 201 ends the clock readout reception process. Note that the sub-CPU 201 executes a clock set sequence in SA382 as a result of the judgment in SA381, and transmits time information indicating the time (date and time) kept by the sub-RTC 208 in the sequence to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, constituting a setting side time transmission means.

When SA381 determines that the difference is not 3 minutes or more (SA381 returns a NO judgment), the sub-CPU 201 ends the clock readout reception process.

(13) Warning notification based on power outage period In gaming machines such as the pachislot machine 1 described above, by installing a 24-hour door monitoring unit with a battery, it is possible to monitor the opening and closing of the front door not only while power is being supplied but also while the power supply is stopped (also referred to as ``during power outage'' and ``power outage period''), and the sub-control circuit can report opening and closing information as the monitoring result of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (including the monitoring result during power outage) (see Figure 65), and can also report opening and closing information within a specified period of time (see Figure 67).

However, if the power outage lasts for a long period of time, the battery will run out of stored electricity, making monitoring by the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 impossible. In fact, due to the convenience of the manufacturer and the need for tasks such as delivery and installation of gaming machines, there may be cases where the power outage lasts for a long period of time, for example, during the period required to manufacture gaming machines at a factory depending on the number of orders, from the time the gaming machines are manufactured and shipped at the factory until they are installed in the hall, or the time between removing a gaming machine installed in one hall and moving it to another hall. As a result, monitoring by the 24-hour door monitoring unit becomes impossible due to the dead battery, and there is a risk that fraudulent acts will be committed at such times. However, the hall's operators (staff and managers) will not be able to recognize that monitoring by the 24-hour door monitoring unit has become impossible, which may lead to problems such as the possibility that such fraudulent acts will be overlooked.

In consideration of such issues, the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment issues a warning (one example of a specific warning) when the power-on period exceeds a predetermined period (threshold). This suggests the possibility that monitoring by the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is not possible due to a dead battery, and prompts the operator who turned on the power to visually check the inside of the pachislot machine 1 housing, thereby preventing fraudulent activity during the power-off period from being overlooked and minimizing damage caused by fraudulent activity. The following describes the technical details of the warning notification based on the power-off period in the pachislot machine 1.

The sub-CPU 201 in the pachislot machine 1 performs power-off processing when the power is cut off (disconnected), and performs power-on processing (see S302 in FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. Note that when the power is cut off, it is, for example, when the voltage supplied from the power supply device 34 falls below a predetermined power-off value, and when the power is turned on, it is, for example, when the voltage supplied from the power supply device 34 exceeds a predetermined power-on value. The power-off processing and power-on processing include processing for issuing a warning based on the power-off period. The processing for issuing a warning based on the power-off period out of the power-off processing and power-on processing is described below.

First, referring to FIG. 79, a process for issuing a warning based on the power interruption period will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for issuing a warning based on the power interruption period during the power interruption process.

When the power is cut off, the sub-CPU 201 obtains the current date and time (e.g., year/month/day hour:minute:second) from the sub-RTC 208 and saves the date and time information for identifying the date and time as a backup date and time in the backup memory (sub-SRAM 203b) (SA400). This makes it possible to identify the date and time when the power was cut off the next time the power is turned on and calculate the power cut period.

Then, the sub-CPU 201 creates (calculates) a sum value of the backup memory and stores the sum value in a predetermined sum value storage area of the backup memory (S401). For example, a judgment value is created by adding the backup date and time stored in the SA400 to the game information, various history information, various setting information, etc. as the sum value. The game information includes, for example, information for identifying the game state, the performance state, the performance data being executed, etc. The various history information includes, for example, information for identifying the occurrence history of errors, the monitoring history of the monitoring history screen (see FIG. 65), the opening and closing history of the warning display screen (see FIG. 67), the history of setting changes and setting confirmations, etc. The various setting information includes, for example, information for identifying the setting state of the power saving mode setting in the hall menu (for example, eco mode, volume, light emission amount, etc.).

Next, referring to Figs. 80 to 82, a process for issuing a warning based on the power interruption period during power-on processing and an example of a warning notification screen will be described. Fig. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for power-off elapsed time processing for issuing a warning based on the power interruption period during power-on processing. Fig. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a warning notification screen based on the power interruption period. Fig. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing during warning notification until the warning based on the power interruption period during power-on processing is terminated.

In the power-on process, various processes required for power-on, such as initialization process at power-on and backup data validity check process using the sum value saved in SA401 in FIG. 79, are performed, and then the power-off elapsed time process shown in FIG. 80 is performed only once. On the other hand, the warning notification process shown in FIG. 82 is a process executed after the power-off elapsed time process shown in FIG. 80 is performed during the power-on process, and is repeatedly executed during warning notification until the warning notification ends. Note that the processes such as the hall menu task shown in FIG. 63 and the door monitoring task shown in FIG. 68, and the processes for displaying the screens shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 67, can be executed after the power-on process (various processes including FIG. 80 and FIG. 82), as described above.

When the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process to obtain the backup date and time stored in the backup memory (SA410), and determines whether or not there is a backup date and time (i.e., it is stored and can be obtained) (SA411). If it is not determined that there is a backup date and time, the power OFF elapsed time process ends. For example, when the power is turned on for the first time in a power-on test performed when the gaming machine is completed at a factory, etc., there is no backup date and time because no power interruption has occurred. In addition, when there is no backup date and time, it also corresponds to, for example, information that is not normal date and time information (for example, within the range of "2000 to 2099" for the year (Gregorian calendar), and within the range of values that can actually be taken for the month/day hour:minute:second) is stored (for example, when information that is not normal is stored as the initial value, or when information that is not normal is stored due to a backup error, etc.).

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA411 that there is a backup date and time, the sub-CPU 201 acquires the current date and time from the sub-RTC 208 (SA412). Next, the sub-CPU 201 identifies a value obtained by subtracting the backup date and time from the current date and time acquired in SA412 (power interruption period, date and time difference), and determines whether the identified value is greater than (exceeds) a threshold value (SA413). The threshold value is set to a value equivalent to, for example, 30 days (=720 hours). Therefore, in SA413, it is determined whether the power interruption period exceeds 30 days. Note that the threshold value is not limited to a value equivalent to 30 days, but may be a value according to the storage capacity of the battery 302, and may be a value determined based on a time (number of days) verified by a demonstration test or the like as the time during which the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 can be operated only by the battery 302 (without being powered on) when the battery 302 is fully charged, and may be a value equivalent to a time (number of days) shorter than the average value of the verified time (number of days).

When it is not determined that the value obtained by subtracting the backup date and time from the current date and time acquired by SA412 is greater than the threshold value, the sub-RTC208 ends the power-off elapsed time processing. As a result, if the power outage period does not exceed the threshold value (e.g., 30 days), it is assumed that the battery has not run out and monitoring by the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 has been possible, and no warning is issued. As a result, it is possible to prevent warnings from being issued more frequently than necessary, and by improving the accuracy of the warning, it is possible to further increase the operator's vigilance and attention when the warning is issued.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the backup date and time from the current date and time obtained in SA412 is greater than the threshold value, the sub-RTC 208 sets the notification settings for a warning image (SA414), for a warning sound (SA415), for a warning lamp (SA416), and ends the power OFF elapsed time processing. By setting these notifications, a warning notification screen is displayed on the display device, the LED group is controlled to emit light in a warning light pattern, and the speaker group is controlled to output a warning sound.

As shown in FIG. 81, the warning notification screen displays a warning message image in the approximate center. The warning message image includes a suggestion image of a suggestion message that suggests the possibility of monitoring not being possible, such as "There may have been a period in which the 24-hour door monitoring unit was unable to monitor the opening and closing of the door," and a prompting image of a prompting message (which may also be called a warning message) that urges the operator to check the inside of the gaming machine, such as "Please check the inside of the gaming machine." This allows the operator to understand that the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 may not be able to monitor, which can increase the operator's vigilance and attention, and can prompt the operator to check whether any fraudulent activity is occurring inside the cabinet of the pachislot machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from being overlooked during the power outage period, and to minimize the occurrence of damage caused by fraudulent activity.

In addition to displaying the warning screen, the warning is also issued by making the LEDs emit light in a warning light pattern and outputting (emitting) a warning sound from the speakers. Therefore, compared to only displaying a warning image, the operator who turns on the power is made to feel a sense of urgency and tension, which further increases the operator's vigilance and attention, and more reliably urges the operator to check whether any fraudulent activity is occurring inside the cabinet of the pachislot machine 1. The warning light emission pattern (e.g., lighting/blinking interval, light color, brightness, etc.) of the LEDs is the same pattern as when a specified error occurs (e.g., power-on error, RAM abnormality, etc.), for example, a pattern in which the LEDs emit light in red at maximum brightness and a specified blinking interval regardless of the setting state of the eco mode. In addition, the pattern of the warning sound output from the speakers (e.g., type of sound, volume, etc.) is the same pattern as when a specified error occurs (e.g., power-on error, RAM abnormality, etc.), for example, a pattern in which a specified type of sound is output at maximum volume regardless of the setting state of the eco mode or volume.

The patterns of the lighting control of the warning mode for the LED group and the warning sound output from the speaker group are not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, patterns dedicated to warnings that are different from those when an error occurs. In addition, as the warning notification in this embodiment, an example in which a warning image, a warning sound, and a warning lamp are used for notification have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be made by only one of them (for example, only displaying a warning image), or by any two of them (for example, displaying a warning image and outputting a warning sound). In addition, the warning notification screen has been described as being displayed using the sub-display device 220, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed using the main display device 210, or may be displayed using both the sub-display device 220 and the main display device 210.

Next, the warning notification process will be described with reference to FIG. 82. First, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a warning is being issued (SA420). If it is not determined that a warning is being issued, the warning notification process is terminated. Note that in the power-on process, when it is not determined in SA420 that a warning is being issued and the warning notification process is terminated, this fact may be stored (such as by setting a specified flag) so that the warning notification process is not repeated thereafter.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a warning is being issued, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the conditions for terminating the warning are satisfied in SA421 to SA425. First, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a command indicating a setting change or setting check has been received (SA421). The command indicating a setting change or setting check is, for example, a command (such as an initialization command) sent from the main control board 71 at the start or end of the setting change or setting check. The command indicating a setting change or setting check includes a parameter (information) for specifying whether the setting change or setting check is started or ended. In this embodiment, the command that is determined to have been received in SA421 is, for example, a command indicating the end of the setting change or setting check among the commands indicating a setting change or setting check. The command that is determined to have been received in SA421 is not limited to this, and may be a command indicating the start of a setting change or setting check, or may be either a command indicating the start of a setting change or setting check or a command indicating the end of a setting change or setting check.

If it is not determined that a command indicating a setting change or setting confirmation has been received, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined notification time has elapsed and the warning notification timeout has occurred (SA422). The notification time is set to, for example, 5 minutes, but is not limited to this.

When it is not determined that the warning notification timeout has occurred, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a key reset operation has occurred (SA423). The key reset operation is, for example, an operation in which the door key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking mechanism 15 mounted on the lower door mechanism DD, turned to the left, and held for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). Whether or not a key reset operation has occurred is determined based on an input state command (see S202 in FIG. 32, etc.) that indicates the input state (input state to the input port) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) among the commands transmitted from the main control board 71 side. The sensors connected to the main control board 71 include a sensor that can detect that the door key has been inserted into the keyhole of the locking mechanism 15 and turned to the left, and the input state command includes a parameter (information) corresponding to the input state of the sensor. In SA423, based on the input state command, it is determined that the door key has been inserted into the keyhole of the locking mechanism 15 and turned to the left, and that this state has been maintained for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds), so that a key reset operation has been performed.

When it is not determined that a key reset operation has been performed, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not the reset switch 53 has been pressed (SA424). Whether or not the reset switch 53 has been pressed is determined based on the input state command (see S202 in FIG. 32, etc.) among the commands sent from the main control board 71. The switches connected to the main control board 71 include the reset switch 53, and the input state command includes parameters (information) corresponding to the input state of the reset switch 53. In SA424, it is determined that the reset switch 53 has been pressed by determining that the reset switch 53 has been pressed based on the input state command.

When it is not determined that the reset switch 53 has been pressed, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a bet command has been received (SA425). A bet command is a command (also called a medal insertion command) sent from the main control board 71 when, for example, a bet operation is detected by the bet switch 6S, when an inserted medal is detected by the medal sensor 31S, or when a replay role is won. Note that since the warning notification process is a process that is performed when the power is turned on, SA425 essentially determines whether or not a bet operation has been detected by the bet switch 6S, or whether or not a bet command has been received due to the detection of a medal by the medal sensor 31S.

When it is determined that a bed command has not been received, none of the conditions for ending the warning alert are met, and so the warning alert processing is terminated. Note that in the power-on processing, the warning alert processing is repeated at least while the warning alert is being issued until the warning alert is terminated. In addition, in the power-on processing, between the end of the warning alert processing and the next warning alert processing, for example, processing for receiving commands from the main control board 71 and timing processing of a timer used to determine whether the warning alert has timed out are performed are performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the warning notification termination condition is satisfied in any of SA421 to SA425, the sub-CPU 201 performs the termination setting of the warning image (SA426), the termination setting of the warning sound (SA427), the termination setting of the warning lamp (SA428), and terminates the warning notification processing. By performing these termination settings, the display of the warning notification screen on the display device, the light emission control of the LED group in the warning light emission pattern, and the output control of the warning sound from the speaker group are terminated. The power-on processing can be terminated because no warning notification based on the power interruption period was performed when the power was turned on, or the warning notification was performed and then terminated. As described above, after the power-on processing is terminated, processing such as the hall menu task shown in FIG. 63 and the door monitoring task shown in FIG. 68, and processing for displaying the screens shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 67 can be executed.

(Door monitoring related effects)
(1) First Action In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, when the power interruption period specified at the time of power-on exceeds the threshold, a warning based on the power interruption period is issued. This suggests to the operator who turned on the power that the power interruption period exceeds the threshold, and that there is a possibility that the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is not operating and the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD cannot be monitored for a period, thereby increasing the operator's vigilance and attention, and encouraging the operator to check the inside of the slot machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts during the power interruption period from being overlooked, and to minimize the occurrence of damage caused by fraudulent acts.

In addition, when a warning notification based on the power outage period is issued in the pachislot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 81, an image of a prompting message such as "Please check the inside of the gaming machine" is displayed. This makes it possible to directly prompt the operator to check the inside of the gaming machine through his or her visual sense.

In addition, in the case of a warning notification based on a power outage period in the slot machine 1, as shown in SA415 of FIG. 80, in addition to the visual display of the prompting message, a warning sound can be heard through the ears. This can further increase the operator's sense of vigilance and attention, and more reliably encourage the operator to check the inside of the slot machine 1.

In addition, in the case of a warning notification based on a power outage period in the slot machine 1, as shown in SA416 in FIG. 80, in addition to the image display of the prompting message, the operator can be made to see the light emitted by the warning light pattern. This can further increase the operator's sense of vigilance and attention, and more reliably encourage the operator to check the inside of the slot machine 1.

The threshold value serving as the criterion in SA413 in FIG. 80 is a value according to the storage capacity of the battery 302, and is determined based on the time (number of days) verified by demonstration tests or the like as the time during which the door monitoring unit 61 can operate 24 hours a day using only the battery 302 (without being turned on) when the battery 302 is fully charged. This makes it possible to prevent excessive warning alerts from being issued even when there is a high probability that the battery 302 is operating sufficiently and capable of monitoring, and by improving the accuracy of the warning alert, it is possible to further increase the operator's vigilance and attention when the warning alert is issued.

When the power is turned on in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the monitoring results include an opening/closing history information indicating the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred within a specified time period, as shown in FIG. 67. However, if the power outage period exceeds the threshold and a warning notification based on the power outage period is issued, the warning notification based on the power outage period is given priority over the notification of the opening/closing history information indicating the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred within the specified time period. This makes it possible to avoid, as much as possible, the operator overlooking the warning notification based on the power outage period.

As shown in FIG. 82, the conditions for ending the warning notification based on the power interruption period include conditions that are established in response to the operation of the setting key switch 52 and the reset switch 53, which are provided inside the slot machine 1 and can be operated when the lower door mechanism DD is open. This allows the operator to check the inside of the slot machine 1 when a warning notification based on the power interruption period is issued, and if no abnormality is found, to operate the setting key switch 52 or the reset switch 53, which are also provided inside, to end the warning notification, thereby improving the efficiency of work for checking the inside of the gaming machine and ending the warning notification.

(2) Second Action In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 43 and 44, when various sequences (sequences No. 5 to 11 in Figure 43) for performing various settings of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 are executed, the sub-control board 72, which is the host device, transmits a random number command (CK) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control board 72 (sub-control circuit 200) when executing various sequences (sequences No. 5 to 11 in Figure 43) for performing various settings constitutes a setting means.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which has received the random number command, generates a random number (see SA121 in FIG. 58) and transmits the generated random number value to the sub-control board 72 (see SA166 in FIG. 62). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 also reads the private key from the EEPROM 305, and uses the read private key and the random number value transmitted to the sub-control board 72 to perform a predetermined calculation to generate a password.

In addition, the sub-control board 72, which receives a random number value from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, performs a predetermined calculation using the private key stored in the sub-SRAM 203b and the received random number value to generate a password (see SA363 in Figure 76).

Next, the sub-control board 72 sends a login command (CI) accompanied by the generated password to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (see SA288 in FIG. 71). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the login command determines whether the password received from the sub-control board 72 matches the password it generated (see SA133 and SA134 in FIG. 59). If it determines that they match, the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is set to a state in which it can request various settings based on privileged commands (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "login state") (see SA135 in FIG. 59).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password received from the sub-control board 72 does not match the password it generated (SA134 in FIG. 59 is a NO judgment), the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is not set to the logged-in state. In addition, the sub-CPU 201 ends the various sequences without sending a command following the login command in the various sequences (in the sequence control processing of SA240 in FIG. 68, by ending the various sequences, no request is generated, and SA241 is a NO judgment). Note that the control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which sets the logged-in state in this way based on whether the passwords match or not, constitutes an authentication information state setting means.

As described above, each time various sequences for setting various settings of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 are executed, a password for putting the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 into a logged-in state is generated in the sub-control board 72 and the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 using a secret key and a random number. Therefore, a different password is generated each time. Therefore, even if the password at that time is identified by analyzing the contents of communication between the sub-control board 72 and the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, it is not possible to set the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 into a logged-in state using that password thereafter. In this way, unauthorized access to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 can be prevented. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized changes to the settings of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 and unauthorized tampering with or erasure of stored information.

In addition, if the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is replaced with another 24-hour door monitoring unit, and the private key stored in the other 24-hour door monitoring unit is different from the private key stored in the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, the passwords generated by the sub-control board 72 and the replaced 24-hour door monitoring unit will be different even if the same random numbers are used. In this embodiment, when the sub-control board 72 receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit indicating that login is not permitted, it displays a warning screen such as that shown in FIG. 46 on the display device. This makes it easy to know that the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 has been replaced.

(3) Third Action In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the slot machine 1 is started, a warning display screen (see FIG. 67) is displayed on the display device to display the opening and closing history information related to the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred within a specified time. In addition, the specified time can be arbitrarily set via the warning display setting screen (see FIG. 66). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who views the opening and closing history information from overlooking the opening and closing history information that he or she is paying attention to.

(4) Fourth Action In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, the control LSI 300 executes the door monitoring unit main process (FIG. 48) at 20 msec intervals. Therefore, the control LSI 300 executes each process in the port input process (see FIG. 49) of SA2 of the door monitoring unit main process and each process in the door monitoring process (see FIG. 50) of SA3 at 20 msec intervals. Therefore, after the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 detects the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, the status information indicating the opening/closing status of the lower door mechanism DD based on the signal from the door opening/closing monitoring sensor 310 is stored in the input port information storage area in the RAM 304 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (see SA11 in FIG. 49), and the time lag until the opening/closing history information based on the status information is stored in the first detection result storage area is only 20 msec at most.

In addition, the sub-CPU 201 executes the first status detection sequence every 500 msec to send a status read command (see No. 2 in FIG. 43 and SA239 in FIG. 68), and acquires the opening/closing history information stored in the first detection result storage area of the RAM 304 as an answer to the status read command from the 24-h door monitoring unit 61. Then, if the acquired opening/closing history information indicates that the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state, the sub-CPU 201 causes the display device to display a screen indicating that the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state (not shown, but for example, a message stating "Door is open" in approximately the center of the display device). Therefore, the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD can be properly grasped.

In addition, the monitoring interval time, which is the interval at which the opening/closing history information is stored in EEPROM 305, can be set in minute increments between 1 and 100 minutes. Therefore, for example, opening/closing history information based on erroneous detection due to chattering is not recorded in EEPROM 305. This makes it possible to prevent the opening/closing history information stored in EEPROM 305 from quickly reaching the maximum number that can be stored. Therefore, the opening/closing history information can be stored appropriately.

(5) Fifth Action In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the sub-CPU 201 executes the second state detection sequence at predetermined time intervals (one hour in this embodiment) and transmits a clock read command (CT) to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 (see FIG. 43). Then, when the sub-CPU 201 receives an answer to the clock read command from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, it performs the clock read reception process shown in FIG. 78 (see SA352 in FIG. 75).

In the clock read reception process, the sub-CPU 201 compares the time information (date and time data) accompanying the answer to the clock read command with the time information acquired from the sub-RTC 208 of the sub-control board 72, and determines whether the difference is a predetermined time or more (three minutes in this embodiment) (SA381 in FIG. 78). If it determines that the difference is three minutes or more (YES in SA381 in FIG. 78), the sub-CPU 201 executes the clock set sequence (see No. 6 in FIG. 43) (SA382 in FIG. 78).

When the clock set sequence is executed, the sub-CPU 201 transmits commands in the following order: random number command (CK), login command (CI), clock set command (ST), and logout command (CO) (see FIG. 43). The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the login command determines whether the password accompanying the login command matches the password stored in the password storage area of the RAM 304, and transmits (replies) an answer indicating that login is permitted (OK) if they match, or that login is not permitted (NG) if they do not match. The sub-CPU 201 that transmits the login command (CI) accompanied by the password stored in the sub-SRAM 203b during the execution of the clock set sequence constitutes the setting side authentication information transmission means. The control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that determines whether the password accompanying the login command matches the password stored in the password storage area of the RAM 304 constitutes the authentication information discrimination means. If the results of the above determination match, the control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 sets the device to a logged-in state where various settings can be requested based on privileged commands, and if the results do not match, the device does not set the device to a logged-in state. The control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 constitutes an authentication state permission means. The control LSI 300 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, which transmits the results of the above determination to the host device, constitutes an authentication result notification means.

When the sub-CPU 201 receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is not permitted, it causes the display device to display a warning screen with a message "Cannot log in to the monitoring unit" in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 46. The sub-CPU 201 also ends the clock set sequence without sending any commands subsequent to the login command. The sub-CPU 201 that causes the display device to display the warning screen constitutes a notification request means.

On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 201 receives an answer from the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 indicating that login is permitted, it sends a clock set command (ST) accompanied by information indicating the year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of the week obtained from the sub-RTC 208 to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61. The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 that receives the clock set command sets the year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of the week of the RTC 301 based on the information indicating the year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of the week that is accompanied by the clock set command.

Here, if the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is replaced with another 24-hour door monitoring unit, and the private key stored in the other 24-hour door monitoring unit is different from the private key stored in the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, an answer indicating that login is not permitted (NG) is sent as an answer to the login command in the clock set sequence (see SA168 in FIG. 62). Then, a warning screen such as that shown in FIG. 46 is displayed on the display device. Therefore, due to the second state detection sequence that is periodically performed, it is possible to periodically check whether the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 has been replaced, and it is also possible to easily know that the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 has been replaced.

In addition, it is possible to prevent errors from occurring in the current time measured by both RTCs 208 and 301.

(Modifications related to door monitoring)
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the power-off elapsed time processing shown in FIG. 80 and the warning notification processing shown in FIG. 82 are executed during power-on processing. However, this is not limited to the above as long as they are executed when the power is turned on. They may also be executed after the power-on processing is completed, for example, at a timing before the processing of SA201 in the hall menu task in FIG. 63, or at a timing before the processing of SA231 in the door monitoring task in FIG. 68.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the power interruption processing in FIG. 79 for issuing a warning based on the power interruption period and the power OFF elapsed time processing shown in FIG. 80 have been described as examples of obtaining the current date and time from the sub-RTC 208, but this is not limiting. For example, the date and time kept by the RTC 301 of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 may be obtained by sending a clock read command to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, an example was described in which an image of a suggestive message and an image of a prompting message (warning message) are displayed as a warning notification screen (an example of a specific notification) based on a power outage period. However, the warning notification screen based on a power outage period is not limited to this, and may, for example, only display an image of a suggestive message, or only display an image of a prompting message, or instead of or in addition to these, may display an image (for example, a moving image of a specific character checking every corner of the inside of the gaming machine) to encourage a player to check the inside of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in addition to these images, the warning notification screen based on a power outage period may, for example, display an image explaining an operation for terminating the warning notification (a condition for terminating the warning notification).

In the above-described embodiment, SA421 to SA425 in FIG. 82 are exemplified as the termination conditions for the warning notification based on the power interruption period. However, the termination conditions for the warning notification based on the power interruption period are not limited to this, and some of the conditions among SA421 to SA425 in FIG. 82 (for example, only SA421, SA421 and SA423, etc.) may be set, or only the conditions that are established in response to the operation of a specific operation unit (for example, the setting key switch 52 or the reset switch 53, etc.) that is provided inside the gaming machine and can be operated when the front door is open may be set, or instead of or in addition to these conditions, conditions different from SA421 to SA425 in FIG. 82 (for example, the door to be monitored (lower door mechanism DD) is opened or closed, or the start lever 7 is operated to start, etc.) may be set.

In the above embodiment, SA421 in FIG. 82 has been described as an example of determining whether a command indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (such as an initialization command) has been received, but this is not limiting, and the determination may be made based on the input state of the setting key switch 52 identified from the input state command (see S202 in FIG. 32, etc.). Also, in SA425 in FIG. 82, an example of determining whether a bet command has been received has been described, but this is not limiting, and the determination may be made based on the input state of the bet switch 6S and medal sensor 31S identified from the input state command (see S202 in FIG. 32, etc.).

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which a value corresponding to the storage capacity of the battery 302 is set as the threshold in SA413 in FIG. 80, but this is not limited thereto, and a value corresponding to the number of days regardless of the storage capacity of the battery 302 (for example, a uniform 20 days regardless of the storage capacity of the battery) may be set. The uniform number of days may be, for example, the number of days that is assumed to be sufficient for fraudulent acts, or the number of days that generally do not occur as a power outage period during normal business hours of the hall (for example, 7 days when the hall is unlikely to have a 7-day consecutive holiday). In addition, in SA413 in FIG. 80, an example was described in which it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the backup date and time from the current date and time is greater than the threshold, but this is not limited thereto, and it may be determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the day (year/month/day) of the backup date and time from the day (year/month/day) of the current date and time (i.e., a value based only on the number of days) is greater than the threshold.

In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the power interruption period is determined based on the difference between the date and time acquired from the sub-RTC 208 when the power is interrupted and the date and time acquired from the sub-RTC 208 when the power is turned on, and the date and time acquired from the sub-RTC 208 when the power is turned on. However, the method of determining the power interruption period is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined timer may be started when the power is interrupted (the predetermined timer continues to be timed even while the power is interrupted), and the power interruption period may be determined based on the value of the predetermined timer when the power is turned on.

In the above-described embodiment, when the power is turned on, if the power interruption period exceeds the threshold and a warning based on the power interruption period is issued, an example has been described in which the warning based on the power interruption period is issued prior to the notification of the opening and closing history information indicating the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred within the specified time shown in FIG. 67. However, this is not limited to this, and the notification of the opening and closing history information indicating the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred within the specified time and the warning based on the power interruption period may be issued simultaneously, or the warning based on the power interruption period may be issued after the notification of the opening and closing history information indicating the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD that occurred within the specified time.

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which no notification was given when it was not determined that there was a backup date and time in SA411 of FIG. 80, but this is not limited to this, and a predetermined notification may be given, such as displaying an image stating, for example, "Because there is no backup date and time, the power outage period cannot be determined." This suggests to the operator who turned on the power that the possibility of exceeding the threshold value cannot be zero because the power outage period cannot be determined, and the operator's vigilance and attention can be increased, and the operator can be prompted to check the inside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts during the power outage period from being overlooked, and the occurrence of damage due to fraudulent acts can be minimized. The predetermined notification may be the same as the warning notification, or may include the contents of the warning notification. The predetermined notification may include, for example, a suggestion message suggesting the possibility of not being able to monitor, such as "Because there is no backup date and time, the power outage period cannot be determined, and there may be a period in which the 24-hour door monitoring unit cannot monitor the opening and closing of the door." and a prompting message prompting the operator to check, such as "Please check the inside of the gaming machine just to be sure.", or may include only one of the suggestion message and the prompting message. The end conditions for the specified notification may be the same as the end conditions for the warning notification, or may be some of the conditions, or may be different from the end conditions for the warning notification instead of or in addition to these conditions.

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which a warning based on a power outage period is issued when it is determined in SA413 in FIG. 80 that the value obtained by subtracting the backup date and time from the current date and time is greater than the threshold value when the power is turned on. In addition to this, for example, execution history information (including, for example, the fact that a warning was issued and the date and time) in which a warning was issued based on a power outage period may be stored, and when the power is turned on, the execution history in which a warning was issued based on the execution history information regardless of the specified power outage period may be displayed. The execution history that can be displayed may include all the execution history that is stored, or may include only the most recent execution history. In this way, even if, for example, a person who has committed a fraudulent act has even turned on the power at that time and issued a warning based on a power outage period, the execution history of the warning will be displayed when the machine is installed in a hall or the like and turned on. As a result, it becomes possible for the operator to determine whether a warning has been issued at a date and time when the power should not have been turned on under normal circumstances (for example, between the time of shipment from the factory and the time of arrival at the hall), and when a warning has been issued at a date and time when the power should not have been turned on under normal circumstances, the operator can be prompted to check the inside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts during the power outage from being overlooked, and to minimize the damage caused by fraudulent acts. Note that the execution history of warning notifications based on the execution history information is not limited to when the power is turned on, but instead or in addition to this, it may be displayed, for example, on a monitoring history screen that is displayed when monitoring history is selected in the hall menu (see SA220 and SA221 in FIG. 64).

In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. However, gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to pachislots, and include, for example, gaming machines known as "pachinko" and slot machines.

In this embodiment, the various processes performed by the host device have been described using the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control board 72, which is an example of the host device, as an example of the processes performed by the host device. However, if a setting machine (not shown) that sets various settings of the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 during manufacture or maintenance of the slot machine 1 is connected as the host device, the processing device of this setting machine may be made to perform the processes performed by the sub-CPU 201.
[Second embodiment]
The basic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, the description of the first embodiment will not be repeated for the parts that are also applicable to the second embodiment.

In the above explanation, even if there is a statement that is limited to the Pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the Pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, ...", it can also be applied to the Pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, so long as it does not deviate from the spirit of the second embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) can be partially replaced or combined with the configuration shown in the second embodiment.

In addition, even if the shape is different from that of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions.In addition, even if the shape is the same as that of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment or the same processing is performed, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Front door>
83 and 84 are diagrams for explaining a portion of the configuration of the door mechanism D, with Fig. 83 being a front view of the portion of the configuration of the door mechanism D and Fig. 84 being a front perspective view of the portion of the configuration of the door mechanism D. The door mechanism D is formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G shown in Fig. 1 etc., and is attached to the cabinet G so as to be freely opened and closed. In this embodiment, an example in which the front door is formed by one door mechanism D will be described.

Figures 83 and 84 show the components of the door mechanism D, including the upper light-emitting device 230 attached to the door frame 225 formed in a roughly rectangular frame shape, the display window D1, the navigation lamp device 231, the main display window 4, the left side display device 232, the right side display device 233, and the sub display unit 22.

The door frame 225 has an upper frame portion 225a extending left and right at the upper end position, a lower frame portion 225e extending left and right at the lower end position, a right frame portion 225b extending vertically between the right ends of the upper frame portion 225a and the lower frame portion 225e, and a left frame portion 225c extending vertically between the left ends of the upper frame portion 225a and the lower frame portion 225e. It also has a partition portion 225d located between the upper frame portion 225a and the lower frame portion 225e and spanning from the left frame portion 225c to the right frame portion 225b. This divides the area inside the door frame 225 into an upper area and a lower area with the partition portion 225d as the boundary.

The performance display window D1 is located in an upper area within the door frame 225, and the main display window 4 is located in a lower area within the door frame 225. The performance display window D1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin (translucent plate 1045 described later), and allows the performance image displayed on the screen device C that constitutes the main display device 210 (main performance display section 21) provided on the back side of the performance display window D1 to be viewed. The main display window 4 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows at least a portion (for example, three pieces) of the patterns on the periphery of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R that constitute the reel unit RU attached to the back side of the main display window D1 to be viewed.

The upper frame portion 225a is formed in a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape with an appropriate thickness in the front-rear direction, and the upper surface (top surface) of the upper frame portion 225a forms the exterior surface of the door body 225. A lattice-shaped air intake 921a and a through hole 921b for exposing the light emitting portion 905 are formed on the upper surface of the upper frame portion 225a. The air intake 921a faces the air intake opening 1113 (see FIG. 95) of the duct unit 912 described below. The light emitting portion 905 transmits information such as the game status represented by the light being on or off and the color to a receiving portion (e.g., a receiving portion of a digital signage) located outside the gaming machine.

The upper light-emitting device 230 is attached to the front of the upper frame portion 225a. The upper light-emitting device 230 is equipped with, for example, multiple full-color LEDs as lamps (light-emitting means, light-emitting bodies), and the light-emitting modes (on, blinking, off, brightness, light color, etc.) of the full-color LEDs are controlled by the sub-CPU 201 so that the light-emitting modes correspond to the progress of the game, thereby enabling light effects to be performed according to the progress of the game. Details of the upper light-emitting device 230 will be described later.

The navigation lamp device 231 is attached to the front of the partition section 225d and the lower frame section 225e. The navigation lamp device 231 has lamps 231L, 231C, and 231R at positions corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively, which are visible through the main display window 4. The navigation lamp device 231 can inform the player of advantageous stopping operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.) by lighting or blinking lamps that provide advantageous stopping operation modes during the AT, etc.

The left side performance device 232 and the sub-performance display unit 22 are attached to the front of the left frame unit 225c. The left side performance device 232 is arranged above the partition unit 225d, and the sub-performance display unit 22 is arranged below the partition unit 225d. The left side performance device 232 has a sound transmission hole 232a provided at the top and a left side light-emitting performance device 232b provided at the bottom. The sound transmission hole 232a outputs sound such as sound effects and background music output from a speaker attached to the rear side toward the front side of the pachislot machine 1. The left side light-emitting performance device 232b has, for example, multiple full-color LEDs, and the light-emitting modes (lighting, blinking, turning off, brightness, light-emitting color, etc.) of the full-color LEDs are controlled by the sub-CPU 201 so that the light-emitting modes correspond to the progress of the game, thereby allowing light performance to be performed according to the progress of the game. The sub-performance display unit 22 displays the performance image displayed on the sub-display device 220.

The right side performance device 233 is attached to the front of the right frame portion 225b. The right side performance device 233 has a sound transmission hole 233a provided at the top and right side light emitting performance devices 233b, 233c provided at the bottom. The sound transmission hole 233a outputs sound such as sound effects and background music output from a speaker attached to the rear side toward the front side of the pachislot machine 1. The right side light emitting performance devices 233b, 233c are equipped with, for example, multiple full-color LEDs, and the light emission state (on, blinking, off, brightness, light emission color, etc.) of the full-color LEDs is controlled by the sub-CPU 201 so that the light emission state corresponds to the progress of the game, thereby enabling light effects to be performed according to the progress of the game.

Although not shown in Figures 83 and 84, the elements described in the first embodiment (e.g., the MAX BET button 6a, 1 BET button 6b, settlement button 9, performance button 10a, medal insertion slot 5, waist panel 13, medal tray 12, medal payout outlet 11, and sound transmission holes 24a, 24b (speakers 35a, 35b)) are located below the main display window 4.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the front door is composed of one door mechanism D, but this is not limited to the above, and the front door may be composed of multiple door mechanisms, such as an upper door mechanism UD and a lower door mechanism DD, as exemplified in the first embodiment.

<Upper lighting device>
(General configuration)
A schematic configuration of the upper light-emitting performance device 230 will be described with reference to Figs. 85 to 88. Figs. 85(a) to (c) respectively show a front view, a top view, and a bottom view of the entire upper light-emitting performance device 230. Fig. 86 shows the components of the upper light-emitting performance device 230, Fig. 86(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the right side, Fig. 86(b) is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear, and Fig. 86(c) is an exploded top view seen from above. Fig. 87 is a cross-sectional view of the upper light-emitting performance device 230, showing a cross-section cut along line x-x shown in Fig. 85(a). Figs. 88(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of each component of the upper light-emitting performance device 230.

The upper light-emitting device 230 is mainly composed of a cover unit 240 fixed to the upper frame portion 225a, and an inner unit 260 and a rear unit 250 attached to the rear side of the cover unit 240. The cover unit 240 forms the outer shell of the upper light-emitting device 230.

(Rear unit configuration)
An example of the configuration of the rear unit 250 will be described with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 89 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 250. The rear unit 250 is made up of a fixing member 251 that is attached and fixed to the rear side of the cover unit 240, a board 252 that is disposed approximately vertically along the front surface of the fixing member 251, and a fitting member 253 that is disposed so as to overlap the front surface of the board 252 and has an approximately U-shaped cross section.

The upper and lower ends of the fixing member 251 are provided with engagement parts 251a and 251b, respectively, which protrude forward in a flange-like shape. The board 252 is provided with a plurality of LEDs (e.g., full-color LEDs) in two upper and lower rows. That is, the upper row of the board 252 has a plurality of LEDs 252a arranged at intervals from each other along the left-right direction, and the lower row of the board 252 has a plurality of LEDs 252b arranged at intervals from each other along the left-right direction. The left-right direction is also referred to as the width direction. The board 252 is disposed on a board attachment part provided between the upper and lower ends of the fixing member 251.

The fitting member 253 is fixed to the vertical center of the substrate 252 so as not to block the light irradiated forward from the LEDs 252a and 252b (so as not to overlap the front of the LEDs 252a and 252b). As shown in FIG. 88(c), the rear unit 250 is integrated by placing the substrate 252 on the substrate mounting portion of the fixing member 251, sandwiching it with the fitting member 253 from the front, and screwing it to the fitting member 253 from the rear of the fixing member 251. By fixing the fitting member 253 to the fixing member 251, the upper and lower regions are separated (compartmented), and it is possible to prevent the light from the LEDs 252a from entering below the fitting member 253 and the light from the LEDs 252b from entering above the fitting member 253.

As shown in FIG. 87, the integrated rear unit 250 is attached so that the tips of the upper wall 253a and the lower wall 253b of the fitting member 253 abut against the entire rear end surface of the case member 261 (described below) of the internal unit 260. This prevents the light emitted from the multiple LEDs 252a and 252b from entering the internal unit 260.

(Internal unit configuration)
An example of the configuration of the internal unit 260 will be described with reference to Figures 86 to 88 and 90. Figure 90 is an exploded perspective view showing the components of the internal unit 260, with Figure 90(a) being an exploded perspective view seen from the right front, and Figure 90(b) being an exploded perspective view seen from above.

As shown in FIG. 90, the internal unit 260 includes a case member 261 having a storage space 261a that extends in the width direction (left-right direction) and penetrates in the front-rear direction, a light-emitting member 262 that is disposed on the rear side of the storage space 261a and attached to an attachment portion provided on the case member 261, a light-guiding member 263 that is inserted from the front into the storage space 261a and accommodated therein, and a lens (hereinafter referred to as the "central lens") 264 that is attached to the light-guiding member 263 so as to cover the light-guiding member 263 from the front.

(Light emitting member)
The light emitting member 262 is composed of substrates 262a and 262b extending along the width direction and a number of light emitting bodies 262c (for example, full-color LEDs) provided on the substrate 262d. The many light emitting bodies 262c are arranged at regular intervals along the width direction. As shown in FIG. 88(b), the light emitting member 262 is arranged on an attachment portion provided at the rear end of the case member 261 so as to close the accommodation space 261a from the rear. In this embodiment, the light emitting member 262 is positioned in a state where it is placed on an attachment portion constituted by positioning protrusions 261g and 261h (to be described later) formed on the lower rear end of the case member 261 and a step portion 261i formed on the upper rear end of the case member 261, and is fixed to the rear surface of the case member 261 by being screwed into the case member 261 from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), the substrates 262a and 262b of the light-emitting member 262 are arranged in a V-shape when viewed from above. Due to the positional relationship between the positioning protrusions 261g and 261h and the step portion 261i provided on the case member 261, the substrates 262a and 262b of the light-emitting member 262 intersect at an obtuse angle, and the intersection angle θ is, for example, 120° to 170° inclusive in the illustrated example, but is not limited thereto and may be arranged in a straight line.

The multiple light emitters 262c are arranged in a line on the boards 262a and 262b along the width direction when viewed from the front. Many of the multiple light emitters 262c are arranged in a straight line (approximately horizontally), and the several light emitters 262c located at the left end of the board 262a and the right end of the board 262b are arranged in a gentle curve (a curve that rises to the left at the left end and a curve that rises to the right at the right end) so that they are positioned higher toward the edge side.

(Light guiding member)
A configuration example of the light guide member 260 will be described with further reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91(a) is a top view showing the positional relationship between the light emitting member 262 and the light guide member 263 in the attached state, and Fig. 91(b) is a partially enlarged view thereof. Fig. 91(c) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the light guide member cut in the vertical direction (longitudinal direction), and Fig. 91(d) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of a part of the light guide member cut in the horizontal direction (lateral direction). The material of the light guide member 263 is acrylic resin, but is not limited to this, and may be polycarbonate, glass, polystyrene, urethane, or the like.

When viewed from the front, the light guide member 263 extends in the width direction along the alignment direction of the multiple light emitters 262c, and has an incident surface 263a (surface indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 91(b)) facing the multiple light emitters 262c, and an exit surface 263b that emits light incident from the incident surface 263a forward. The incident surface 263a and the exit surface 263b are typically formed vertically and approximately facing and parallel to each other, but are not limited to this, and may be formed to be inclined obliquely with respect to the vertical direction, formed not to face each other, or formed to have different inclination angles (not approximately parallel).

The light guide member 263 is provided with a plurality of slits 263c (also called cuts or grooves) extending from the incident surface 263a side (the rear end surface of the light guide member 263) toward the exit surface 263b side (forward). The slits 263c are vertical slits that are perpendicular (intersect) to the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 263 (the longitudinal direction of the facing light emitting member 262), and typically extend approximately vertically. Therefore, the incident surface 263a is divided into a plurality of piece-shaped incident surfaces 266p along the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 263 (the longitudinal direction of the facing light emitting member 262). That is, the light guide member 263 extends continuously from one end in the width direction to the other end, and is composed of one strip-shaped portion (hereinafter referred to as the "emission portion") 265 whose front end surface constitutes the emission surface 263b, and a plurality of block-shaped portions (hereinafter referred to as the "incident portion") 266 whose rear end surface constitutes the incidence surface 266p, separated by a plurality of slits 263c, and formed in a comb-like shape. Note that the slits are not limited to vertical slits that are perpendicular (intersect) with the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 263, and may be slits that intersect obliquely with the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 263, for example.

91(a) and 91(b), the incident surface 263a as a whole extends parallel to the light emitting member 262 and is V-shaped when viewed from above. On the other hand, the exit surface 263b is a smoothly curved surface that follows the V-shape of the light emitting member 262 when viewed from above. Specifically, the exit surface 263b has an arc-shaped portion 265a located in the center in the width direction, and curved portions 265b that are connected to both ends of the arc-shaped portion in the width direction and curve forward.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), it is desirable that the emission section 265 corresponding to the tip (front end) of each of the multiple slits 263c to the emission surface 263b has the same thickness from one end to the other end in the width direction. In other words, it is desirable that the depth dimension La of the emission section 265 is constant. That is, the depth dimension La of the emission section 265 is constant regardless of the part (location) in the width direction. In other words, the depth dimension La of the emission section 265 is the same as the front (front) of the other incidence section 266 regardless of the front (front) of any incidence section 266, and is the same as the front (front) of any slit 263c regardless of the front (front) of the other slit 263c. The depth dimension of the emission section 265 refers to the thickness in the normal direction perpendicular to the emission surface, but is not limited to this, and may be the thickness in the direction in which the slit 263c or the incidence section 266 is formed. In addition, the constant or same depth dimension La of the emission section 265 does not necessarily mean that it is completely the same, but may be approximately constant and can be recognized as being the same at a glance, even if there are slight differences in the strict sense.

Each of the entrance sections 266 is formed in a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape and protrudes rearward from the exit section 265. Each entrance section 266 is arranged so as to be perpendicular to the light emitting member 262. Therefore, when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the entrance section 266 facing the left board 262a and the entrance section 266 facing the right board 262b are arranged in a diagonal direction (reverse diagonal direction) that moves away from each other toward the exit section 265.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), each of the incident portions 266 has approximately the same width and height, except for the incident portion 266c located in the center of the width direction and the incident portion 266e located at both ends of the width direction. As shown in FIG. 91(b), each of the incident portions 266 is arranged so that the distance between the incident portion 266 and the light emitting member 262 is constant. As a result, the incident surface 266p of each of the incident portions 266 is arranged close to the facing light emitting body 263c with a small constant gap between them. As a result, even if an external impact or pressure is applied to each of the incident portions 266 by being pushed backward, the impact or pressure is not transmitted to the facing light emitting body 263c, and the light emitting body 263c can be prevented from being damaged. On the other hand, the exit surface 263b has an arc-shaped portion 265a and a curved portion 265b. For this reason, the depth dimension (thickness) of the incident portion 266 is not constant as shown in FIG. 91(a) and the like, and the depth dimensions of adjacent incident portions 266 are slightly different. Note that the depth dimension of the incident portion 266 refers to the thickness (length) in the direction in which the incident portion 266 is formed (the direction perpendicular to the light-emitting member 262).

The entrance section 266 with the largest (longest) depth dimension is located slightly closer to the entrance section 266c than the center of each of the left and right arc-shaped portions 265a. On the other hand, the entrance section 266 with the smallest (shortest) depth dimension is located at the boundary between the arc-shaped portion 265a and the curved portion 265b of the exit section 265. Even the entrance section 266 with the smallest (shortest) depth dimension is configured to be larger (longer) than the depth dimension La of the exit section 265. That is, the depth dimension of each entrance section 266 is formed to be larger (longer) than the depth dimension La of the exit section 265. In other words, the depth dimension of each slit 263c is formed to be larger (longer) than the depth dimension La of the exit section 265.

On the other hand, the width direction length of each of the multiple slits 263c (i.e., the distance between the vertical side surfaces of adjacent entrance portions 266) is formed to be shorter than the depth dimension La of the exit portion 265, as shown in FIG. 91(a) and other figures. In other words, the width direction length of each of the multiple slits 263c is configured to be smaller (shorter) than the depth dimension La of the exit portion 265.

Also, each incident portion 266 faces at least one light emitter 262c. In this embodiment, each incident portion 266 faces at least two (multiple) light emitters 262c. That is, the slits 263c are provided (or the light emitters are arranged) so that the light emitters 262c and the incident portion 266 have a 2:1 or greater relationship. On the other hand, the incident portion 266c located in the center of the width direction and the incident portions 266e located at both ends of the width direction have a wider incident surface (or exit surface) than the other incident portions 266. Therefore, the incident portion 266c faces four light emitters 262c, and the incident portion 266e faces three light emitters 262c.

For the entrance sections 266 other than entrance section 266c and entrance section 266e, the number of light-emitting bodies facing the entrance section 266 is not limited to two, and may be three or more, or may be one. The number of light-emitting bodies facing the entrance section 266 may differ depending on which entrance section 266 is involved. For example, the closer the entrance section 266 is to the center in the width direction, the greater the number of light-emitting bodies facing the entrance section 266, or the closer the entrance section 266 is to both ends in the width direction, the greater the number of light-emitting bodies facing the entrance section 266.

All corners of the approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape of each entrance portion 266 are chamfered, and in this embodiment, the corners are chamfered to form rounded surfaces. In Figure 91 and other figures, the lines drawn within each entrance portion 266 indicate the ridge lines that appear as a result of the chamfering. Note that the chamfering is not limited to creating rounded surfaces, and may also be used to create angular surfaces, etc.

Furthermore, the incident surface 266p of each incident portion 266 is formed, for example, in a roof shape (mountain shape) so as to have a non-planar shape. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the apex line portion 266a corresponding to the ridge of the roof is formed in the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 263 (the direction in which the light emitters 262c are arranged), and as a planar portion corresponding to the roof planar portion extending from the ridge, a planar portion 266b extending upward and toward the front side and a planar portion 266c extending downward and toward the front side are formed. In this way, in order to make the area of the incident surface 266p of each incident portion 266 that receives light from the facing light emitter 262c wider than the cross-sectional area in front of the incident surface 266p, the edge of the incident surface 266p is chamfered and the incident surface 266p is processed to be formed into a roof shape, so that the light from the light emitter 262c can easily enter from the incident surface 266p.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(b) to (d), on all four sides (around) of the connection part where each entrance part 266 is connected to the exit part 265, raised parts 266d are provided so as to gradually increase (widen) the cross-sectional area of the entrance part. In Figure 91(b), the shaded part indicates the raised part 266d. The raised part 266d is formed so that the cross-sectional area gradually increases as the distance to the exit part 265 becomes shorter. The raised part 266d allows light to be guided to the exit part 265 over as wide an area as possible, and for example, light is easily guided to the part of the exit part 265 in front of the slit 263c, preventing the occurrence of color unevenness.

In addition, the light emitting portion 265 of the light guide member 263 has upper and lower flanges 267 that protrude in the vertical direction at a position rearward of the light emitting surface 263b, as shown in FIG. 91(c). When the light guide member 263 is inserted into the case member 261 and housed therein, the upper and lower flanges 267 abut against the front end of the opening of the case member 261, thereby contributing to positioning in the front-rear direction. As a result, when the light guide member 263 is housed in the case member 261, the light emitting portion 265 located forward of the upper and lower flanges 267 protrudes (protrudes, is exposed) from the front end of the case member 261, as shown in FIG. 88(b).

(Case member)
An example of the configuration of the case member 261 will be described with further reference to Figures 92 and 93. Figure 92 is a perspective view of the case member 261 as viewed from the right front. Figure 93(a) is a rear view of the internal unit 260 as viewed from diagonally above with the light emitting member 262 removed, Figure 93(b) is a partially enlarged view thereof, and Figure 93(c) is a partially cross-sectional view thereof.

As shown in Figures 90 and 92, the case member 261 extends in the width direction, houses the light guide member 263 inside, and fixes the light emitting member 262 to the rear. The case member 261 has a shape that allows the light guide member 263 to be inserted and housed through an opening provided at the front, and allows the light emitting member 262 to be fitted and attached from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), the case member 261 has a bottom surface 261b on which the light emitting member 262 and the light guide member 263 are placed, and a top surface 261c facing the bottom surface 261b, and a storage space 261a is formed between the bottom surface 261b and the top surface 261c.

The distance between the front ends of the bottom surface portion 261b and the top surface portion 261c, i.e., the front opening height of the storage space 261c, is greater than the height of the incident portion 266 of the light guide member 263 and is smaller than the height dimension of the light guide member 263 at the position of the upper and lower flanges 267. Therefore, when the light guide member 263 is inserted from the front into the storage space 261c, the upper and lower flanges 267 abut against the front end faces of the bottom surface portion 261b and the top surface portion 261c and stop (further insertion is not allowed or prevented). This allows the front-rear position of the light guide member 263 to be accurately positioned, and each incident surface 266p can be positioned in close proximity to the light emitter 262c as shown in FIG. 91(b), thereby improving the efficiency of the assembly work. The light guide member 263 is placed at a predetermined position in the storage space 261c, so that the slit portion (the length of the slit) is stored in the storage space 261c, while the emission portion 265, which corresponds to the portion forward of the rear end faces of the upper and lower flanges 267, is exposed from the case member 261.

The bottom surface portion 261b and the front end portion of the top surface portion 261c are provided with recesses 261d, 261e for receiving the rear end portion of the top frame 241 of the cover unit 240, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 92, at least a portion of the recess 261e of the top surface portion 261c is formed with an insertion recess 261e' for inserting and fixing an engagement portion provided at the rear end portion of the top frame 241 of the cover unit 240, which will be described later, from the front. The insertion recess 261e' is provided with a non-engagement portion.

In addition, at least one of the bottom surface portion 261b and the top surface portion 261c is provided with a plurality of positioning protrusions for positioning the widthwise position of the incident portion 266 of the light-guiding member 263. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93(b) and other figures, the bottom surface portion 261b is provided with a positioning protrusion 261g. The positioning protrusion 261g is provided at a position corresponding to a predetermined slit 263c so as to fit into the predetermined slit 263c.

Figure 93 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along c-c in Figure 93 (a). As shown in Figure 93 (c), the positioning protrusion 261g is formed so as to enter a predetermined slit 263c when the light guide member 263 is housed in a predetermined position in the housing space 261a. The positioning protrusion 261g has a height that allows it to enter the slit 263c, and has a height that prevents it from entering rearward if the rear end (incident surface) of the incident portion 266 abuts against it. The side of the positioning protrusion 261g may abut against the vertically extending side of either or both of the adjacent incident portions 266 via the slit 263c.

The predetermined slit 263c in which the positioning protrusion 261g is provided corresponds to the slit 263c between the entrance portion 266c located in the center of the width direction and the adjacent entrance portion 266, or the slits every predetermined number of slits (for example, every six slits) from the slit 263c, as shown in FIG. 93. In this way, the predetermined slits 263c include at least the slits 263c between the entrance portion 266c located in the center of the width direction and the adjacent entrance portion 266.

The positioning protrusion 261g extends to a position where its rear end is a predetermined distance (for example, a length greater than the thickness of the substrate of the light-emitting member 262) before the rear end of the case member 261. A plurality of positioning protrusions 261h are provided at the rear end of the bottom surface portion 261b, and a step portion 261i is provided at the rear end of the top surface portion 261c, as shown in FIG. 87. The rear ends of the plurality of positioning protrusions 261h are provided at a position that is a predetermined distance before the rear end of the case member 261, and the step surface of the step portion 261i is provided at a position that is a predetermined distance before the rear end of the case member 261. Therefore, as described above, the light-emitting member 262 is positioned by being placed in contact with the positioning protrusions 261g, the positioning protrusions 261h, and the step portion 261i, and is fixed to the rear end of the case member 261. The multiple positioning protrusions 261g have the function of positioning the width direction position of the incident portion 266 of the light guide member 263, and also have the function of positioning, placing, and fixing the light emitting member 262. Note that the multiple positioning protrusions 261h may have the same shape as the multiple positioning protrusions 261g and be provided at a position that fits into a predetermined slit 263c so that they have the function of positioning the width direction position of the incident portion 266 of the light guide member 263 as well as the function of positioning, placing, and fixing the light emitting member 262.

(Center lens)
The central lens 264 has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and is disposed so as to cover the emission portion 265 of the light guiding member 263. The central lens 264 has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and is disposed so as to cover the emission portion 265 of the light guiding member 263. As shown in FIG. 88(b), the rear end portion of the central lens 264 has an attachment surface 264a having a recess in the center, and the attachment surface 264a is fitted into the emission portion 265 of the light guiding member 263, whereby the central lens 264 is fixed to the front surface of the light guiding member 263. In a state in which the central lens 264 is fixed to the light guiding member 263, the attachment surface 264a of the central lens 264 and the emission surface 263a of the light guiding member 263 are disposed in close contact with each other.

The mounting surface 264a of the central lens 264 is formed so as to be in close contact with the surface from the upper end of the emission surface 263a to the upper end of the upper and lower flanges 267, and also to be in close contact with the surface from the lower end of the emission surface 263a to the lower end of the upper and lower flanges 267. Therefore, in the mounted state, it is disposed in close contact with not only the emission surface 263a of the light guide member 263, but also the surfaces up to the lower and upper ends of the upper and lower flanges 267. The height of the central lens 264 is formed so as to be approximately the same as the height from the upper end to the lower end of the upper and lower flanges 267 of the light guide member 263. The central lens 264 is attached to the top frame 241 described later in a state of being in close contact and fixed to the light guide member 263.

The central lens 264 is made of, for example, a translucent material and has a milky white color. This allows for a greater degree of light separation and reduced graininess than would be possible with a completely transparent lens, providing a smoother effect.

(Configuration of cover unit)
An example of the configuration of the cover unit 240 will be described with reference to Figures 86 to 88 and 94. Figure 94 is an exploded perspective view showing the components of the cover unit 240, where Figure 94(a) is a view seen from diagonally forward and Figure 94(b) is a view seen from diagonally backward.

The cover unit 240 includes a top frame 241 that houses the central lens 264, an upper lens portion 242 that is disposed on the top of the top frame 241, and a lower lens portion 243 that is disposed on the bottom of the top frame 241. The surface of the top frame 241 is plated.

The upper lens section 242 has a double structure and is composed of an outer lens 242a and an inner lens 242b. The lower lens section 243 also has a double structure and is composed of an outer lens 243a and an inner lens 243b. Unlike the central lens 264, the outer lenses 242a, 243a and the inner lenses 242b, 243b are all clear, transparent lenses that are colorless or colored. Therefore, while the light effects through the outer lenses 242a, 243a and the inner lenses 242b, 243b increase the interest of the game, the smooth light effects in the central lens 264 can be made to stand out even more, increasing the level of attention.

The top frame 241 has an opening 244 on its front surface that roughly matches the shape of the front surface of the central lens 264, and includes an upper end frame 245a that forms the upper end of the opening 244, a lower end frame 245b that forms the lower end of the opening 244, a left end frame 245c that connects the upper end frame 245a and the lower end frame 245b at the upper left end surface and forms the upper left end of the opening 244, and a right end frame 245d that connects the upper end frame 245a and the lower end frame 245b at the upper right end surface and forms the upper right end of the opening 244.

The front surface of the central lens 264 faces the opening formed by the upper frame 245a and the lower frame 245b of the opening 244. On the other hand, the cross section (upper end surface, 264b, 264c in FIG. 90(b)) of the central lens 264 faces the opening formed by the left end frame 245c and the right end frame 245d of the opening 244. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b) and FIG. 94, the left end frame 245c and the right end frame 245d each have openings 244a, 244b that constitute the upper left end and upper right end of the opening 244 at the center of the width direction of the front end, and are configured to face the cross section (upper end surfaces 264b, 264c) of the central lens 264. Additionally, the left-end frame 245c and the right-end frame 245d each have recesses 245j, 245k that are deeper (thinner in thickness) as they move forward from the rear toward the openings 244a, 244b.

As shown in Figs. 87 and 88(a), the rear surfaces of the upper end frame 245a and the lower end frame 245b are provided with an upper surface portion 245e and a lower surface portion 245f that extend rearward. When the case member 261 is assembled, the rear portions of the upper surface portion 245e and the lower surface portion 245f are inserted into the recesses 261d and 261e provided at the front end of the case member 261. As shown in Fig. 94(b), the rear end of the upper surface portion 245e is provided with an engagement portion 245g. As a result, by inserting the rear portions of the upper surface portion 245e and the lower surface portion 245f into the recesses 261d and 261e, respectively, the engagement portion 245g formed on the upper surface portion 245e is also inserted into the insertion recess 261e', and is inserted to a predetermined position to engage with the non-engagement portion in the insertion recess 261e'. As a result, the case member 261 is fixed to the top frame 241, and the central lens 264 and the like are housed in the housing section 246 formed by the upper end frame 245a, the lower end frame 245b, the upper surface section 245e, the lower surface section 245f, and the front end section of the case member 261. The case member 261 is fixed to the rear of the top frame 241 not only by the engagement section 245g, but also by being screwed to the top frame 241 from the rear surface of the case member 261.

Except for the opening 244, the storage section 246 is configured by the upper end frame 245a, the lower end frame 245b, the upper surface portion 245e, the lower surface portion 245f, and the front end portion of the case member 261 so that light does not leak outside the storage section 246. Therefore, light from the light emitter 262c can be efficiently irradiated from the opening 244 via the light guide member 263 and the central lens 264.

Also, as shown in FIG. 87, a recess is formed at each of the upper and lower ends of the front surface of the central lens 264. The upper frame 245a and the lower frame 245b are arranged to cover the recess in the front surface of the central lens 264 and to make the front surface of the central lens 264 beveled. Furthermore, it can be said that the central lens 264 is arranged to be beveled more than both the surface of the upper frame 245a and the surface of the lower frame 245b. In other words, the front surface of the central lens 264 facing through the opening 244 is beveled so that it is rearward of the extension line of the surface (front surface) of the upper frame 245a (see dotted line a in FIG. 87) and rearward of the extension line of the surface of the lower frame 245b (see dotted line b in FIG. 87). However, the bevel is not limited to these, and for example, the front surface of the central lens 264 may be beveled so that it is rearward of the front end of the upper frame 245a, or the front surface of the central lens 264 may be beveled so that it is rearward of both the front ends of the upper frame 245a and the lower frame 245b.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 94, the top frame 241 has an engagement portion 245h formed from the right end of the left end frame 245c to the upper rear end of the upper end frame 245a and the left end of the right end frame 245d. Correspondingly, the outer lens 242a constituting the upper lens part 242 has an engagement portion 242c formed from the left end to the lower end and right end of the front surface, which engages with the engagement portion 245h. As a result, the outer lens 242a constituting the upper lens part 242 is fixed to the upper opening of the top frame 241 by engaging the engagement portion 245h with the engagement portion 242c. The inner lens 242b constituting the upper lens part 242 is fixed so that its front lower end is sandwiched between the rear surface of the engagement portion 242c of the outer lens 242a and the front end of the upper surface portion 261c of the case member 261.

On the other hand, an engagement piece is formed on the rear part of the outer lens 242a for engaging between the front end of the upper frame part 225a and the engagement part 251a of the fixing member 251. Also, an engagement piece is formed on the rear part of the inner lens 242b for engaging between the lower surface of the rear part of the outer lens 242a and the case member 261. As a result, the outer lens 242a and the inner lens 242b are fixed by fixing the top frame 241 to the upper frame part 225a so that the engagement pieces of each of the outer lens 242a and the inner lens 242b engage at the corresponding positions. As a result, light from the multiple LEDs 252a of the rear unit 250 can be irradiated from the upper opening of the top frame 241 through the outer lens 242a and the inner lens 242b.

In addition, as shown in Figures 87 and 94, the top frame 241 has an engagement portion 245i formed over the lower rear end of the lower end frame 245b. Correspondingly, the outer lens 243a constituting the lower lens portion 243 has an engagement portion 243c formed over the front upper end that engages with the engagement portion 245i. As a result, the outer lens 243a constituting the lower lens portion 243 is fixed to the lower opening of the top frame 241 by engaging the engagement portion 245i with the engagement portion 243c. The inner lens 243b constituting the lower lens portion 243 is fixed such that its front upper end is sandwiched between the engagement portion 243c of the outer lens 243a and the front end of the bottom surface portion 261b of the case member 261.

On the other hand, the rear portions of the outer lens 243a and the inner lens 243b are formed with engagement pieces for engaging with the engagement portions 251b of the fixing member 251. As a result, the outer lens 243a and the inner lens 243b are fixed by fixing the rear unit 250 to the top frame 241 so that the engagement pieces of the outer lens 243a and the inner lens 243b engage with the engagement portions 251b. As a result, light from the multiple LEDs 252b of the rear unit 250 can be irradiated from the lower opening of the top frame 241 via the outer lens 243a and the inner lens 243b.

(Effects and modifications of the upper light-emitting device 230)
(1) According to the slot machine 1 equipped with the upper light-emitting device 230 described above, as shown in FIG. 91, the light incident on each of the entrance surfaces 266p formed by dividing them into a plurality of parts by the slits 263c can be concentrated and reach the area of the exit surface 263b corresponding to each entrance surface 266p (facing or facing each other). This allows light to be divided between the area of the exit surface 263b corresponding to the first entrance surface 266p (including, for example, the area facing the first entrance surface 266p) and the area of the exit surface 263b corresponding to the second entrance surface 266p (including, for example, the area facing the second entrance surface 266p). On the other hand, since the exit surface 263b is a single continuous member, it is possible to perform a light effect with a sense of unity without a sense of graininess.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(b) to (d), on all four sides (around) of the connecting portion where each incident portion 266 is connected to the exit portion 265, raised portions 266d are provided to gradually increase (widen) the cross-sectional area of the incident portion, thereby improving the continuity of light at the exit surface 263b and providing a stronger sense of unity. Also, although the light-guiding member 263 has multiple incident surfaces 266p, it is a single component, which simplifies assembly. Note that, although an example has been described in which multiple slits are provided for one light-guiding member 263, the number of slits may be two or more.

(2) As shown in FIG. 91, the light guide member 263 has a plurality of entrance sections 266 separated by slits 263c, and the corners of the entrance surface 266p, which is the rear end of the entrance section 266, are chamfered. This increases the surface area of the entrance surface 266p, and improves the effect (light collection effect, entrance effect) of collecting light from the facing light emitter 262c (incident on the light guide member 263).

Also, as shown in FIG. 91(d), the incident surface 266p is formed to have a roof shape (mountain shape) rather than a flat surface. That is, the incident surface 266p of each incident portion 266 is processed to chamfer the edge of the incident surface 266p and form the incident surface 266p into a roof shape in order to make the area that receives light from the facing light-emitting body 262c wider than the cross-sectional area in front of the incident surface 266p. This makes the surface area of the incident surface 266p wider, and the effect of concentrating light from the facing light-emitting body 262c can be improved. In this embodiment, as examples of processing to widen the area that receives light from the facing light-emitting body 262c, chamfering the edge of the incident surface 266p and forming the incident surface 266p into a roof shape are exemplified, but only one of them may be applied, and the processing is not limited to these as long as it is for widening the area that receives light. For example, the entrance surface 266p is not limited to a roof shape (mountain shape), but may be a pyramid shape with the apex at approximately the center, a rounded shape with a circular arc (with an arc) at the center, or a knurled shape with a minute unevenness on the surface. In contrast, the exit surface 263b is formed to be flat. This makes it easier to come into close contact with the mounting surface 264a of the central lens 264.

(3) As shown in FIG. 91(b), each divided entrance surface 266p is provided with a slit 263c and a light emitter 262c so as to face two or more light emitters 262c. This ensures the amount of light incident from each entrance surface 266p, and as a result, the occurrence of unevenness on the exit surface 263b can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 91, two or more light emitters 262c are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction (or the longitudinal direction of the exit surface 263b) rather than in the vertical direction (or the direction in which the width of the exit surface 263b is shorter) with respect to each entrance surface 266p. This makes it possible to efficiently suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the longitudinal direction of the exit surface 263b.

(4) For each of the multiple slits 263c, the distance from the tip of the slit 263c to the emission surface 263b is constant (for example, the depth dimension La of the emission section 265 in FIG. 91(b) is constant). This allows the degree of light distribution and graininess reduction at the emission surface 263b to be constant and uniform over the entire surface of the emission surface 263b, improving the quality of the light presentation.

The constant depth dimension La of the emission section 265 can be expressed as, in addition to the distance from the tip of the slit 263c to the emission surface 263b, for example, the length from the rear end surface side of the upper and lower flanges 267 of the light-guiding member 263 to the emission surface 263b, the thickness of the emission section 265 exposed from the storage space 261c (or the case member 261) when the light-guiding member 263 is stored and arranged at a predetermined position in the storage space 261c, or the length from the point where each entrance section 266 connects to the emission section 265 to the emission surface 263b.

(5) Among the multiple entrance parts 266, the entrance part 266 with the smallest (shortest) depth dimension is located at the boundary between the arc-shaped part 265a and the warped part 265b of the exit part 265 shown in FIG. 91(a). Therefore, the slit with the shortest length is the slit formed at the boundary between the arc-shaped part 265a and the warped part 265b of the exit part 265. Here, as shown in FIG. 91(a), even the slit with the shortest length is formed to be longer than the constant depth dimension La of the exit part 265. In other words, the length of any of the multiple slits 263c is configured to be larger (longer) than the constant depth dimension La of the exit part 265. This can increase the degree of light separation on the exit surface 263b.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the length of the slit is at least approximately twice the depth dimension La of the constant emission section 265, but this is not limited as long as the length of the slit is longer than the depth dimension La of the constant emission section 265, and the length of the slit may be 1.2 times the depth dimension La of the constant emission section 265, or may be three times or more. The length of the slit can also be referred to as the length of the depth direction (front-back direction) of the entrance section 266 formed by the slit, or the length of the light guide member 263 contained in the storage space 261a of the case member 261, etc.

On the other hand, the width direction length of each of the multiple slits 263c (i.e., the distance between the vertical side surfaces of adjacent entrance portions 266) is formed to be shorter than the constant depth dimension La of the exit portion 265, as shown in FIG. 91(a) and the like. In other words, for any of the multiple slits 263c, the width direction length of the slit is configured to be smaller (shorter) than the constant depth dimension La of the exit portion 265. This allows for a light effect with a sense of unity without graininess on the exit surface 263b. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the width direction length of the slit is about 1/3 the length of the constant depth dimension La of the exit portion 265, but it is sufficient that the width direction length of the slit is shorter than the constant depth dimension La of the exit portion 265.

The relationship between the widthwise length of each of the multiple slits 263c and the depth dimension La of the emission portion 265 affects the degree of light separation and the degree of reduction in graininess. For example, if the ratio of the widthwise length of each slit 263c to the depth dimension La of the emission portion 265 is increased too much, the degree of light separation will be increased, but the light in the front part of the slits 263c on the emission surface 263 will be perceived as weaker, increasing the degree of graininess. Conversely, if the ratio of the widthwise length of each slit 263c to the depth dimension La of the emission portion 265 is decreased too much, the degree of graininess can be reduced, but there is a risk of reducing the degree of light separation. From this perspective, in order to maintain an appropriate degree of light separation and granularity and to create a unified light presentation, the length of the slit in the width direction may be within a range of, for example, 1/4 to 3/5 of the constant depth dimension La of the emission section 265, and preferably within that range, 1/3 to 1/2.

The widthwise length of each of the multiple slits 263c and the depth dimension La of the emission section 265 are in a size relationship that allows for a unified light presentation while maintaining a moderate degree of light separation and granularity, and multiple slits are formed on the entrance surface 263a for light separation. The slits are not necessarily longer than the depth dimension La of the emission section 265, which is constant in length, in the depth direction, but may include slits that are shorter than the depth dimension La of the emission section 265, or all slits may be formed to be shorter than the depth dimension La of the emission section 265.

Furthermore, the length in the depth direction of each of the multiple slits 263c and the depth dimension La of the emission section 265 are in a size relationship that allows for a unified light presentation while maintaining a moderate degree of light separation and granularity, and as long as multiple slits are formed on the entrance surface 263a for light separation, the slits are not necessarily shorter than the depth dimension La of the emission section 265, which is constant in width direction, but may include slits that are longer than the depth dimension La of the emission section 265, or all slits may be formed to be longer than the depth dimension La of the emission section 265.

(6) As shown in FIG. 93, the case member 261 is provided with a positioning protrusion 261g that fits into a predetermined slit. The positioning protrusion 261g is provided at a position corresponding to at least a portion of the multiple slits 263c so that when the positioning protrusion 261g is inserted from the front opening of the storage space 261a that penetrates the light guide member 263 in the front-rear direction, each divided entrance surface 266p faces the light emitter 262c. This positioning protrusion 261g can position the slit 263c in the width direction (left-right direction), and can ensure rigidity while preventing deformation of the light guide member 263 when stored.

As shown in FIG. 93(c), the positioning protrusion 261g is provided at the rear position of a predetermined slit, and an example in which it only enters the rear part of the slit has been described, but it is not limited to this, and it may be provided at the intermediate position in the depth direction of the predetermined slit, or at the tip position of the predetermined slit. Also, the positioning protrusion 261g may be provided from the intermediate position to the rear position in the depth direction of the slit, or it may be provided from the tip position of the predetermined slit to the rear position. Also, the positioning protrusion 261g is not limited to being provided corresponding to a predetermined slit 263c, but may be provided corresponding to all slits 263c. Also, the positioning protrusion 261g is not limited to being provided on the bottom surface portion 261b, but may be provided on the top surface portion 261c, or it may be provided on both the bottom surface portion 261b and the top surface portion 261c. Furthermore, when the positioning protrusions 261g are provided on both the bottom surface portion 261b and the top surface portion 261c, the positioning protrusions 261g may be provided alternately up and down for every predetermined number of slits (for example, the positioning protrusion 261g next to the positioning protrusion 261g provided on the bottom surface portion 261b is provided on the top surface portion 261c, etc.), the positioning protrusions 261g may be provided alternately up and down on both the top surface portion 261c and the bottom surface portion 261b, but every other slit, so that the positioning protrusions 261g are provided in correspondence with substantially all of the slits 263c, or the positioning protrusions 261g may be provided on both the bottom surface portion 261b and the top surface portion 261c for the same slit 263c.

(7) The light guide member 263 is provided with upper and lower flanges 267, and the case member 261 is provided with a bottom surface portion 261b and a top surface portion 261c. As a result, when the light guide member 263 is inserted into the storage space 261c from the front, the upper and lower flanges 267 abut against the front end surfaces of the bottom surface portion 261b and the top surface portion 261c, stopping (fixing) it at a predetermined position. In other words, the bottom surface portion 261b, the top surface portion 261c, and the upper and lower flanges 267 can be said to be positioning means that can accurately position the front-rear direction position of the light guide member 263 and allow insertion to a position where each incident surface 266p faces the light emitter 262c in close proximity as shown in FIG. 91 (b). As a result, the light guide member 263 can be inserted and positioned to a predetermined position, improving the work efficiency during assembly.

In this embodiment, the bottom surface 261b and the top surface 261c of the case member 261 and the upper and lower flanges 267 of the light guide member 263 are exemplified as positioning means, but are not limited thereto. For example, by matching the height of the connecting portion leading to the emission portion 265 of each incident portion 266 with the front opening height of the storage space 261c, when the light guide member 263 is inserted from the front into the storage space 261c, the bottom surface and the top surface of the incident portion 266 of the light guide member 263 may be abutted (fitted) with the bottom surface 261b and the top surface 261c, respectively, and stopped (positioned) at a predetermined position (a position where the upper and lower flanges 267 abut against the front end surfaces of the bottom surface 261b and the top surface 261c). In this case, the light guide member 263 may have the upper and lower flanges 267, but is not limited thereto, and the light guide member 263 may not have the upper and lower flanges 267. As described above, the positioning protrusion 261g may be provided at the tip of a specific slit, allowing positioning not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction.

(8) As shown in FIG. 88(b) and other figures, the central lens 264 is attached so that the mounting surface 264a is in close contact with the emission surface 263b and covers the emission surface 263b. This makes it possible to suppress diffuse reflection between the central lens 264 and the emission surface 263b, thereby improving the quality of the light presentation.

Note that "close contact" refers to contact to the extent that diffuse reflection of light that may occur between the mounting surface 264a and the exit surface 263b, etc. does not degrade the quality of the light presentation, and includes contact that is completely in contact and contact with a slight gap that does not degrade the quality of the light presentation. Also, the central lens 264 is made of a translucent material to provide a smooth presentation, and although an example of a milky white color has been described, it is not limited to this as long as it can provide a smooth presentation.

(9) Protrusions 261g, 261h and a step portion 261i are provided at the rear of the storage space 261c of the case member 261. The protrusions 261g, 261h and the step portion 261i constitute mounting portions for bringing each light-emitting body 262c close to and facing each divided incident surface 266p when the light-emitting member 262 is attached. This can improve the work efficiency when assembling the multiple light-emitting bodies 262c. In addition, by bringing each light-emitting body 262c close to and facing each incident surface 266p, it is possible to prevent light from being incident on the adjacent incident surface 263a (the incident surface 266p different from the originally intended incident surface 266p), and the degree of light separation on the exit surface 263b can be increased. Furthermore, because the light-emitting member 262 is attached to the case member 261 that houses the light-guiding member 263, it is possible to prevent problems such as the light-emitting body 262c and the incident surface 266p of the light-guiding member 263 not being able to face each other accurately and with precision, resulting in misalignment, compared to when the light-emitting member 262 is attached to another member (such as the rear unit 250).

In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the entrance surface 266p and the facing light-emitting body 262c are arranged close to each other with a gap between them, but this is not limiting when greater importance is placed on the amount of collected light. The entrance surface 266p and the facing light-emitting body 263c may be arranged so that they are in contact with each other or in close contact with each other.

(10) The LEDs 252a, 252b, which are light emitters separate from the light emitter 262c, are attached to a board attachment portion provided between the upper end and the lower end of the fixing member 251 of the rear unit 250 arranged behind the case member 261. The board attachment portion is provided in a position facing the case member 261 across the fixing member 251 of the case member 261, and therefore can be said to be provided in an area close to the case member 261. In addition, the upper light-emitting performance device 230 has an outer lens 242a and an inner lens 242b, and an outer lens 243a and an inner lens 243b for dispersing light from the LEDs 252a, 252b to the outside, in addition to the central lens 264 that covers the emission surface 263b. That is, the multiple LEDs 252a, 252b other than the light emitter 262c are attached to the rear unit 250 that is different from the case member 261, and the lens members corresponding to the multiple LEDs 252a, 252b are provided separately from the central lens 264 corresponding to the multiple light emitters 262c. This makes it possible to prevent light from the other LEDs 252a, 252b, etc. from affecting the light distribution on the light exit surface 263b of the light guide member 263. Also, since the attachment points of the light emitter 262c and the LEDs 252a, 252b are dispersed, it is possible to also take measures against heat.

(11) The top frame 241, which is arranged to surround the outer edge of the central lens 264, is plated. In addition, the central lens 264 is arranged so that it is offset from the front surface of the top frame 241, as shown in FIG. 87. This prevents unintended light, such as ambient light, from entering the central lens 264 and emitting light, which can lead to poor appearance and reduced quality of the lighting effect.

(12) Compared to the other entrance parts, the entrance part 266c is located at the center of the width of the light-guiding member 263, and is therefore more susceptible to loads during assembly, etc. On the other hand, when performing a light presentation, it is unlikely that the left and right halves of the entrance part 266c will emit light in different colors or patterns with the center part as the boundary. For this reason, the slit 263c is not provided for the entrance part 266c located in the center. As a result, compared to when the slit 263c is provided, it is possible to make the entrance part 266c less susceptible to damage when a load is applied during assembly, etc., and the strength of the light-guiding member 263 can be increased.

In addition, positioning protrusions 261g are provided in slits 263c formed on both sides of incident portion 266c, which has a wider incident surface than the other incident portions 266. Although positioning protrusions 261g are tall enough to enter slit 263c, they are tall enough not to allow the rear end (incident surface) of incident portion 266 to enter the slit. For this reason, for example, if an incident portion 266 is to be inserted while shifted horizontally by one incident portion 266, it will come into contact with the rear surface of incident portion 266c, which is longer horizontally than the other incident portions 266, and will not be able to be inserted any further rearward. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to light guide member 263 caused by forcibly inserting the incident portion 266 while shifted left and right.

(13) As shown in FIG. 85 etc., the left end frame 245c and the right end frame 245d of the top frame 241 are each formed with recesses 245j, 245k that are deeper the further forward they are located, from the rear toward the openings 244a, 244b, and are configured so that the cross section (upper end faces 264b, 264c) of the central lens 264 faces from the openings 244a, 244b. This prevents the top frame 241 from tightly dividing and covering the upper end faces 264b, 264c of the central lens 264 when the slot machine 1 (upper light-emitting performance device 230) is viewed from the front, which would result in a poor appearance, and allows the player to enjoy a beautiful appearance.

(14) The upper light-emitting device 230 can provide a smooth light effect, particularly in the central lens 264, while increasing the degree of light separation and reducing the graininess.

The light effect in the central lens 264 may be, for example, first incident on the central entrance 266c, and then controlled so that the light is incident on the adjacent entrances 266 on the left and right sides one by one as time passes (e.g., every 0.2 seconds), so that the light spreads from the center to the left and right, and finally everything lights up. Alternatively, after the effect of everything lighting up is performed, the light may be stopped from entering the entrances 266e located at both ends in the width direction, and then the light may be controlled so that the light is stopped from entering the adjacent entrances 266 on the central side one by one as time passes (e.g., every 0.2 seconds), so that the light gradually fades out from the left and right toward the center.

In addition, the light effect in the central lens 264 may be, for example, first incident on the central entrance portion 266c, and then as time passes (for example, every 0.2 seconds), the entrance portion 266 through which the light is incident may be controlled to switch one by one to the adjacent entrance portion 266 on the left and right, thereby creating an effect in which the light moves from the center to the left and right. In addition, after switching to the entrance portions 266e located at both ends in the width direction, the light may be controlled to switch one by one to the adjacent entrance portions 266 on the center side, thereby creating an effect in which the light moves from the left and right to the center.

In addition, the light effect in the central lens 264 may be a swirling flame effect. Specifically, using several (2-4) entrance parts 266 around the entrance part 266c at the central position as the center, a yellow light may spread from the center to the left and right and narrow from the left and right to the center as time passes, and in conjunction with this effect, several (2-4) entrance parts 266 around the left and right sides of the entrance part 266 into which the yellow light is incident may be used to cause orange light to flicker left and right, and several (2-4) entrance parts 266 around the left and right sides of the entrance part 266 into which the orange light is incident may be used to cause red light to flicker left and right. In addition, at a predetermined timing, the yellow light may spread from the center to the left and right as if it were exploding, and after a performance in which everything glows yellow for an instant (explosion performance), the performance may be returned to the above-mentioned yellow, orange, and red light flickering left and right.

Although the light effects in the central lens 264 are not limited to this, as described above, by using the light guide member 263 having multiple entrance sections 266 formed thereon, even if different light is made to enter each entrance section 266 as described above, it is possible to reflect the light finely on the exit surface 263b side, making it possible to separate the light and to create a unified light effect without a grainy feel. The light effects in the upper lens section 242 and the lower lens section 243 may be performed in a manner linked to the light effects in the central lens 264 (for example, when the central lens 264 is all lit up or when an explosion effect is performed), or may be performed in a manner separate from the light effects in the central lens 264.

In addition, it is preferable that the light effects in the central lens 264 are performed in a manner that corresponds to the game state that can be controlled in the pachinko slot machine 1. Game states that can be controlled in the pachinko slot machine 1 include, for example, advantageous states (such as so-called AT states and bonus states) in which the expected value of medal increase is positive and is advantageous to the player, chance states (such as so-called chance zones (CZ) and high probability zones) that are likely to transition to advantageous states, and normal states that are neither advantageous nor chance states.

In the normal state, it is preferable that the light effects in the central lens 264 be performed in a manner that gives the player a calm and quiet impression (for example, a monochromatic white light, a monotonous blinking mode, etc.) compared to other states. In addition, it is preferable that the effects in other light effects (for example, the upper lens part 242, the lower lens part 243, the left side effect device 232, the right side effect device 23, the waist panel 13, etc.) and sound effects (for example, the speakers 232a, 233a, the speakers 35a, 35b, etc.) be performed in a manner that gives the player a calm and quiet impression in the normal state. In general, it is rare (not very common) for effects to be performed in a manner that overly excites the player's expectations during the normal state. However, even in the normal state, when an effect occurs in other effect devices including the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220, the light effect in the central lens 264 and the effect in other effect units are not limited to those that give the player a quiet and tranquil impression, but may be performed in a mode corresponding to the effect in the main display device 210, etc. (for example, a mode that stirs up the player's expectations, lighting/flashing in flashy colors, outputting flashy sound effects, etc.). In this case, the timing for switching the mode of the light effect in the central lens 264 and the effect in other effect units from a mode that gives the player a quiet and tranquil impression to a mode corresponding to the effect in the main display device 210, etc., may be the same timing as the start of the effect in the main display device 210, etc., may be a timing after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the effect started in the main display device 210, etc., or may be a timing until the effect starts in the main display device 210, etc., depending on the type of effect in the main display device 210, etc. For example, when a first performance is performed on the main display device 210, etc., the mode of the light performance etc. on the central lens 264 may be switched to a mode corresponding to the first performance at the same timing as the start of the first performance, when a second performance is performed on the main display device 210, etc., the mode of the light performance etc. on the central lens 264 may be switched to a mode corresponding to the second performance at a timing after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the second performance, and when a third performance is performed on the main display device 210, etc., the mode of the light performance etc. on the central lens 264 may be switched to a mode corresponding to the third performance at a predetermined timing before the start of the third performance. Also, in a normal state, when a predetermined condition is met (such as winning a lottery), for example, the mode of the light performance on the central lens 264 rather than the other performance parts may be used to notify the player of useful information (for example, suggesting a setting value set in the slot machine 1, suggesting whether or not it is in a favorable zone, etc.).

In a chance state where there is an expectation of a transition to an increased ball output zone such as a CZ or a high probability zone, the state is advantageous compared to the normal state and the expectation of ball output is increased, so it is preferable to perform the light effect in the central lens 264 in an impressive manner that draws the player's attention and stimulates the player's expectations (for example, a flashing manner, a manner that emits light in multiple colors, a lively manner, a manner that makes the player feel uncomfortable by turning off the light, a manner different from the manner in the normal state, etc.). Also, in the chance state, it is preferable that the other light effect units and sound effect units also perform the effect in an impressive manner that draws the player's attention and stimulates the player's expectations. In addition, in the chance state, the light effect in the central lens 264 and the manner of the effect in each of the other light effect units and sound effect units may be used to notify (suggest) the possibility of transitioning to an advantageous state. In addition, in the case of a specific type of chance state (for example, a specific chance state among multiple types of chance states or a premium chance state), the possibility of transitioning to an advantageous state may be notified (suggested) by the manner of the light effect in the central lens 264 rather than by other light effect units, etc. This can increase the attention to the light effects in the central lens 264. The timing for notifying (suggesting) the possibility of transitioning to an advantageous state by the aspect of the light effects in the central lens 264 may be the timing when control to the chance state is started, a predetermined timing during the chance state (or the timing when a predetermined condition is met), or the timing just before the control to the chance state ends. In the chance state, when a predetermined condition is met (such as winning a lottery), for example, the aspect of the light effects in the central lens 264 rather than other effects may notify the player of useful information (for example, suggesting a setting value set in the slot machine 1, suggesting the possibility of transitioning to an advantageous state, etc.).

In favorable states such as the AT state and bonus state, the number of balls dispensed increases (increasing zone) compared to the normal state, so it is preferable to perform the light effects in the central lens 264 in an impressive manner that draws the player's attention and heightens the player's expectations (for example, a flashing mode, a multi-colored light emission mode, a lively mode, or conversely, a mode that is turned off to make the player feel uncomfortable, or at least a mode that is different from the normal state). Also, in favorable states, it is preferable for other light effects and sound effects to be performed in an impressive manner that draws the player's attention and heightens the player's expectations.

In addition, since the advantageous state is a play interval that is directly advantageous to the player compared to the chance state and the like, the effects in the various effects sections including the central lens 264 may be executed in a more flashy and impressive manner than in the chance state (for example, an emphasis manner, a short blinking interval, many luminous colors, etc.). Furthermore, when an effect that can be executed in both the advantageous state and the chance state (hereinafter also referred to as a specific effect) is executed during the advantageous state, the specific effect may be executed in a more flashy and impressive manner than when executed during the chance state, and conversely, when a specific effect is executed during the chance state, the specific effect may be executed in a more flashy and impressive manner than when executed during the advantageous state, so as to give the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, since advantageous states tend to remain in the state for a longer period of time compared to chance states, etc., the effects may be flashy and impressive, but may be executed in a manner that provides a stronger stimulus to the player, such as intense flashing, less frequently than in chance states. Furthermore, when a specific effect that can be executed in both advantageous and chance states is executed during an advantageous state, the specific effect may be executed in a manner that provides a stronger stimulus to the player, such as intense flashing, less frequently than in chance states, and conversely, when a specific effect is executed during a chance state, the specific effect may be executed in a manner that provides a stronger stimulus to the player, such as intense flashing, less frequently than in advantageous states, causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in an advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the controlled advantageous state (for example, the number of remaining AT games, the probability of AT continuation, the number of medals paid out in the advantageous state, the advantage of the state to be controlled after the advantageous state ends, etc.) may be notified (suggested) by the light effects in the central lens 264, the aspects of the effects in other light effects and sound effects, or the aspects of the light effects in the central lens 264 rather than other light effects. This can increase the degree of attention to the light effects in the central lens 264. In addition, the timing for notifying the degree of advantage of the advantageous state controlled by the aspects of the light effects, etc. in the central lens 264 may be the timing when the control to the advantageous state is started, may be a predetermined timing during the advantageous state (or the timing when a predetermined condition is established), or may be the timing immediately before the control to the advantageous state ends. Also, in an advantageous state, when a certain condition is met (such as winning a lottery), the light effects in the central lens 264, rather than in other effects sections, may be used to notify the player of useful information, for example (for example, suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine 1, notifying the player of the degree of advantage regarding the advantageous state being controlled, etc.).

In the above, the aspects of the effects in the various effects sections including the central lens 264 when a player is playing a game have been mainly described. However, in the so-called customer waiting state where no game is being played, it is required to perform effects that appeal to play (for example, a flashing aspect, a multi-colored light emission aspect, a conspicuous aspect, etc.) in order to promote operation (play). In the customer waiting state, it is preferable to perform the light effects in the central lens 264 in a manner corresponding to a predetermined play promotion effect performed in other effect devices including the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220, etc. For example, during the first game promotion effect, the light effects may be performed in a first aspect that is a control pattern corresponding to the first game promotion effect, and during the second game promotion effect, the light effects may be performed in a second aspect that is a control pattern corresponding to the second game promotion effect. In addition, it is preferable that the effects in the other light effects sections and sound effects sections are also performed in a manner corresponding to the game promotion effect in the main display device 210, etc. in the customer waiting state.

When a performance is being performed during the customer waiting state and a game is started by a player, the various performance parts including the central lens 264 and the main display device 210 may be controlled (switching control) to instantly switch to a performance pattern (performance content) corresponding to the current game state, or may be controlled (switching control) to switch to a performance pattern corresponding to the current game state so as to cross-fade with the performance in the customer waiting state. When a performance is being performed during the customer waiting state and a game is started by a player, the switching control for switching the central lens 264 to a performance pattern (performance content) corresponding to the current game state may be the same as that for the various performance parts other than the central lens 264 and the main display device 210, or a different switching control may be used than that for the various performance parts other than the central lens 264 and the main display device 210.

In addition, in an error state in which an error has occurred in the pachislot machine 1 and play has been halted, it is preferable to perform the light effects in the central lens 264, for example, in a manner that clearly notifies the player and arcade staff that an error has occurred (for example, rapid flashing of red light, etc.). In addition, it is preferable for the effects in the other light effects and sound effects to also be performed in an error state in a manner that clearly notifies the player and arcade staff that an error has occurred.

Regarding the presentation pattern (presentation contents) in an error state, no presentation elements are necessary, so for example, a uniform presentation pattern may be used in various presentation sections including the central lens 264. Also, when switching from another state to an error state, for many errors, the presentation to notify the occurrence of the error takes priority over presentations according to the progress of the game, etc., so it is desirable to switch to the presentation pattern (presentation contents) corresponding to the error as soon as the error occurs. Since the occurrence of an error state is undesirable for the player, it is desirable to quickly return to the original presentation pattern (presentation contents according to the progress of the game, etc.) when the error is resolved. However, since it is sufficient that the progress of the game is at least possible after the error recovery, for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, and the sound production unit are quickly restored to the original production pattern after the error recovery, while the light production unit including the central lens 264, the upper lens unit 242, the lower lens unit 243, the left side production device 232, the right side production device 23, and the waist panel 13 may continue the production pattern corresponding to the error state until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or 1 minute) has elapsed after the error recovery, and then restore the original production pattern after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, for example, for a fraudulent player who commits a fraudulent act that induces an error, even if the error that occurred is resolved in an instant, the light emission production continues in the production pattern corresponding to the error state until the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the player can be made to feel a sense of caution, and as a result, the deterrent effect of such fraudulent acts can be increased. In addition, it is possible to notify the staff of the game establishment that the player may be committing a fraudulent act until the predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, in the case of an error that does not stop the game, this is not the case, and for example, the error may be notified only by the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, or the sound production unit, and the light production unit including the central lens 264 may not emit a production pattern corresponding to the error. In addition, when the light production unit including the central lens 264 produces a production corresponding to the error, the production corresponding to the error may end when the cause of the error is eliminated and the front door is closed, or may end when the cause of the error is eliminated (for example, in the case of a full tank error when the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S determines that a certain number of medals or more have been stored, the medals stored in the storage unit are reduced to at least a certain number and a reset operation is performed (when the front door is open)).

(15) In the second embodiment, a light guide member in which slits are formed so that multiple incident parts are arranged in one row (one column, one direction, horizontal direction) relative to the exit part is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and slits may be formed not only vertically but also horizontally relative to the light guide member so that multiple incident parts are arranged in multiple rows (for example, two columns, one above and one below) relative to the exit part. Specifically, slits may be formed so that a total of 120 incident parts are provided in three vertical rows (three vertically) and 40 horizontal columns (40 horizontally). In addition, the exit surface is not limited to a horizontally long rectangular shape, and may be any shape, such as a circle, an ellipse, or a triangle, as long as the slits are provided according to the shape to form the incident parts.

(16) The light-guiding member having the characteristics described in the second embodiment is not limited to those used in the light-emitting performance device arranged in the upper center of the gaming machine cabinet, but may also be used in, in addition to or instead of, the side lamps of the gaming machine cabinet (e.g., the left side performance device 232, the right side performance device 233, etc.), light-emitting performance devices arranged to surround the periphery of the performance display window D1, light-emitting performance devices arranged to surround the periphery of the main display window 4, light-emitting performance devices arranged to surround the periphery of the performance display window D1 and the main display window 4, etc. Surrounding the periphery means, for example, those that surround the top, bottom, left, right, left, top, bottom, etc. of the object to be surrounded (e.g., the performance display window D1, etc.). Furthermore, in order to maximize the presentation effect when using light guide members in light-emitting devices provided on the left and right sides of a gaming machine cabinet, it is preferable to use a light-emitting device having a continuous, open structure from the top to the bottom on both sides of a cabinet that is a single door (one door), rather than a top-bottom separated cabinet that can be opened and closed as separate doors as exemplified in the first embodiment, or a cabinet with a single door (one door) as exemplified in the second embodiment, where the side lamps, for example, have a non-continuous structure on the top and bottom. Below, an example is given of a case in which light guide members are used in light-emitting devices provided on both the left and right sides of a gaming machine cabinet.

When using light-guiding members in light-emitting devices provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine cabinet, the longitudinal direction of the case member corresponding to the above-mentioned case member 261 may be vertical, and the longitudinal direction of the light-guiding members may also be vertical. Note that when using light-guiding members in light-emitting devices provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine cabinet, it is sufficient to have a case member corresponding to the case member 261, and other components (e.g., upper lens section 242, lower lens section 243, rear unit 250, etc.) may be omitted, and the case member may be directly placed and attached to the door frame 225 via the case member.

In addition, when the light-guiding member is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is vertical, it is desirable to increase the strength and durability of the light-guiding member by making the shape of the light-guiding member's exit surface in the left-right direction (width direction) approximately linear to match the outer contour of the gaming machine housing. In addition, the approximately linear surface may be directed directly ahead, or may be directed toward the center so that its normal line is in the direction of the center of the front of the gaming machine (the player). On the other hand, when the light-guiding member is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is vertical, the shape of the light-guiding member's exit surface in the front-back direction (depth direction) is unlikely to cause strength problems, so various shapes (for example, a shape that becomes a smoothly curved surface that protrudes forward as it goes upward or downward from the center position in the vertical direction) may be appropriately adopted as a design. In addition, by adjusting the length by which the exit part of the light-guiding member protrudes from the case member, the light-emitting performance may be made visible not only from the front side of the gaming machine housing but also from the side side (horizontal direction) of the gaming machine housing. In this case, the slits are long enough that they are not visible from the sides of the gaming machine cabinet, allowing the light-emitting performance area to be expanded without compromising the aesthetic appearance of the light-emitting performance device as a side lamp.

In addition, as in the second embodiment, a lens corresponding to the central lens 264 is arranged to cover the front surface of the light-guiding member (exit surface). The lens is preferably arranged in close contact with the exit surface of the light-guiding member, is made of a translucent material, and has a milky white color, so that a smooth performance can be performed. In addition, when the light-guiding member's exit surface is configured to be visible from the side (horizontal direction) of the gaming machine housing, the lens is preferably shaped to cover not only the exit surface of the light-guiding member but also the side surface of the exit portion that is connected to the exit surface and extends rearward in close contact. Furthermore, in a light-emitting performance device as a side lamp, when other components other than the light-guiding member and the case member (for example, the upper lens portion 242, the lower lens portion 243, the rear unit 250, etc.) are omitted, it is desirable to protect the lens corresponding to the central lens by covering it with an outer lens having high strength and transparency such as acrylic.

Also, as described above, a light-guiding member in which slits are formed not only vertically but also horizontally in the light-guiding member so that multiple entrance portions are arranged in multiple rows (for example, two columns) relative to the exit portion may be used in the light-emitting performance devices provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine housing (arranged vertically so that the longitudinal direction of the light-guiding member is approximately vertical). In this case, the left and right light-emitting performance devices each have a row on the center side of the gaming machine and a row on the outside that form a continuous, punched-out structure extending from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine housing. Also, in this case, by adjusting the length by which the exit portions of the light-guiding members that form the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the row on the outside protrude from the case member, the light-emitting performance may be made visible not only from the front side of the gaming machine housing but also from the side side (horizontal direction) of the gaming machine housing. This allows the emission surfaces corresponding to the rows on the central side of the gaming machine and the emission surfaces corresponding to the rows on the outer side to perform not only the same light-emitting effects, but also different light-emitting effects, and when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, both light-emitting effects are visible, which particularly attracts the player's interest and provides a dynamic and powerful effect. The emission surfaces corresponding to the rows on the central side of the gaming machine and the emission surfaces corresponding to the rows on the outer side may face the same direction to the front, or may face different directions to the front. For example, the emission surfaces corresponding to the rows on the central side of the gaming machine may face toward the center of the gaming machine, while the emission surfaces corresponding to the rows on the outer side may face slightly toward the outside of the gaming machine, so that the front end of the emission surface corresponding to the rows on the central side of the gaming machine and the front end of the emission surface corresponding to the rows on the outer side intersect at an acute angle and protrude (point) forward.

In addition, as described above, when each of the left and right light-emitting devices is configured to have a row on the center side of the gaming machine and a row on the outside that form a continuous, punched-out structure extending from top to bottom, there is a risk that the light-emitting effects of the exit surface corresponding to the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the exit surface corresponding to the row on the outside side will be mixed in an unintended way when viewed from the front (there is a risk that one will affect the other too much). For this reason, the length of the slit between the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the row on the outside may be made longer than other slits (for example, slits between adjacent entrance parts vertically in the row on the center side (or the outside) of the gaming machine), and for example, the slit between the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the row on the outside may be formed to a position just before the exit surface (a position that leaves a thickness sufficient to hold the exit surface), and the length from the tip of the slit to the exit surface may be made smaller (shorter) than the depth dimension La described above. The slit between the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the row on the outside side will not be visible from the side even if it is made deep, so it can be made as deep as its strength allows. This increases the degree of light separation between the exit surface corresponding to the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the exit surface corresponding to the row on the outer side. In this case, since light separation between the exit surface corresponding to the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the exit surface corresponding to the row on the outer side is possible, for example, in either or both of the rows on the center side of the gaming machine and the outer side, slits may not be formed between adjacent entrance parts vertically (i.e., only slits may be formed between the row on the center side of the gaming machine and the row on the outer side), or the interval at which the slits are formed (the vertical width of one entrance part) may be made larger.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to forming the central row and the outer row with one light-guiding member, but may be such that the degree of light separation between the exit surface corresponding to the central row of the gaming machine and the exit surface corresponding to the outer row is increased by arranging a light-guiding member for forming the central row of the gaming machine and a light-guiding member for forming the outer row. In this case, in order to prevent the gap between the exit surface corresponding to the central row of the gaming machine and the exit surface corresponding to the outer row (the gap between the two light-guiding members) from being visible when viewed from the front, the lenses covering the two exit surfaces may be integrated, and one lens may be arranged so as to be in close contact with each exit surface of the two light-guiding members. In the above, an example has been described in which each of the left and right light-emitting devices has two rows that are continuous and cut out from above to below, but the number of rows is not limited to two and may be three or more.

<Configuration of Duct Unit 912>
Next, the configuration of the duct unit 912 will be described with reference to Figures 95 to 98. Figure 95 is a perspective view of the duct unit 912. Figure 96 is a rear view of the duct unit 912. Figure 97 is a cross-sectional view taken along line dd shown in Figure 96. Figure 98 is a diagram for explaining the attachment/detachment means of the water storage section 1102, with Figure 98(a) being an exploded perspective view of the duct unit 912 as viewed from the rear, and Figure 98(b) being a perspective view of the water storage section 1102 as viewed from the right front.

The duct unit 912 is attached by screwing to the rear side of the upper frame portion 225a of the door frame 225. The duct unit 912 guides the air taken in from the air intake port 921a to a housing-side duct arranged on the rear side in the front-rear direction of the door mechanism D. The air guided to the housing-side duct cools the irradiation unit B (such as a projection mapping device).

As shown in Figures 95 and 96, the duct unit 912 has a passage section 1101 and a water storage section 1102 that communicates with the passage section 1101. The duct unit 912 guides the air that enters the inside of the housing from the air intake port 921a to the air intake duct of the irradiation unit B.

The passage 1101 is formed in a flat rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. The passage 1101 has a connection block 1111 that faces the intake port 921a and a drainage block 1112 that is continuous with the connection block 1111.

The connection block 1111 forms the left side of the passage 1101 in the left-right direction. The connection block 1111 is formed in a hollow box shape and has an intake opening 1113 and a duct connection port 1114. The intake opening 1113 is an opening facing upward and faces the intake port 921a. The duct connection port 1114 is an opening facing rearward in the front-rear direction and faces the intake duct of the irradiation unit B. The connection block 1111 is formed by sandwiching the intake port connection member 1123 having the intake opening 1113 from above and below with mounting portions provided on the lower case member 1121 that forms the underside of the passage 1101 and the upper case member 1122 that forms the cover of the passage 1101, and assembling them so that air and liquid do not leak out to the outside.

The intake opening 1113 is set in a rectangular shape that is larger than the intake port 921a. A rubber packing 1115 is attached to the intake opening 1113. The rubber packing 1115 is formed in a rectangular frame shape that fits around the periphery of the intake opening 1113.

The rubber packing 1115 is interposed in a compressed state between the periphery of the intake opening 1113 and the periphery of the intake port 921a (the inner surface of the upper frame portion 225a). This makes it possible to prevent liquid that has entered through the intake port 921a from leaking to the outside of the duct unit 912. That is, the liquid that has entered through the intake port 921a enters the connection block 1111 through the intake opening 1113. Also, the air passing through the intake port 921a enters the connection block 1111 through the intake opening 1113.

The duct connection port 1114 is set in a rectangular shape to match the opening of the intake duct 225. A rubber packing 1116 (see FIG. 96) is attached to the duct connection port 1114. The rubber packing 1116 is formed in a rectangular frame shape that fits around the periphery of the duct connection port 1114.

The rubber gasket 1116 is interposed in a compressed state between the periphery of the duct connection port 1114 and the periphery of the intake duct opening. This prevents air passing through the duct connection port 1114 from leaking outside the intake duct, and allows the air in the duct unit 912 to be efficiently sent to the intake duct. In other words, the air passing through the duct connection port 1114 enters the intake duct.

In this embodiment, the rubber packings 1115 and 1116 constitute a cushioning member. Note that other sealing members may be used instead of the rubber packings 1115 and 1116 as long as they reduce the gap between the intake opening 1113 and the intake port 921a, and the gap between the duct connection port 1114 and the intake duct.

The drainage block 1112 is formed in a hollow box shape that communicates with the connection block 1111. The drainage block 1112 is a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the left-right direction, and its left end is connected to the connection block 1111. The right end of the drainage block 1112 is connected to the water storage section 1102. As shown in FIG. 96, the bottom surface of the connection block 1111 is located above the top surface of the water storage section 1102. The drainage block 1112 is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the water storage section. Therefore, liquid that enters the connection block 1111 flows through the drainage block 1112 and is guided to the water storage section 1102.

As shown in FIG. 97, the passage 1101 is formed with an entrance 1131, a first passage 1132, and a second passage 1133. The entrance 1131 is the bottom surface of the intake port connection member 1123, and faces the intake opening 1113 in the vertical direction. The first passage 1132 is the area from the entrance 1131 to the second passage 1133 side or the drain block 1112 side. The second passage 1133 is the area from the first passage 1132 to the duct connection port 1114. A wall 1135 is provided between the first passage 1132 and the second passage 1133. The wall 1135 is provided so as to be approximately vertically upward and curved toward the first passage 1132 side.

The bottom surface of the entrance 1131 is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the first passage 1132. In addition, the bottom surface of the first passage 1132 is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the drainage block 1112 in the direction of the drainage block 1112 side, and becomes higher as it approaches the second passage 1133 in the direction of the second passage 1133 side. On the other hand, the bottom surface of the second passage 1133 is formed to be approximately horizontal. Therefore, the height of the wall portion 1135 is formed so that it becomes higher as it approaches the drainage block 1112.

In addition, multiple ribs 1141 are provided on the bottom surface of the first passage 1132. The multiple ribs 1141 are arranged at appropriate intervals in the front-to-rear direction. The multiple ribs 1141 also extend in the left-to-right direction.

The ribs 1141 are integrally molded with the lower case member 1121. Therefore, liquid that strikes the ribs 1141 does not slip under the ribs 1141. The ribs 1141 guide the liquid that has entered through the intake opening 1113 toward the drain block 1112. The ribs 1141 prevent the liquid that has entered through the intake opening 1113 from proceeding to the second passage 1133. This allows the momentum of the liquid to gradually weaken. That is, the momentum of the liquid weakens when the liquid gets over the first rib 1141, and it becomes difficult for the liquid that has gotten over the first rib 1141 to get over the second rib 1141. And the more ribs 1141 that are overcome, the weaker the momentum of the liquid becomes. Therefore, the liquid can be guided to the drain block 1112 while preventing it from proceeding to the second passage 1133.

In addition, in this embodiment, the bottom surface of the first passage 1132 is not only lowered toward the drainage block 1112 in the direction toward the drainage block 1112, but is also inclined toward the second passage 1133 in the direction toward the second passage 1133 so that it is higher toward the second passage 1133. In other words, the gradient that prevents progression to the second passage 1133 also makes it difficult to climb over the rib 1141. Furthermore, since a wall portion 1135 is provided on the front side of the second passage 1133, even if all the ribs 1141 are climbed over, progression to the second passage 1133 can be prevented. This makes it possible to reduce the length required for the first passage 1132 in the front-rear direction, the area required for the first passage 1132, and the number of ribs required for the first passage 1132, thereby saving space.

On the other hand, the air passing through the first passage 1132 passes through the intake duct and reaches the irradiation unit B (projection mapping device, etc.) to be cooled. This air flow is generated by an exhaust fan provided in the irradiation unit B. The exhaust fan generates an air volume capable of sucking outside air into the duct unit 912 from the intake port 921a. Note that instead of the exhaust fan, an intake fan may be provided in the intake duct, and an intake fan and an exhaust fan may be provided in each of the intake duct and the exhaust duct. Also, the object to be cooled is not limited to the projector device, and may be other electric components or electronic components that generate heat. Note that the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment exhausts the air used for cooling into the housing because there is no particular exhaust port for exhausting the air to the outside of the housing, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to provide an exhaust port for exhausting the air used for cooling outside the housing, and to arrange a duct to send the air used for cooling to the exhaust port, and to exhaust the air from the exhaust port to the outside of the housing of the pachislot machine 1.

The water storage section 1102 is formed in a hollow box shape with an opening at the top, and stores the liquid that has flowed in from the drain block 1112. As shown in FIG. 95, the opening of the water storage section 1102 is blocked by a lid section 1126 provided at the right end of the drain block 1112. The water storage section 1102 is formed from a translucent resin. This allows the liquid stored in the water storage section 1102 to be confirmed from outside the water storage section 1102.

The water storage unit 1102 is detachably connected at its upper part to the drain block 1112. The water storage unit 1102 is detachably connected at its lower part to the rear side of the door frame 225 (for example, the rear side of the back panel constituting the screen device C attached to the rear side of the door frame 225). In this embodiment, the detachment means for making it detachable is preferably one that is detachable without requiring (using) tools. This makes it possible to remove the water storage unit 1102 from the upper door body 901 and the drain block 1112 and discard the liquid contained in the water storage unit 1102 without any unauthorized changes to the slot machine 1, such as removing screws.

In this embodiment, a slide hook 1136 and a rotating lock member 1137 are used as the means for attaching and detaching the upper part of the water storage section 1102, and a latch member 1139 is used as the means for attaching and detaching the lower part of the water storage section 1102.

First, the slide hook 1136 and the rotation lock member 1137, which are the attachment/detachment means for the upper part of the water storage part 1102, will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, the slide hook 1136 is composed of a first hook part 1136a that is provided on the upper right side of the water storage part 1102 so as to protrude downward and has an L-shaped cross section, a flat second hook part 1136b that is provided on the upper left side of the water storage part 1102 so as to protrude leftward, a first hooked part 1136c that is provided so as to protrude rearward from a front position on the right side of the lid part 1126 of the drainage block 1112, and a second hooked part 1136d that is provided so as to protrude upward on the left side of the lid part 1126 of the drainage block 1112. The slide hook 1136 is configured to be fixed in the vertical direction by engaging the first hooking portion 1136a with the first hooked portion 1136c, and the second hooking portion 1136b with the second hooked portion 1136d, and by sliding the water storage portion 1102 forward (towards the drainage block 1112) to engage the hooking portion.

The rotation lock member 1137 is composed of a rotation lock portion 1137a provided on the upper left side of the water storage portion 1102, and a protrusion receiving portion 1137b provided on the left side of the lid portion 1126 of the drainage block 1112. The rotation lock portion 1137a is a member that can change the longitudinal angle of the long plate flange-shaped protrusion portion 1138b provided at the front in the horizontal and vertical directions by rotating the operating portion 1138a provided at the rear surface of the rotation lock portion 1137a.

The projection receiving portion 1137b has an opening 1138c that can receive the horizontal projection 1138b from the rear, a first wall member 1138d that is provided below the opening 1138c and abuts against the rear surface of the vertically displaced projection 1138b to prevent rearward movement, and a second wall member 1138e that is provided above the opening 1138c and abuts against the rear surface of the vertically displaced projection 1138b to prevent rearward movement. As a result, the upper part of the water storage portion 1102 is fixed in the vertical direction by setting the projection 1138b of the rotation lock portion 1137a in the horizontal direction, sliding the water storage portion 1102 forward (toward the drainage block 1112) and hooking it with the slide hook 1136, and then displacing the projection 1138b of the rotation lock portion 1137a in the vertical direction, thereby fixing and locking the front-rear direction as well. It can be removed by the reverse procedure.

The latch member 1139 is a member having a pin-shaped stopper 1139a with an engaging portion at its tip, and a receiving portion 1139b with a recess with an engaged portion on its inner surface that can receive the tip of the stopper 1139a. The latch member 1139 can be fixed by inserting the stopper 1139a into the receiving portion 1139b, and can be released by pulling out the stopper 1139a. The receiving portion 1139b is located at a position where a latch member through hole provided in the lower part of the water storage portion 1102 is located when the upper part of the water storage portion 1102 is fixed, and is attached to the rear surface of the back panel constituting the screen device C attached to the rear side of the door frame 225, for example. Therefore, when the upper part of the water storage portion 1102 is fixed, the lower part of the water storage portion 1102 can be fixed by inserting the stopper 1139a from the rear into the through hole provided in the lower part of the water storage portion 1102.

(Effects and Modifications of Duct Unit 912)
(1) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, the bottom surface of the first passage 1132 is not only lowered toward the drainage block 1112 in the direction toward the drainage block 1112, but is also inclined toward the second passage 1133 in the direction toward the second passage 1133. In other words, the gradient that prevents the passage from moving toward the second passage 1133 makes it difficult to climb over the rib 1141. Furthermore, a wall portion 1135 is provided on the front side of the second passage 1133. Therefore, even if the passage moves over all the ribs 1141, the passage can be prevented from moving toward the second passage 1133. This makes it possible to reduce the length required for the first passage 1132 in the front-rear direction, the area required for the first passage 1132, and the number of ribs required for the first passage 1132, thereby saving space.

(2) In this embodiment, an example of a means for making the water storage unit 1102 detachable and attachable without the need for (using) tools or the like has been described. This allows the water storage unit 1102 to be removed from the upper door body 901 and the drain block 1112 and the liquid contained in the water storage unit 1102 to be discarded without the need for any action that could be considered unauthorized modification of the slot machine 1, such as removing screws.

In the present embodiment, the example in which the vertical direction is fixed by the slide hook 1136 and the front-rear direction is fixed by the rotation lock member 1137 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the slide hook 1136 may be used. In this case, a protrusion may be provided at the upper rear end of the first hooked portion 1136c and the second hooked portion 1136d, and the front-rear direction may be fixed by the protrusion. In addition, the slide hook 1136, the rotation lock member 1137, and the latch member 1139 have been exemplified as the means for attaching and detaching the water storage portion 1102, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as the attachment member is capable of attaching and detaching without requiring (using) tools, and may be, for example, a lever clip, a hook-and-loop fastener, a magnet, etc. In addition, the example in which the upper and lower parts of the water storage portion 1102 are fixed has been described as the means for attaching and detaching the water storage portion 1102. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the attachment member may be a member that fixes only the upper part of the water storage portion 1102, or a member that fixes the center part of the water storage portion 1102.

<Configuration of Screen Device C>
Next, the structure of the screen unit C constituting the projection mapping device will be described with reference to Fig. 99 and Fig. 100. Fig. 99(a) is a perspective view of the screen unit C, and Fig. 99(b) is an exploded perspective view of the screen unit C seen from the right front. Fig. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line zz shown in Fig. 99(a).

As shown in FIG. 99, the screen device C is attached to the rear side of the door frame 225 so as to face forward through the upper area (performance display window D1) defined above the partition 225d. The screen device C includes a light-transmitting plate 1045, a front cover 1046, a screen sheet 1047, a rear cover 1048, and a back panel 1049.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 is mainly made of a resin such as an acrylic plate or a glass plate having light-transmitting properties, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The light-transmitting plate 1045 has a flat portion 1045a located in the center, and side portions 1045b formed continuously from the four side edges of the flat portion 1045a toward the rear. The light-transmitting plate 1045 is attached by screwing it to the rear side of the door frame 225.

The screen sheet 1047 is a translucent screen on which a projection image is displayed by projecting it from behind, and has an entrance surface on the rear side where the light irradiated from the irradiation unit B (projector) enters, and a display surface on the front side where the projection image is projected by the light incident on the entrance surface passing through. The screen sheet 1047 is formed to have a uniform thickness over its entire surface, for example, mainly made of a translucent glass plate, acrylic plate, or resin film, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected.

The front cover 1046 and the rear cover 1048 are members for sandwiching and fixing the screen sheet 1047 between them and arranging it on the rear side of the light-transmitting plate 1045. The front cover 1046 is a roughly rectangular frame body with an appropriate thickness in the front-to-rear direction, and an opening 1046a capable of accommodating the screen sheet 1047 is formed from the rear face. In addition, on the four sides (four sides) of the front face of the front cover 1046, front cover members 1046b are formed as members that extend toward the center of the frame body and are used to cover and hold the four edges of the screen sheet 1047 accommodated from the rear face.

The rear cover 1048 is a roughly rectangular parallelepiped frame having an appropriate thickness in the front-to-rear direction, and is a frame that can be inserted from the rear into the opening 1046a of the front cover 1046. The four sides (four sides) of the front of the rear cover 1048 are provided with rear cover members 1048a that extend toward the center of the frame and are used to press and hold the four edges of the screen sheet 1047 housed in the front cover 1046 from the rear.

The screen sheet 1047 is received through the opening 1046a of the front cover 1046, and the four edges (four sides) of the screen sheet 1047 are held in a state sandwiched from the front and rear between the front cover member 1046b of the front cover 1046 and the rear cover member 1048a of the rear cover 1048 by inserting the rear cover 1048 from the rear and screwing it to the front cover 1046. The front cover member 1046b and rear cover member 1048a integrated with the screen sheet 1047 are positioned behind the light-transmitting plate 1045 and screwed to the rear side of the door frame 225.

The back panel 1049 has a left frame body, a lower frame body, and a right frame body, each of which has a continuous left wall, a lower wall, and a right wall, and has openings at the rear and upper part that allow the light emitted from the irradiation unit B to be projected onto the screen sheet 1047. The back panel 1049 is disposed behind the rear cover member 1048a and is attached by screwing it to the rear side of the rear cover member 1048a.

(Operational Effects and Modifications of Screen Unit C)
(1) In the present embodiment, when the screen sheet 1047 is attached to the rear side of the door frame 225, as shown in FIG. 100, a gap 1049 corresponding to the thickness of the front cover member 1046b is disposed between the screen sheet 1047 and the light-transmitting plate 1045. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of Newton rings that may occur when the screen sheet and the light-transmitting plate are in close contact with each other. The gap 1049 in the present embodiment is set to be 2 mm, but is not limited thereto, and may be any size within a range of about 0.5 mm to 5 mm depending on, for example, the quality of the image that can be seen through the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the strength of the front cover member 1046b.

(2) The screen sheet 1047 is manufactured using a mold, so one surface is smooth and the back surface is rough. Conventionally, in order to prevent the occurrence of Newton rings, the smooth surface of the screen sheet is arranged to be the entrance surface and the rough surface is arranged to be the display surface. However, because the display surface is rough, there are limitations to projecting high-quality images. However, in this embodiment, the occurrence of Newton rings can be prevented by providing a gap 1049 between the screen sheet 1047 and the light-transmitting plate 1045. For this reason, it is more preferable to arrange the screen sheet so that the rough surface is the entrance surface and the smooth surface is the display surface, thereby enabling the display of clearer, higher-quality images.

(3) The gap 1049 is provided by utilizing the thickness of the front cover member 1046b, which is a member for assembling the screen sheet 1047, so the number of parts and the number of assembly steps are not increased compared to a case where a gap is provided using a dedicated member. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a case where the gap 1049 is provided by utilizing the thickness of the front cover member 1046b. For example, in a case where the screen sheet 1047 is sandwiched and fixed between the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the rear cover 1048, a cover member (corresponding to the front cover member 1046b) that extends toward the center of the flat portion 1045a on the four sides (four sides) of the rear surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 and covers and holds the four edges of the screen sheet 1047 may be formed to provide a gap between the screen sheet 1047 and the light-transmitting plate 1045, which corresponds to the thickness of the cover member. Alternatively, a dedicated member (for example, a spacer member equivalent to the front cover member 1046b) may be used to provide a gap.

(4) In this embodiment, the four edges of the screen sheet 1047 are clamped and held, which improves the holding force compared to partial clamping, and also reduces the occurrence of gap variations depending on the location (for example, gap variations between the areas close to the four edges and the center).

1 Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R reels, 8L, 8C, 8R stop buttons, 71 main control board, 72 sub-control board, 100 main control circuit, 101 main CPU, 200 sub-control circuit, 201 sub-CPU

Claims (1)

A light emitting device is provided for performing light effects,
The light emitting device includes:
A plurality of light emitters;
A light guiding member having an incident surface facing the plurality of light emitting bodies and an exit surface that emits light incident from the incident surface forward ;
a lens member that covers the light exit surface; and a frame member that is arranged to cover at least a portion of the lens member ,
the light guide member is provided with a plurality of slits extending from the incident surface side toward the exit surface side and dividing the incident surface,
the light guide member has a plurality of incident portions separated by the slits,
a width of the slit on the incident surface is smaller than a width of the incident portion on the incident surface;
The frame member is plated,
The lens member is arranged so as to have a lower surface than the frame member .

Images